agroplus 60-70-80

introduction

This publication is intended for the trained technician who must operate on our tractors.

It contains all general information relating to our tractor range, and in particular it highlights the inspection, overhaulingand adjustment procedures as well as the main instructions for dismantling and reassembling operations.

The workshop manual is a natural summary for the mechanic who has attended the vocational training and specializa-tion courses, which are held every year at our Service School, to permit him to perform a precise and qualified work ontractor.

Its contents are therefore an exhaustive reference book for the experienced mechanic who desires to refresh his me-mory on the sequence of the operations to be done. It is then good practice for every authorized dealer mechanic tohave at his disposal this publication, so that it may be consulted quickly when necessary.

We wish to thank in advance for the cooperation all thos people, who will let us have their suggestions in order to makethis publication more complete.

1

WORKSHOP MANUAL

List of contents

Tractor configurations AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80 ......................................................................................................6Dimensions and weights...........................................................................................................................................7Prescribed lubricants and capacities ........................................................................................................................8Conversion tables.....................................................................................................................................................9Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................10

1 - ENGINE................................................................................................................................................................................11

2 - CLUTCHGearshift clutch.......................................................................................................................................................12General specifications ............................................................................................................................................12Cecking clutch ........................................................................................................................................................16Adjusting clutch control pedal .................................................................................................................................16Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit.....................................................................................................................16Stripping the slave cylinder.....................................................................................................................................17Stripping the master cylinder ..................................................................................................................................18Diagnosing malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................20POWERSHIFT unit, general specifications ............................................................................................................21POWERSHIFT unit detach from the gear box ........................................................................................................24Assembly of POWERSHIFT unit ...........................................................................................................................35Re-assembly of the POWERSHIFT unit. ...............................................................................................................37Fitting the oil manifolds of the POWERSHIFT unit ................................................................................................39Diagnosing malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................44

3 - TRANSMISSIONGeneral specifications ............................................................................................................................................45Technical specifications..........................................................................................................................................45Speed change configurations .................................................................................................................................47Section through transmission .................................................................................................................................51Section through transmission with POWERSHIFT unit ..........................................................................................52Separating the front gearbox from the engine ........................................................................................................61Dismantling the gearbox.........................................................................................................................................62Removal of the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts....................................................................................................62Separating the POWERSHIFT unit from the gearbox ...........................................................................................62Removal of the gear train positioned in the front gearbox ......................................................................................63Disassembly of the inversor control rods and forks ................................................................................................64Dismantling of the gearchange rod and fork assembly ..........................................................................................65Dismantling of the gearchange selector rods and forks assembly .........................................................................66Removal of the shaft with the actuator for engagement/disengagement of the front-wheel drive ..........................67Removal of the range gear shaft ........................................................................................................................... 67Examining parts removed.......................................................................................................................................68Adjusting play of the gearbox shafts by means of the thrust plates on the mini/inversorshaft and the secondary shaft ...............................................................................................................................69Warnigns related to assembly of the gears of the P.T.O. unit, the range reduction unit and synchronisedP.T.O. shaft ............................................................................................................................................................73Assembly of the P.T.O. ..........................................................................................................................................73Installation of the range reduction unit, the gear for the front-wheel drive shaftand the parking brake discs...................................................................................................................................73Points where sealant is to be used.........................................................................................................................75Tightening torques ..................................................................................................................................................78Bevel drive adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................81Servicing operations ...............................................................................................................................................82Rear power take-off ................................................................................................................................................83P.T.O. clutch...........................................................................................................................................................88Technical specifications..........................................................................................................................................89Correct positions of P.T.O. sensors and cables .....................................................................................................89Clutch inspection ....................................................................................................................................................91Checking clutch hydraulic pressures ......................................................................................................................92Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch .................................................................................93Renewal of the rear P.T.O. clutch ..........................................................................................................................94Main operations for removal of the rear P.T.O. unit ...............................................................................................95Diagnosing malfunctions ......................................................................................................................................100

2

4 - AXLESRear axle ..............................................................................................................................................................101Installing the rear half-shafts ...............................................................................................................................102Removal and disassembly of the epicyclic reduction unit.........................................................................................104Fitting lateral stub axles of the wheel ...................................................................................................................1052WD extendible axle.............................................................................................................................................106Removing the axle from the front support ............................................................................................................108Centre steering lever ............................................................................................................................................111Wheel hub ............................................................................................................................................................112End float adjustment .............................................................................................................................................114Front-wheel drive..................................................................................................................................................115Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................115Epicyclic reduction unit .........................................................................................................................................119Side hubs..............................................................................................................................................................121Tightening torques................................................................................................................................................122Adjusting bevel gears ...........................................................................................................................................124Adjustment of the internal control of the mechanical differential lock...................................................................125Installing the differential assembly into the drive axle ..........................................................................................125Diagnosing malfunctions ......................................................................................................................................126

5 - VEHICLEBrakes - General information................................................................................................................................127Hydraulic pump.....................................................................................................................................................128Assembly of brake master cylinder ......................................................................................................................130Checking the front brake disks on 2WD and 4WD front axles and the rear brake disks......................................131Adjusting service brake pedals.............................................................................................................................131Correct installation of inspection cover for parking brake discs............................................................................132Checking parking brake pads ...............................................................................................................................134Bleeding air from the brake hydraulic system.......................................................................................................135“Separate Brakes” valve .......................................................................................................................................136Diagnosing malfunctions ......................................................................................................................................140Hydraulic lift with “load sensing” ...........................................................................................................................141Installing the lift and front cover plate of the gearbox ...........................................................................................142Lift mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................142Checking the safety valves...................................................................................................................................142Checking the protrusion of the non-return valve...................................................................................................143Adjusting the lift ....................................................................................................................................................145Lift hydraulic circuit ...............................................................................................................................................147Sensing arm assemblyMontaggio dell'organo sensibile .......................................................................................154Power-lift distributor valve spring setting specifications .......................................................................................155Electronic lift .........................................................................................................................................................156Control panel ........................................................................................................................................................157Control level or depth control knob.......................................................................................................................157Mix position/draft control.......................................................................................................................................157Lowering speed control knob................................................................................................................................158Maximum lift height control knob..........................................................................................................................158Up/Down control switch........................................................................................................................................158Up control .............................................................................................................................................................158Control/Float mode ...............................................................................................................................................158Lift status indicator light ........................................................................................................................................158Remote pushbuttons for lift operation from ground ..............................................................................................159Lift operation.........................................................................................................................................................160List of electronic lift tests ......................................................................................................................................164Precautions for electronic equipment ...................................................................................................................173Checking the electronics system..........................................................................................................................173Checking mechanical components.......................................................................................................................173Front hydraulic liftSollevatore idraulico anteriore..................................................................................................174Hydraulic accumulator and antishock valve for front lift .......................................................................................176Front power take-off - General information...........................................................................................................177Section of the P.T.O. ............................................................................................................................................178Fitting the "RING-FEEDER" rings.........................................................................................................................182Checking the clutch ..............................................................................................................................................183Diagnosing malfuntions ........................................................................................................................................184Spring specifications.............................................................................................................................................184

3

6 - CONTROLSHydrostatic steering ..............................................................................................................................................185Inspections and checks ........................................................................................................................................186Steering pump ......................................................................................................................................................186Directional control valve .......................................................................................................................................186Check the setting of the pressure relief valve.......................................................................................................186Bleeding the hydraulic circuit ................................................................................................................................186Assembly of orbital pump unit ..............................................................................................................................186Teering wheel shaft and steering cylinders .........................................................................................................187Instructions for the hydrostatic steering distributor assembly...............................................................................189Diagnosing malfuntions ........................................................................................................................................192Mechanical controls ..............................................................................................................................................196Electro-hydraulic controls .....................................................................................................................................197Front P.T.O. clutch engagement control...............................................................................................................202Rear P.T.O. clutch engagement control ...............................................................................................................202Differential lock engagement control ....................................................................................................................202Front-wheel drive engagement control .................................................................................................................202Rear P.T.O. engagement control ..........................................................................................................................202Gearbox ................................................................................................................................................................202Front and rear lift ..................................................................................................................................................202Hydraulic circuit diagram ......................................................................................................................................202Solenoid valve - Specifications.............................................................................................................................207Adjustment of front and rear differential lock control ............................................................................................214

7 - BODYWORKPlatform ................................................................................................................................................................215Cab - General information ....................................................................................................................................216Cab air filter ..........................................................................................................................................................218Screen wash.........................................................................................................................................................218Screen wipers (front and rear) ..............................................................................................................................218Removing the driving platform complete with cab ................................................................................................219Breakage of the top hood release cable...............................................................................................................220High visibility cab roof ...........................................................................................................................................222

8 - SYSTEMSVentilation.............................................................................................................................................................223Heating System ....................................................................................................................................................223Air conditioning unit for cabs ................................................................................................................................227Operation and maintenance of the air-conditioning system .................................................................................228Water dripping from the points at which condensate drain lines are connected to the conditioning unit ............229Checking system ..................................................................................................................................................231System safety elements .......................................................................................................................................231Temperature regulation ........................................................................................................................................231Charging the system.............................................................................................................................................232Filling the metering unit ........................................................................................................................................232Refilling the system with oil ..................................................................................................................................232Verifying operation of the system after recharging ...............................................................................................234Directions for tightening air conditioning system pipeline fittings .........................................................................234Diagnosing malfuntions ........................................................................................................................................241Hydraulic system ..................................................................................................................................................242Oil filters ................................................................................................................................................................243Hydraulic pumps...................................................................................................................................................243Checking the relief valves of the hydraulic lift system ..........................................................................................243Stripping the hydraulic pump ................................................................................................................................244Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves ............................................................................................................................247Checking the pressure relief valve setting ............................................................................................................250Checking the operating pressure..........................................................................................................................250Conversion of auxiliary spool valves from double acting to single acting operation.............................................250Checking the surface of the valve spools .............................................................................................................250Trailer hydraulic braking system...........................................................................................................................251Use of the tractor with CUNA 341/01 hydraulic trailer braking .............................................................................253Installing the hydraulic braking valve for trailers equipped with “safety brake”( ITALIAN version) ................................................................................................................................................258Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (up serial number1017) - 70 (up serial number 2773) - 80.............................261Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) - 70 (under serial number 2772) ........................445

4

General safety directions......................................................................................................................................446Jump start utilizing another battery.......................................................................................................................447Recharge system..................................................................................................................................................449Heating system.....................................................................................................................................................450Starting system.....................................................................................................................................................450Ignition key ...........................................................................................................................................................452Ventilation control .................................................................................................................................................452Push button control...............................................................................................................................................452Beacon push button..............................................................................................................................................454Work ligths............................................................................................................................................................4542-Speed windscreen wiper switch ........................................................................................................................454Relay ....................................................................................................................................................................455Electronic flasher unit ...........................................................................................................................................455Switch controlling..................................................................................................................................................456Switch controlling: differential lock - P.T.O. clutch - 4RM - 540 1000 rpm/min P.T.O. speed selector -Economy P.T.O. - Live P.t.o. - electric starter system.........................................................................................456

Switch for emergency brake .................................................................................................................................456Fuse box...............................................................................................................................................................457Instrument panel with digital display.....................................................................................................................458Operation of the broken belts alarm control unit...................................................................................................460Engine stop operation with a type 2MH engine control unit .................................................................................462Electrical wiring.....................................................................................................................................................465

9 - APPENDIX

Power lift tester version 1.24a ...................................................................................................................................I

5

TRACTOR CONFIGURATIONS:

CAB

- ventilation

- ventilation + heating

- ventilation + heating + air conditioning

GEARBOX

Fully synchronised:

20 Forward + 10 Reverse: 5 speeds x 2 ranges (Hair-Tortoise)

+ SYNCHROSPLIT (H/fast-L/slow-R/rearward)

30 Forward + 15 Reverse: 5 speeds x 3 ranges (Hair-Tortoise-Snail)

+ SYNCHROSPLIT (H/fast-L/slow-R/rearward)

45 Forward + 45 Reverse: 5 speeds x 3 ranges (Hair-Tortoise-Snail)

+ shuttle + version POWERSHIFT - -

CONTROLS

- rear P.T.O. clutch with electro-hydraulic control

- 4WD with mechanical control or optional electro-hydraulic control

- electronic engine throttle

MECHANICALLY OPERATED REAR POWER-LIFT

- with supplementary rams

- without supplementary rams

MAIN EQUIPMENT

- front P.T.O.

- front lift

- hydraulic pump capacities increased by 27 l/min (for hydrostatic steering, electro-hydraulic control

unit and gearbox lubrication) and by 47 l/min (for trailer braking, auxiliary control valves and lift).

- hydraulic trailer braking

- 4-way or 6-way control valves with “Flow Divider”

- etc.

6

AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80 2RM WITH PLATFORM2RM WITH CAB4RM WITH PLATFORM4RM WITH CAB

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

AGROPLUS 60 AGROPLUS 70 -80

2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WDLength max:- without linkage (A) mm 3800 3835 3930 3985- with front and rear linkage (A) mm - 4350 - 4480Width min./max. (B) mm 1920 -2320 1920-2320 1920-2320 1920-2320

Height:- al telai di sicurezza (C) mm 2420 2420 1490- at cab (standard) (C) mm 2430 2430 1700- at cab (with air conditioning) (D) mm 2595 2595 2360Ground clearance (E) mm 345 345 365 365Wheel base (F) mm 2162 2112 2292 2242Front trackbase (G) mm 1400 1440 1400 1440min./max. 1300-1600 1340-1740 1300-1600 1340-1740Rear trackbase (H) mm 1500 1500 1500 1500min./max. 1400-1900 1400-1900 1400-1900 1400-1900Min. turning radiuswithout brakes (mm) 3500 4050 3700 4300Operating weight(without front lift)- with plataform kg 2355 2705 2555 2905- with cab kg 2550 2900 2750 3100Max. permissible load- front kg 240 240 240 240- rear kg 200 200 200 200- block kg - 250 - 250Tyres- front 7.50-16 12.4R 20 7.50-16 11.2R 24- rear 14.9R30 14.9R30 16.9R30 16.9R30

7

PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS

8

PR

ES

CR

IBE

DL

UB

RIC

AN

TS

AN

DF

UE

LSA

GR

OP

LU

S60

/70/

80

Par

t to

be

sup

plie

dLi

tres

(US

gal

)P

rod

uct

Sp

ecif

icat

ion

sS

DF

Gch

ang

eh

ou

rs

Eng

ine

AG

RO

PL

US

609.

5**

(2.5

)

Eng

ine

AG

RO

PLU

S70

/80

11**

(2.9

)

AK

RO

ST

UR

BO

15W

40

Sae

15

w4

0A

CE

AE

3-96

AP

IC

FS

DF

GO

M-1

991

MIL

-L-2

104

Ele

vel

MB

228

.3le

vel

500*

Gea

rbox

and

rear

axle

41(1

0.8)

AK

RO

SM

UL

TI

Sae

10

w3

0S

ae2

0w

30

UT

TO

AP

I GL

4S

DF

GO

T-1

891

1200

Cen

tral

axle

6(6

.3)

Sid

ere

duct

ions

1.5x

2(1

.6x2

)F

ron

tP

TO

2.5

(2.6

)

AK

RO

SM

UL

TI

Sae

10

w3

0S

ae2

0w

30

UT

TO

AP

I GL

4S

DF

GO

T-1

891

1200

Bra

kes

and

clut

chco

ntro

lM

AX

AK

RO

SM

AT

ICA

TF

DE

XR

ON

IID

SD

FG

OF

-169

1

Lubr

ifica

tion

poin

tsA

KR

OS

GR

EA

SE

T2

NLG

I2

-LI

TIO

SD

FG

GR

-12

02L

50

(*)1

°re

plac

ea

fter

50ho

urs

(**)

With

filte

r+

1.5

litre

s

CONVERSION TABLE FROM

FROM TO multiply by:inch cm 2.540cm inch 0.394foot m 0.305m foot 3.281yard m 0.914m yard 1.094Eng. miles km 1.609km Eng. miles 0.622Sq.in. cm2 6.452cm2 Sq.ft. 0.155Sq.ft. m2 0.093m2 Sq.ft. 10.77Sq.yard m2 0.835m2 Sq.yard 1.197Cu.in. cm3 16.39cm3 Cu.in. 0.061Cu.ft. Liter 28.36Liter Cu.ft. 0.035Cu.yard m3 0.763m3 Cu.yard 1.311Imp.gall. Liter 4.547Liter Imp.gall. 0.220US gall. Liter 3.785Liter US gall. 0.264pint Liter 0.568Liter pint 1.762quart Liter 1.137Liter quart 0.880oz. kg 0.028kg oz. 35.25lb. kg 0.454

kg lb. 2.203lb.ft. kgm 0.139kgm lb.ft. 7.233lb/in. kg/m 17.87kg/m lb/in. 0.056lb./sq.in. kg/cm2 0.070kg/cm2 lb/sq.in. 14.22lb./Imp.gall. kg/l 0.100kg/l lb./Imp.gall. 10.00lb./US gall. kg/l 0.120kg/l lb./US gall. 8.333lb./cu.ft. kg/m3 16.21kg/m3 lb./cu.ft. 0.062cu.ft./lb. m3/kg 0.062m3/kg cu.ft./lb. 16.21Nm kgm 0.102kgm Nm 9.81kW PS 1.36PS kW 0.736bar kg/cm2 1.014kg/cm2 bar 0.981dm3 l 1l dm3 1

9

HOW TO ORDER SPARE PARTS

To ensure perfect tractor efficiency thus avoiding serious drawbacks, and to optimize your investment and the operatio-nal expenses, the use of “ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS” is recommended.Spare parts orders must specify the following:

Tractor serial number and engine serial number (if the engine is concerned).Spare part name and reference code.

ENGINE TYPE AND TRACTOR FRAME TYPESERIAL NUMBER AND SERIAL NUMBER

10

AGROPLUS 60 and AGROPLUS 70 are powered by F3L 913 / F4L 913engines. The workshop manual for these engines cuold be ordered to thefollowing addresse:

DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLANDGmbHAbt. LT-ZEDeutz-Fahr-Straße 189415 LauingenTelefax-Nr.: 09072/997-360 or -353

Using the following code:

0297 7293

11

ENGINE

Earshift clutch

General specifications

The clutch, a single stage type, comprises a friction disc, a pressure plate and a diaphragm spring.The hydrostatic control is self-adjusting: a master cylinder operated by the pedal directs oil to the slave cylinder moun-ted to the left hand side of the intermediate housing, which in turn operates the clutch release lever.

Technical specifications Agroplus Agroplus Agroplus60 70-80 60-70-80

(USA) 6 blades

Type of clutch single disc dry single disc dry single disc dryorganic facing organic facing cerametallik facing

Type of operation hydrostatic with automatic take-up of free travel

Disc p/n 009.6913.3 009.6924.3/20 009.9770.3

Disc diameter mm 279,4 310 310

Minimum permissible thickness of disc mm 6 6 9,7

Thickness of friction disc mm 85 0 3

0 3, ,

,

-

+ 85 0 3

0 3, ,

,

-

+ 10-

+

0 2

0 2

.

.

Type of facing material on friction disc TEXTAR T385 TEXTAR T385 UA 330 DX

Type of master cylinder Benditalia 3/4"

Type of oil AKROS MATIC

Fig. 1 - Engine rpm pickup.

Spring specifications to Belleville washer for theclutch engagement

Load on the pressure plate Nm 11000

CAUTION: In the event the transmission being split to gain accessto the clutch assembly, the pickup (A, fig. 1) must be removed toavoid its being damaged by the teeth of the engine flywheel.

IIMPORTANT: In the event of the friction disc being removed, care must be taken during refitment to positionthe components correctly, as indicated, since the disc is not symmetrical.

12

23

2 Clutch and transmission

Clutch

Fig. 2 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60 Fig. 3 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 70-80

13

Clutch and transmission

Clutch

2

23

Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60-70-80 (USA) 6 blades

14

Clutch and transmission

Clutch

2

23

Fig. 4 - Components of clutch assembly

15

23

2Clutch and transmission

Clutch

Fig. 5 - Checking clutch disk thickness.

Fig. 6 - Clutch assembly hydraulic operating cyl-inder.

Fig. 7 - Checking operating cylinder inside springefficiency.

Fig. 8 - Bleeding the air from the clutch hydrauliccircuit.

Fig. 9 - Installing clutch assembly through n. 5.9030.256.4/10 equipment.

Cecking clutch

Check the disk lining for signs of chipping and the disk friction facefor scoring which may prevent the clutch from operating properly.

Check that the sliding surface of the engine flywheel is not scored;if signs of scoring are evident, machine the surface.Check the disk thrust plate for scoring or bluish areas caused bytempering and also ensure the diaphragm-type spring has not lostits efficiency; if so the whole clutch assembly shall be replaced.

Be sure the clutch disk is free to move in its housing and the frictionlining securing rivets are duly riveted.Should any wear be found on the thrust bearing or the diap-hragm-type spring, an exhaustive check over the spring operatingconditions installed in the disk thrust lever operating cylinder (seeFig. 6) shall be performed; replace if necessary.On reassembly ascertain dimension A (see Fig. 6) between theoperating cylinder fixing face and the push rod contacting the en-gagement lever is 195 mm.

NOTE: To facilitate correct clutch disk assembly the use of no.5.9030.256.4/10 centering tool is recommended.Warning: With engine running, never ride the clutch pedal withyour foot to prevent the clutch disk from being damaged becauseof overheating.Important: The thrust bearing is prelubricated, and must never onany account be cleaned with fuel oil or other solvents as these willrender the prelubrication treatment ineffective.

Adjusting clutch control pedal

Make sure the distance between pump fixing surface and fork hole

centre is 106 1 (Fig. 15) otherwise loosen nut A and operate adju-sting stay rod B (Fig. 15).

Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit

Operate the clutch pedal several times, then keeping the clutchpedal in fully depressed position, slightly unscrew and soon aftertighten the air bleeding screw valve again (this being located onthrust lever operating cylinder).This operation should be repeated as many times as the oil flowsout of the bleeding screw valve without air bubbles.

16

23


Clutch

A Bleed screw D Spring G Push rodB Hydraulic pipe fitting E Seal ring H Rubber bootC Slave cylinder body F Piston

Fig. 10 - Clutch operating cylinder

Stripping the slave cylinder (Fig. 10)

Remove the boot H. Withdraw the piston F carefully from the cylinderC, blasting with compressed air at low pressure to assist removal.Remove the spring D from the cylinder and loosen the bleed screwA.Remove the seals E fom the piston F.CAUTION: When cleaning the components of the cylinder, useonly specifically formulated brake and clutch fluids (see page110). Do not use petrol, paraffin or other mineral oils as these willdamage parts in rubber.

Inspections

— Check both internal and external piston surfaces for scratching.Replace if required.

— Make sure the seal ring grooves are duly clean; blow the groo-ves with compressed air if necessary.

— Inspect seal ring, dust boot conditions as well as spring effi-ciency, worn-out parts should be replaced.

— Ensure the air bleeding hole is free from impurities.

Notes on refitment

— When reconnecting the transmission housing, check that the clutchfork remainscorrectlypositionedand free to rockon its fulcrumpivot.Thiscanbeensuredby removing thesideplug fromthe flangeof theintermediate housing and viewing the fork through the hole. In theevent of the fork pivot being unseated, reposition correctly with theaidofascrewdriver inserted through theholevacatedby theplug.

— Before refitting the slave cylinder, fill with the recommended oilso as to facilitate the subsequent bleeding procedure.

— Once all components are correctly and securely in place, bleedthe hydraulic circuit.

A - Control leverB - Dust bootC - PushrodD - UnionE - PistonF - Seal ringG - Cylinder casingH - Spring

Fig. 11 - Clutch operating cylinder cutaway view.

17

23


Clutch

A Hydraulic pump F - Spring M - Spacer ring R - Snap ringB - Delivery pipe union G - Spring holder N - Piston S - Guard bootC - Delivery pipe H - Screw O - Seal ring T - NutD - Clamp I - Shoulder ring P - Rod U - YokeE - Union L - Seal ring Q - Support disk

Fig. 12 - Clutch hydraulic pump parts.

Stripping the master cylinder

Referring to figure 14, remove the protective boot E, dislodge the circlip B and withdraw the rod D together with thedisc C.Remove the piston together with the spacer, the seal, the backup washer and the spring beneath.

Fig. 13 - Clutch pump control positioning.A - LocknutB - Yoke

Fig. 14 - Pump control seal ring.A - Pump D - RodB - Snap ring E - Guard bootC - Support disk

18

23


Clutch

Inspections and checks

WARNING: To clean and wash the hydraulic pump components use only the oil type recommended for brakes andclutch. Never use petrol, kerosene or other mineral oils to prevent damaging the rubber parts.Inspect both internal and external piston sliding surfaces for scratching. Replace if required.Make sure the seal ring grooves are duly clean; blow the grooves with compressed air if necessary.Inspect seal ring, dust boot conditions as well as spring efficiency, worn-out parts should be replaced.Inspect all pump internal compartments, apertures and passages and make sure these are properly clean and free fromforeign matters.Check that the spring is neither lazy nor deformed; replace if necessary.

Reassembly

Reassemble the cylinder, repeating the disassembly steps in reverse order and observing the following directions:— Lubricate surfaces engaged in relative sliding contact, using the recommended oil (see page 12).— Verify correct operation of the cylinder, making certain that the piston is able to complete its full stroke unimpeded.In the event that the fork linking the master cylinder with the pedal has been removed, check that with the push rod fullyextended, the distance between the reference surface of the cylinder and the centre of the hole in the fork is as indicatedin figure 15.If not (referring to fig 13), remove the boot, loosen the lock nut A and screw or unscrew the fork B to obtain the prescri-bed clearance, then retighten the lock nut and reposition the boot.

Fig. 15 - Section view of clutch master cylinder

Clutch greasing points.Apply Molikote Gn-plus at all the points indicated in the figurewith letter A.Fit part B with Loctite 270.Fit pin C with Loctite 601.

Fitting the P.T.O. shaft oil sealBefore fitting the oil seal 2.1529.517.0 apply Loctite 222 tothe outer face A indicated in the figure.

19

23


Clutch

clutch slips

clutch jerks

clutch fails to disenga-ge

clutch noisy when di-sengaged

lubricant in clutchhousing

clutch worn

thrust bearing stic-king

clutch disk surfa-ces dirty

clutch disk warped

difficulty in enga-ging gears whenengine running

worn parts in clutchengagement me-chanism

renew the front ge-arbox oil seal andthe rear engine oilseal

check condition ofclutch disk

clean surfaces andapply grease

clean the frictionsurfaces

clutch disk surfa-ces dirty

clutch disk worn

plate seals loose

clutch disk warped

hydraulic pumpinefficient

clutch disk stuck toflywheel

replace parts

clean oil seal con-tact surfaces withpetrol

check condition ofthe spring disk

replace thrust bea-ring

replace clutch disk

replace clutch disk

replace clutch disk

replace disk

check the stroke ofthe clutch controlpiston and replaceany worn parts

clean contact sur-faces with a wirebrush and petrol

replace disk

fit new clutch as-sembly

clean or replace thedisk

20


Diagnosing malfunctions

POWERSHIFT unit

The POWERSHIFTunit is composed of an epicyclic speed reducerand three oil-immersed multiple disc clutches(LOW - MED - HIGH).The unit is located between the clutch-coupled shaft and the gearbox.The speed reducer is engaged and disengaged selectively by way of the three clutches, which are a push button

and mounted to the knob of the shift lever.

Selecting the control, theMED clutch releases as the force of the belleville discs is overcome by hydraulic pressu-re; at the same time, the HIGH clutch engages, locking the planet carrier of the epicyclic train to the relative housing sothat drive is transmitted to the range input shaft with no speed reduction whatever.

Selecting the control, the MED clutch releases as the force of the belleville discs is overcome by hydraulic pressu-re; at the same time, the LOW clutch engages, and the shaft carrying the sun wheel is locked to the structure of the tran-smission housing. As a result, the planet carrier is made to rotate as one with the epicyclic housing and drive is transmit-ted to the layshaft at a speed reduction of 0.687 (the ratio between the annulus and the sun wheel gear teeth).

Selecting the control, the POWERSHIFT unit is isolated from hydraulic pressure altogether and the bellevillediscs are able to engage the MED clutch, with the result that the shaft in mesh with the larger planet wheel is locked tothe transmission housing. This gives a reduction of 0.825, by reason of the compound ratio between the planet wheelsand the flange of the speed reducer in mesh with the range input shaft.

Technical specifications

Clutch

maker SAME DEUTZ - FAHR

number of friction discs 7 4 2

diameter of friction discs 129,5 129,5 129,5

overall thickness of assembled friction

discs complete the intermediate discs mm 25,2 ÷ 25,4 17,50 ÷ 17,60 11,70 ÷ 12,14

number of intermediate discs 3+1 2+1 2+1

disc lubrication pressure bar 5 5 5

maximum pressure bar 16 16 16

piston thrust Kg 1986 1986 1986

Nm 19463 19463 19463

Epicyclic speed reducer

- LOW 1 + (30/66) = 1,4545

- MEDIUM 1 + (21x18) : (66x27) = 1,2121

- HIGH 1

SLOW MEAN FAST

Fig. 1 - Range selection indicators mounted to the instrument panel. Fig. 2 - Plate indicating selection of electro-

hydraulic control.

21

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 3 - Diagram illustrating operation of the POWERSHIFT system.

Parts in movement Parts locked to transmission housing In rotation (idling)

Fig. 4 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with MED range selected.

22

27


POWERSHIFT

Parts locked to transmission housing

Parts in movement Oil circuit for operation of clutches In rotation (idling)

Fig. 5 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with LOW range selected.

Parts locked to transmission housing

Parts locked to epicyclic Oil circuit for operation of clutches In rotation (idling)

Fig. 6 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with HIGH range selected.

23

27


POWERSHIFT

POWERSHIFT UNIT DETACH FROM THE GEAR BOX

Fig. 7 - Detach the driving platform (or the cab, if fitted) fromthe tractor.

Fig. 9 - Detach the front gearbox from the rear gearbox.

Fig. 11 - Remove the internal clutch control from the frontgearbox.

Fig. 8 - Detach the front part of the tractor complete with en-gine from the gearbox.

Fig. 10 - Remove the upper cover from the front gearbox.

Fig. 12 - Remove the solenoid valve block from the frontright-hand side.

24

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 13 - The POWERSHIFT solenoid valve block is removedby pulling it outwards after having disconnected the pipesand removed the retaining screws.

Fig. 15 - Disconnect the delivery line from the POWERSHIFTunit by unscrewing the union.

Fig. 17 - Remove the POWERSHIFT unit from the front end ofthe gearbox.

Fig. 14 - Remove the hydraulic lubrication pipe of thePOWERSHIFT unit by first disconnecting the part on the out-side of the gearbox.

Fig. 16 - Using a drift as shown in the figure, drive thePOWERSHIFT unit out of the front of the gearbox.

Fig. 18 - After having removed the POWERSHIFT unit, pro-ceed with its disassembly, if necessary. Then remove theepicyclic reduction unit.

25

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 19 - Remove the planet carrier flange from the epicyclicreduction unit.

Fig. 21 - The play adjustment shim for the POWERSHIFTshafts is located between the housing and the epicyclic reduc-tion unit.

Fig. 23 - Remove the circlip indicated in the figure using a pairof bent nose pliers.

Fig. 20 - Remove the circlip and the thrust washer. Onre-assembly, the thrust washer must be fitted with the lubrica-tion channels facing inwards towards the planet carrier flange

Fig. 22 - To dismantle the POWERSHIFT unit, remove thecirclip indicated in the figure.

Fig. 24 - Remove the thrust washer.

26

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 25 - Unscrew the screws securing the LOW clutch hous-ing to the POWERSHIFT unit.

Fig. 27 - It is advisable to mark the relative positions of theparts prior to disassembly.

Fig. 29 - Remove the LOW clutch disc pack (7+7).

Fig. 26 - Remove the retaining screws.

Fig. 28 - Using a screwdriver, separate the housing from theunit.

Fig. 30 - Inspect the clutch discs for wear.

27

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 31 - Remove the circlip securing the hub of the LOWclutch.

Fig. 33 - Remove the circlip located behind the hub of theLOW clutch.

Fig. 35 - Using a drift, separate the MEDIUM-LOW housingfrom the rest of the unit.

Fig. 32 - Remove the hub of the LOW clutch.

Fig. 34 - Proceed with the disassembly of the housing of theMEDIUM-LOW" clutches.

Fig. 36 - Detach the MEDIUM-LOW housing from the unit.

28

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 37 - Remove the Belleville springs from the MEDIUMclutch.

Fig. 39 - MEDIUM clutch discs (4 friction discs+3counterdiscs+2 thrust plates).

Fig. 41 - This piston can be removed by removing the circlip ofthe piston return spring located on the opposite end of thehousing.

Fig. 38 - Remove the discs from the MEDIUM clutch.

Fig. 40 - The control piston of the LOW clutch may be re-moved from the “MEDIUM-LOW” bell-housing using a pressof the type illustrated below.

Fig. 42 - Remove the LOW clutch shaft.

29

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 43 - Check that the oil ways in the shaft are not ob-structed.

Fig. 45 - This piston can be removed by removing the circlip ofthe piston return spring located on the opposite end of thehousing.

Fig. 47 - Remove the thrust washer of the HIGH clutch.

Fig. 44 - The LOW clutch control piston can be removed fromthe housing using a press of the type illustrated below.

Fig. 46 - Remove the circlip securing the HIGH clutch discs.

Fig. 48 - Remove the HIGH clutch disc pack (2 friction discs +2 counterdiscs + 1 thrust plate).

30

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 49 - HIGH clutch discs.

Fig. 51 - Separate the HIGH clutch housing from the MEDIUMclutch housing using a press to compress the springs and re-move the circlip.

Fig. 53 - “ VESPEL” seals of the HIGH clutch housing.

Fig. 50 - HIGH clutch control piston.

Fig. 52 - Remove the MEDIUM clutch hub and then the rela-tive housing.

Fig. 54 - Remove the HIGH clutch housing.

31

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 55 - Remove the Belleville return springs of the HIGHclutch control piston from the MEDIUM shaft.

Fig. 57 - If necessary, remove the circlip and remove thebearing from the MEDIUM clutch housing.

Fig. 59 - Examine the condition of the seal ring of the pistonfrom the MEDIUM clutch housing.

Fig. 56 - Examine the condition of the “VESPEL” seals on theHIGH clutch housing.

Fig. 58 - Remove the piston from the MEDIUM clutch hous-ing.

Fig. 60 - Proceed to dismantle the LOW clutch control pistonwith the aid of a press.

32

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 61 - Remove the circlip securing the springs.

Fig. 63 - Disassembly sequence for the 5 Belleville washers.

Fig. 65 - Groove for O-ring in the LOW clutch housing.

Fig. 62 - Remove the assembly from the press and removethe Belleville springs.

Fig. 64 - Remove the piston.

Fig. 66 - Examine the condition of seal ring of the piston fromthe LOW clutch housing.

33

27


POWERSHIFT

A - Cover I - Seeger T - LOW sun wheelB - LOW clutch L - Clutch hub U - Planet carrierC - LOW clutch control piston M - Thrust plate V - Thrust washerD - Clutch housing N - Bearing Z - Ring gear

MEDIUM - LOW O - Thrust plate X - Planet gearsE - LOW clutch belleville springs P - MEDIUM clutch control piston J - LOW shaftF - MEDIUM clutch belleville springs Q - HIGH clutch housing Y - MEDIUM shaftG - Actuator disc R - HIGH clutch control piston W - Secondary shaftH - MEDIUM clutch S - HIGH clutch K - Reduction unit shaft

Fig. 67 - POWERSHIFT unit

34

27


POWERSHIFT

Assembly of POWERSHIFT unit

Fig. 68 - Components of POWERSHIFT unit

The POWERSHIFT unit requires that the basic gearbox, with respect top the standard version, is equipped with a se-condary shaft A and a range input shaft B, of specific type.

Warning: no special tools are required to re-assemble this unit, just an M8x1.25x30 screw to hold the central shaft C inposition during POWERSHIFT play adjustment.

Assemble the unit as follows:— Fit the input ring gear D to the secondary shaft, securing it with circlip E;

— Separately assemble LOW gear F with the planet carrier flangeG . When fitting gear F, the planets must be positio-ned so that their punch marks are aligned with the position reference marks on the carrier flange, (Fig. 69).

Timing reference countermark

Fig. 69 - Timing the epicyclic speed reducer of the POWERSHIFT unit.

35

27


POWERSHIFT

Timing marks on gear teeth of the epicyclic reduction of the POWERSHIFT unit.

Fig. 70 - Pre-assembly of parts on MEDIUM shaft. Fig. Pre-assembly of MEDIUM-LOW clutches.

36

27


POWERSHIFT

RE-ASSEMBLY OF THE POWERSHIFT UNIT.

Fig. 72 - Assemble the HIGH clutch. Fit the bearing with therelative snap rings in the MEDIUM clutch housing; fit the hubsecuring it with the relative circlip and fit the three servicecirclips to the housing. Fit the O-ring seals to the piston , thenfit the piston.

Fig. 74 - Fit the MEDIUM clutch discs.

Fig. 76 - Fit the circlip and check that the shaft has certainamount of play.

Fig. 73 - Fit the LOW shaft, the relative roller bearings, andposition the snap ring.

Fig. 75 - Apply Loctite 510 sealing compound to the housingcontact surfaces as shown in the figure.WARNING: when applying sealing compound take care notto obstruct the oil ways.

Fig. 77 - Fit the MEDIUM clutch thrust washer with outlets ori-ented towards the circlip.

37

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 78 - Join the two housings together; the studs will locatein the 3 holes to ensure the correct relative positions of thetwo housings. Rotate the shaft during this operation so as tocentre the clutch discs.

Fig. 80 - Fit the LOW clutch, first positioning the circlip on theshaft as indicated in the figure.

Fig. 82 - Then install the discs of the LOW clutch.

Fig. 79 - Note that a small space will be left between the twohousings; this is to allow preloading of the Belleville springswhen the screws are tightened.

Fig. 81 - Then fit the clutch hub and position the secondcirclip.

Fig. 83 - The disc pack is completed with a final friction disc,the tabs of which do not engage the splines on the hub, andtherefore, when refitting the cover, it is advisable not to rotatethe shaft so as to allow the disc tabs to mesh correctly with thehub.

38

27


POWERSHIFT

ADJUSTMENT OF END FLOAT IN THE POWERSHIFT UNIT (fig. 84)

Screw one M8x1,25x30 bolt finger tight into the cover W (fig 84), so as to hold the centre shaft of the H-M-L unit in posi-tion during the adjustment.

Measure dimensions Xand Ywith a gauge then calculate (X - Y - 1 mm) , which gives the thickness of the thrust washerK to fit.

Example: values measured X = 191,88 Y = 188,24

(191,88 - 188,24 - 1) = 2,64 ~ 2,6 mm (2.1599.727.0/10 washer required)

IMPORTANT: the thrust washer must be selected from those available to give either the exact thickness, or the nextthickness down from the value calculated.washer p/n:

2.1599.725.0/10 thicknesst 2.2 mm2.1599.726.0/10 thicknesst 2.4 mm2.1599.727.0/10 thicknesst 2.6 mm2.1599.728.0/10 thicknesst 2.8 mm2.1599.729.0/10 thicknesst 3 mm2.1599.730.0/10 thicknesst 3.2 mm2.1599.731.0/10 thicknesst 3.4 mm2.1599.732.0/10 thicknesst 3.6 mm2.1599.733.0/10 thicknesst 3.8 mm2.1599.734.0/10 thicknesst 4 mm

— Fit a shim of the predetermined thickness on the LOW shaft with the relative circlip— Fit the epicyclic reduction unit in the gearbox and then fit the POWERSHIFT clutches unit, applying Silastic sealing

compound to the contact surfaces.

Fig. 84 - Location of the preassembled POWERSHIFT unit in its housing.

39

27


POWERSHIFT

A - pressure regulator valve F - solenoid control valves(operating pressure 16 bar) G - electro-hydraulic control unit

B - gearbox lubrication oil H - anticavitation valve for safety steeringpressure setting valve (setting 5 bar) I - bistable valve

C - anticavitation valve for safety L - safety steering valvesteering (30 l/min.) M1 - pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar

D - oil pump (capacity 10 to 27 l/min.) M2 - pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 barE - suction filter (25 micron) M3 - pressure gauge with scale 0 - 10 bar

T - lubrication

Fig. 85 - Hydraulic diagram illustrating operation.

40

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 86 - Electrohydraulic control unit for POWERSHIFT system.

PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE H-M-L CONTROL UNIT INLET PRESSUREReferring to Fig. 86:

1 - Connect pressure gauge 5.9030.514.0 (0 ÷ 40 bar) at position M1.

2 - Connect pressure gauge 5.9030.515.0 (0 ÷ 10 bar) at position M2.

Start the engine and throttle up to the revolutions indicated in the table; now verify that the inlet pressures are as prescribed.

NB: Pressure tests should be conducted using oil at a temperature of 80 °C.

A - Test fitting for testing pressure of LOW clutch hydraulic circuitB - Bistable valveC - Valve bodyD - Non-return valveE - Non-return valveF - Oil pressure regulator valveG - Lubrication pressure control valveH - Delivery line to P.T.O.I - Delivery line to differential lockL - P.T.O. lubrication pipeM - P.T.O. disk lubrification manifoldN - Manifold for P.T.O. clutch oil pipeO - Secondary shaft and POWERSHIFT lubrification pipeP - Pipe from radiator oil to the gearboxQ - Delivery line to front-wheel drive engagement pistonM1 - Pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 barM2 - Pressure gauge for P.T.O. lubrication pipeM3 - Pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar for pressure at P.T.O.

41

27


POWERSHIFT

A - Gearbox lubrication oil pressurecontrol valve (5 bar)

B - Non-return valve 30 l/minC - Sequence valve

(operating pressure 16 bar)D - Non-return valveT - ReturnL1- P.T.O. clutch lineL2- Secondary shaft and POWERSHIFT

lubrication

Fig. 87 - POWERSHIFT pressure control valves assembly

42

27


POWERSHIFT

Fig. 88 - Hydraulic control circuit.

43

27


POWERSHIFT

clutch slips

clutch won’tdisengage

check the clutchassembly hydraulicsystem

check piston forfree stroke

check the clutchplates for wear

inspect the controlmechanism

inspect the disks

piston jammed inseat

replace the defecti-ve parts

examine piston andmanifold seal rings

remove any roug-hness preventingpiston from slidingfreely

replace the clutchdisks

replace defectiveparts

burnt disks

relpace the piston

replacedefective parts

replace the disks

jammed disksremove any roug-hness preventingdisks from slidingfreely

44




The basic transmission utilizes 5 speed synchromesh gearbox with 2 or 3 speed ranges.

A shuttle, fitted as standard, makes the tractor easy to handle and manoeuvre.

Options include Creeper, and Underdrive (in place of or in addition), giving a total of:

For tractors equipped with platform or cab20 FWD + 10 REV: 5 gears x 2 ranges (L-V) + mini-reduction + reverser shuttle30 FWD + 15 REV: 5 gears x 3 ranges (SR-L-V) + mini-reduction + reverser shuttle.45 FWD + 45 REV: 5 gears x 3 ranges (SR-L-V) + reverser shuttle + POWERSHIFT

Each version is also available with 30 or 40 km/h top speed.


number of speeds 20 AV + 10 RM

gearbox ratios

1st gear 19/59 = 1/3,1053

2nd gear 23/50 = 1/2,1739

3rd gear 29/44 = 1/1,5172

4th gear 35/38 = 1/1,0857

5th gear 41/32 = 1/0,7805

shuttle forward 29/37 = 1/0,7838

reverse 23/19 = 1/0,8261

range ratios low (19/50)x(22/46)= 1/5,5024

high 1

rear axle ratios bevel gear pair 30 km/h 8/39 = 1/4,8750

40 km/h 9/33 = 1/3,6667

epicyclic final drive (12/12+69) = 1/6,7500

overall ratio 30 km/h 1/32,9063

40 kmIh 1/24,7502

backlash between crownwheel

and pinion teeth mm 0,18 - 0,24

Mini-reduction 32/34 = 1/0,9412

Super-reduction (19/50)x(22/46)x(19/50)x(20/48) = 1/34,7520

axial play of the secondary shaft mm 0,09

axial play of the gears of the change,

of the reverser and mini-reduction mm 0,15 ÷ 0,30

reference distance for adjustment

of bevel gear pai rmm 2,5 ± 0,1

45

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Speed change configurations

DURING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS ON PUBLIC ROADS BOTH BRAKE PEDALS MUST BEOBLIGATORILY COUPLED BY MEANS OF THE SPECIAL LOCKING LATCH. IN ANY CASE,

ALWAYS OBSERVE LAWS AND REGULATIONS IN FORCE.

46

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

20 + 10

30 +15

45 + 45

Powershiftcontrol

GearshiftingControl

Synchrosplitcontrol

Speed rangeControl

NO. OF SPEED(forward + reverse)

* see technical characteristics of gearbox on p. 45

** see technical characteristics of 4wd front axle on p. 115

Fig. 2 - Ratios of 5-speed x 2 range transmission with mini-reduction (20 FWD + 10 REV).

47

31

3Transmission

Gearbox



Ratios of 5-speed x 2 range transmission with mini-reduction and super-reduction (30 FWD + 15 REV).

48

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox



Fig. 3 - Ratios of transmission with 3 ranges (Super-reduction) + POWERSHIFT (45 FWD + 45 REV).

49

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Assemble the front and rear gearboxes and the rear hydraulic lift,after having applied PIANERMETIC 510 to surfaces Aand LOCTITE 636 to bushes B.

Fig. 4 - Front and rear gearbox.

50

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

Fig. 5 - Longitudinal section through transmission.

51

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Fig. 6 - Longitudinal section through transmission with POWERSHIFT unit.

52

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Fig. 7 - Rear axle longitudinal section.

53

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Fig. 8 - Inversor lever (A -Side view and B -Front view) - C - Range reduction lever. X - Version with Mini-reduction Y - Version without Mini-reduction

54

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

A

Y

X

B

A C

55

Fig. 9 - Gear lever. Fig. 10 - Front view of gearbox with FULLDRIVE.

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Fig. 11- Views of the gearbox.

56

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Fig. 12 - Electro - hydraulic control for front-wheel drive engagement/disengagement.

57

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Asse ruota

97080.2

ø0.4

3.2

M16x1.5

0.25-0.75

127 +0.2

1.5

70.7 ±0.1

Fig. 13 - Gear selector rod. A - bolts securing hubs to rod. Fig. 14 - Gear selector rod. B - C - bolts securing hubs to rod.

58

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Range selector rods and forks

Fig. 15 - Range selector rod. D - bolt securing hub to rod.

Correct positioning of the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers.Fit the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers so that the grooves are oriented as shown in the figure.

Fig. 16 - Correct positioning of the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers.

59

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS

Removal of the front gearbox without removing the platform

— Place wedges under the front axle support and remove the rear wheels;

— Disconnect the 3 pipes (supply, return and breather) and disconnect the electrical lead of the fuel level sensor;

— Loosen the screws securing the fuel tank supports and remove the tank.

— Disconnect the rear brake pipes which pass over the two gearboxes, collecting the oil in a suitable container (all the oil inthe brake oil reservoir will drain out).

— Remove the two screws securing the platform to the front silent-blocks, and raise the front of the platform a few centime-tres using a hoist or a support with adjustment screw;this operation is necessary in order to access and loosen the two upper gearbox retaining screws.

— Remove the guard from the front-wheel drive transmission shaft, then release the sleeve coupling the transmission shaftto the gearbox, by removing the snap ring securing the lock pin and then removing the pin.

— Slide the sleeve towards the front of the tractor in order to disengage the transmission shaft from the gearbox output shaft.

— Using a pair of long-nose pliers, remove the circlip from the gearbox output shaft, thereby allowing the shaft to bewithdrawn from the front gearbox.

— Disconnect the oil delivery and return lines from the oil cooler located under the platform and to the right of the rear gear-box (relative to the driving position). The return line is connected to the POWERSHIFT solenoid control valves as the oilreturning from the cooler in the front engine compartment supplies the electro-hydraulic POWERSHIFT control circuit.

— Disconnect the oil line between the POWERSHIFT control unit and the electro-hydraulic services control valve group,then remove the POWERSHIFTsolenoid control valve block, after having disconnected the electrical leads from the sole-noid valves.

— Disconnect the lubrication line from the solenoid valve block for electro-hydraulic controls to the gearbox.

— Remove the tool box positioned on the right-hand side of the tractor under the driving platform.

— Unscrew the oil drain plug located under the rear gearbox (a container of at least 33 litres will be required to collect the oil).

— Disconnect all electrical leads from the starter motor and the lead connected to the engine oil pressure switch.

— Unplug the bulkhead connector for the wires to the group of dashboard warning lights.

— Detach the retaining strap of the brake/clutch oil reservoir, disconnect the level sensor lead and remove the reservoir (thereservoir will remain connected to its delivery lines).

— Detach the throttle and engine stop Bowden control cables from the governor.

— Disconnect the two oil delivery-return lines from the hydrostatic steering cylinder in the area above the engine and nearthe dashboard.

— Disconnect the bracket located in the central part of the cable/pipe duct positioned above the engine, and disconnect theoil delivery line to the oil cooler from the hydrostatic steering control valve (this pipe is to be disconnected at its middlepart).

— Disconnect the front hydraulic lift delivery line from the cock located at the rear of the tractor above the lift.

— Position tool 5.9030.002.0 (mobile stands on tracks) to support the front and rear gearboxes, then remove all the screwsconnecting the two gearboxes together.

— Put the gear lever in neutral and loosen the two screws securing the relay hub complete with the lower rod which entersthe gearbox and then remove the hub.

— Put the inversor control lever in neutral and loosen the screw securing the lever in the control rod housing; remove the tworelay hub retaining screws and remove the hub itself.

— Loosen the hex socket screw (or the two hex socket screws if the tractor is fitted with a minireduction unit) securing thegear control rod (see fig. 28 page 62).

— Holding the rear gearbox in position, move the front wheels to separate the two gearboxes (time required 3,5 to 4 hours)

WARNING: under no circumstances undo union B Fig 19 (hex head), located on the left-hand side of the gearbox.

This union holds the oil manifold D Fig. 19 for engagement of the front-wheel drive transmission shaft. If this union is remo-ved, the manifold would rotate downwards, thereby making it necessary to dismantle the gear hub in order to reposition it andrefit the union.

The delivery pipe C Fig. 19 of the front-wheel drive engagement actuator is connected at the opposite end, inside the gear-box, to the group of solenoid control valves for the hydraulic services E Fig. 19; if this group is to be removed, undo union AFig. 19, to prevent deformation of the internal pipe.

Fig. 17 - Gearbox removal.

60

Transmission

Gearbox

3

31

Fig. 18 - Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox

Separating the front gearbox from the engine

(this operation is necessary in order to access the POWERSHIFT unit)

— Remove the engine pick-up from the top of the gearbox (in the area of the spacer housing).

— Place wedges under the front axle support.

— Disconnect the fuel delivery pipe in the area between the front gearbox and the engine.

— Disconnect the two front brake pipes and the differential lock control pipe.

— Support the front gearbox on a stand.

— Remove the 10 screws securing the front gearbox to the engine flange, then detach the gearbox.

61

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

� Dismantling the gearbox.

— Remove the 8 screws securing the top cover and then remove the cover itself.

— Remove the gearbox clutch control located in the spacer housing as follows:—— Remove the thrust bearing.

— Remove the lock pin and withdraw the control lever.

— Undo the union and remove the oil delivery pipe to the POWERSHIFT unit.

— Unscrew the 2 screws and the 2 nuts securing the POWERSHIFT unit;

— Remove the 2 retaining screws of the POWERSHIFT control valve unit, (one of these screws also secures the fuelprefilter with the relative pipe).

NOTE:one of the screws has an extension with a small plate to support the clutch control lever; these parts are to be re-moved together with the screw.

� Removal of the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts

— Remove the circlip attaching the gearbox input shaft to the inversor shaft coupling sleeve.Withdraw the 2 shafts from the front of the spacer housing (the shafts should be withdrawn together to prevent damageto the seal ring positioned between them).

NOTE: To replace the seal on the gearbox input shaft, it will be necessary to remove the cab or platform to gain accessto the upper cover of the gearbox, from which the seal housing may be accessed.

� Separating the POWERSHIFT unit from the gearbox— Using a copper drift, tap the housing of the POWERSHIFT unit in order to extract from the front part of the spacer ho-

using;(if the purpose of this operation is solely to inspect or replace the hydraulic clutches, it will not be necessary to remo-ve the epicyclic reduction unit from the gearbox or to remove the cab/platform).

— If instead the epicyclic reduction unit is to be removed, simply withdraw it from the front of the gearbox, then removethe calibrated thrust washer and the circlip, and then remove the housing complete with the ring gear.

— The POWERSHIFT clutch units are to dismantled on the bench.

NOTE: for instructions on dismantling the POWERSHIFT unit, see page 24.

62

31

Transmission

Gearbox

3

� Removal of the gear train positioned in the front gearbox

WARNING: On tractors equipped with POWERSHIFT, first follow the instructions to remove the POWERSHIFT unitand the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts.For the following operations the driving platform or cab must be removed in order to gain access to the upper gearboxcover.

Before proceeding with the removal of the gear train, it is necessary to remove the selector rods and forks. These opera-tions are only possible after having separated the rear gearbox from the front; before separating the two gearboxes, re-move D fig. 5 on page 51.Detach the front gearbox from the rear gearbox. To do this, it will be necessary to remove the 5 speed relay hub togetherwith the intermediate support, located on the right-hand side of the rear gearbox. Remove screw A (fig. 14) screws B(fig. 15) and screw D (fig. 16).

NB: Remove the selector rod detent balls and springs by unscrewing the relative plugs located on the right-hand side ofthe gearbox. Then proceed with the separation of the two gearboxes.The 3 gearbox shafts (inversor, primary and secondary) and the gear selector and inversor control rods and forks willremain attached to the front gearbox. To remove these rods, it will first be necessary to remove the 3 shafts by removingthe 3 circlips A - B - C fig. 5 on page 51 and then moving all 3 shafts simultaneously backwards to disengage them fromtheir housings; the first shaft to be detached will be the primary shaft, followed by the secondary, and then the input shaftlocated at the uppermost part of the gearbox is to be withdrawn. Each selector rod will come away together with its shaft.

Fig. 19 - Oil pipe from the solenoid control valve to the hydraulic actuator responsible for engaging/disengaging front-wheel drive.

A Pipe union on solenoid valve end B Pipe union on actuator ende C Connection pipe.D Manifold E Solenoid valve assembly

63

M1

6x1

.5

A

E

D C B

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Fig. 20 - Retaining screws of the gear rods to beremoved prior to detaching the front gearbox fromthe rear gearbox.

A retaining screw of the inversor controlrod hub

B retaining screws of the gear controlrod hubs.

C Range gear control rod.

D Gearchange control rod.

E Inversor/minireduction control rod.

Disassembly of the inversor control rods and forks

Disengage the fork from the sleeve and rotate it so that the hole in the fork is aligned with the retaining pin; then, using adrift as shown in figure 23, tap the pin out of the hole.On tractor equipped with a minireduction unit, repeat the above operations to remove the second selector fork.

Fig. 21 - Components of inversor rod and fork assemblye forgearbox with minireduction.

Fig. 23 - Removal of the fork retaining pin.

Fig. 22 - Rod and fork for gearbox without minireduction.

Fig. 24 - Removal of fork from control rod.

64

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

Dismantling of the gearchange rod and fork assembly.

Fig. 25 - Detach the rod with forks from the secondary shaftby moving it laterally

Fig. 27 - Disengage the 1st gear selector fork from the sleeveand rotate it to align the hole on the fork with the retaining pin.Then, using a suitable drift, drive the pin out of the hole.Detach the 2nd and 3rd gear selector forks and sleeves in thesame way.

Fig. 29 - Remove the sleeve located on the rod between se-lector fork.

Fig. 26 - Remove the screw securing the rod hub and removethe hub from the rod.

Fig. 28 - Withdraw the gearchange control rod.

Fig. 30 - Rotate the 4th and 5th gear the two forks. so that thehole on the fork is aligned with the retaining pin, then using adrift and a hammer as shown in figure 23, drive the pin out ofthe hole (the figure shows the components of the selector rodsand forks assembly).

65

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Dismantling of the gearchange selector rods and forks assembly

Fig. 31 - Unscrew the 6 retaining screws and remove thecover giving access to the gearchange selector rods andforks assembly. Then using a spanner, unscrew the guidebolt of the super-reduction control fork.

Fig. 33 - Unscrew the guide screw of the L-V selector fork.

Fig. 35 - Remove all the parts mounted on the rod, recoveringthem from the lateral access hole.

Fig. 32 - Unscrew the guide screw of the central sleeve lo-cated between the 2 forks. (NB. Loctite has been applied tothese screws; we recommend that they are heated using anoxyacetylene torch to facilitate removal).

Fig. 34 - Access the front compartment of the gearbox extractthe rod by pulling the hub.

Fig. 36 - Parts comprising the selector rod and forks themfrom the lateral access hole assembly for the super-reductionunit and range gears.

66

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

Removal of the shaft with the actuator for engagement/disengagement of the front-wheel drive

Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox, (it is first necessary to remove circlip (A fig 37). Unscrew union B ( fig19 page 63) located on the left-hand side of the rear gearbox and remove the front shaft complete with the front-wheeldrive actuator.

IMPORTANT: Only unscrew union B fig. (19 page 63) located on the left-hand side of the rear gearbox when the twogearboxes are separated, as refitting is only possible in this condition.

Disassemble the unit, removing the circlip securing the oil manifold and the circlip securing the thrust plate of the helicalspring; then disassemble the unit into its component parts, inspecting for wear the two oil seals (on the shaft and in con-tact with the control piston) and the areas in contact with the oil manifold.WARNING: the valve located inside the shaft must be positioned as shown on page 75.

Fig. 37 - Front-wheel drive output.

Removal of the range gear shaftSeparate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox, (it is first necessary to remove circlip A fig. 37) remove the right rearwheel support and the cover on which the electro-hydraulic control valves are mounted, detach the oil pipe for 4WD di-sengagement by undoing union B (fig. 19 on page 65) located on the solenoid valve mounting on the right-hand side ofthe gearbox. Remove the cover supporting the internal parking brake control.Then remove the synchronised P.T.O. shaft by removing the retaining flange mounted on the rear of the gearbox andremove the synchronised P.T.O. engagement sleeve mounted on the 4WD shaft, which can be accessed through thespace left void by removal of the wheel support.Remove circlip B fig. 37 and thrust plateC fig. 37, which can be accessed through the space created by removal of thewheel support.Working through the aperture created by removal of the cover on which the electro-hydraulic control valves are moun-ted, remove circlips D - E - F - G fig. 37 and pull shaft towards the front of the gearbox.

67

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

A BCD E F G

Fig. 38 - Equipment 5.9030.002.0 for the disman-tling the gearbox.

Fig. 39 - Visual control of the tooth of the gears.

Fig. 40 - Unit synchronizer.

Fig. 41 - Checking slide of the bearing.

Examining parts removed

Gearbox case

Gearbox case should show no cracks, bearing seats must not beworn or damaged.

If seriuos damage or excessive wear is occured replace the partsconcerned.

Whenever the gearbox is disassembled clean all sealing surfacesremoving old adhesive and applying some new on all surfacesevenly when reassembling.

Shafts

Examine shafts for excessive wear and shaft splines for pitting,these should allow the gears to slide freely.

Gears

Examine gear teeth for wear or damage and make sure thesework on the whole contact surface.

Check also the gear-mounted bushings for seizing: if so replacethem.

Synchronizers

Check the ring inside tapered portion for excessive wear or dama-ge and be sure the gear part being frictioned by the synchronizerdoes not show signs of scoring which may prevent the gear frommeshing correctly.

To check the synchronizer ring for wear, measure the distance

from the friction cone; reading should be 125 0 15

0 3, ,

,

-

+mm with a new

synchronizer or drop to zero when the ring is maximally worn.

Bearings

Bearings should be in perfect conditions without showing excessi-ve radial or end play.Holding the bearings pressed by hand and making them simulta-neously turn in both directions of rotation a free sliding as well asno roughness at all should be felt.

Examine the taper roller bearings for proper working conditions,these should be neither worn nor overheated, replace as soon aspoor working efficiency is suspected, as an abnormal bearingoperation may result in either gear tooth seizure or noisy gearbox.

Warning: oil leakages from the clutch-disk-to-gearbox shaft orthe engine-flywheel-to-P.T.O.-clutch shaft may be stopped whenthe assembly procedure is performed with the utmost care andoperating in such a way that the splined parts are prevented fromdamaging the O-ring and also providing a thorough cleaning of theparts prior to being installed.

68

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

ADJUSTING PLAY OF THE GEARBOX SHAFTS BY MEANS OF THE THRUST PLATES ONTHE MINI/INVERSOR SHAFT AND THE SECONDARY SHAFT

� MINI/INVERSOR SHAFTS

Circlip position for measurement of distance “X”

Adjusting the play of the minireduction gear mounted on the inversor shaft.

Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of minireduction gear (z=35) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate thic-kness from among those available:

cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0

Play X is to be measured by pushing the spacer B in the direction indicated by the arrow up to the point where thesynchroniser is pushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the forward speed gear (z=37) in the directionindicated by the arrow up against circlip A.


Adjusting the play of the forward speed gear on the inversor shaft (version with minireduction).

Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the forward speed gear (z=35) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriatethickness from among those available:

cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0

Play X is to be measured by pushing the gear (z=23) in the direction indicated by the arrow so that the synchroniser ispushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the minireduction gear (z=35) in the direction indicated by thearrow up against circlip A.

69

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

� REVERSE SHAFT


Adjusting the play of the reverse gearwheel mounted on the shuttle shaft.Obtain play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of reverse gearwheel (z = 23) by selecting and fitting a thrust washer R of suitable thic-kness from those available:

cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0

Play X is measured by pushing the forward gearwheel (z=37) in the direction indicated by the arrow, thereby pushingthe synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.

� SECONDARY SHAFT 1st SPEED


Adjusting the play of the 1st speed gear (z=59).

Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 1st speed gear (z=59) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate thic-kness from among those available:

cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0

Play X is to be measured with a feeler gauge while pushing spacer B in the direction indicated by the arrow so that thesynchroniser is pushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the 2nd speed gear (z=50) in the direction indi-cated by the arrow up against circlip A.

70

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

� SECONDARY SHAFT 2nd/3th SPEED


Adjusting play of 2nd speed gear cluster

Obtain play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 2nd speed gear cluster by selecting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thic-kness from among those available:

cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0

Play X is to be measured using a feeler gauge while pushing the 3rdspeed gear in the direction of the arrow, thereby pu-shing the synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.


Adjusting play of 3rd speed gear

Obtain a play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 3rd speed gear by selecting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thickness fromamong those available:

cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0

Play X is to be measured using a feeler gauge while pushing the 3rdspeed gear in the direction of the arrow, thereby pu-shing the synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.

71

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

� SECONDARY SHAFT 4th/5th SPEED

Circlip position for measurement of distance "X"

Adjusting the play of the 4th speed gear cluster.Obtain a play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of the 4th speed gear cluster by selecting and fitting a thrust washer R of the appro-priate thickness from those available:

cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0

Play X is to be measured using a feeler gauge while pushing the3rdspeed gear in the direction of the arrow, thereby pu-shing the synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.

SECONDARY SHAFT

Shimming the front bearing of the secon-dary shaftFit shims of appropriate thickness to reduceend-float between the shaft and the bearingto the minimum possible amount. By fittingthe correct shims you can obtain a maxi-mum play of 0.09 mm.

INPUT SHAFT AND INVERSOR SHAFT

Fitting the bush joining the input shaft to the inversor shaftFit bush A oriented as shown in the figure to facilitate subsequentremoval.

72

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

Fitting the spacer determining the stroke of the valve for hydraulic disengagement of front-wheel drive.To allow correct disengagement of the front-wheel drive, bush A must be installed as shown in the figure above.

WARNINGS RELATED TO ASSEMBLY OF THE GEARS OF THE P.T.O. UNIT, THE RANGEREDUCTION UNIT AND THE SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. SHAFT

Assembly of the P.T.O.

Install:— The synchronised P.T.O. output shaft (to be installed after the range reduction unit);

— The P.T.O. output shaft and relative gears;— The rear P.T.O. Shaft.

Installation of the range reduction unit, the gear for the front-wheel drive shaft and the par-king brake discs

— Position on the bottom of the gearbox the L-V range reduction unit (complete with bushes and roller cage) and thesuper-reduction gear (complete with roller cage).

— Slide the shaft, complete with circlip, through the front end of the gearbox, and fit the previously positioned gearsonto the shaft.

— Fit the thrust washer and 2 circlips.— Position the drive gear of the front-wheel drive complete with parking brake discs.— Fit the ball bearing for the rear end of the shaft, inserting it in its housing in the gearbox.— Insert the thrust washer and position the circlip.— Position the bearing and the bearing circlip in the housing;— Fit the thrust washer and the circlip;— Install the synchronised P.T.O. shaft in the rear end of the gearbox, and fit the control sleeve to the shaft.— Fit the bevel pinion and the gears of the range reduction unit with the relative synchroniser;— Fit the differential housing complete with the crown wheel and the internal differential lock control.

Warnings:The spacer installed on the rear output shaft is fitted with an O-ring on the outer surface and an internal oil seal.To remove this spacer requires the use of a puller to be attached to the spacer using the two holes provided.At each dismantling of the pins of the brake and clutch control levers, check the bushes for wear.

73

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Fig. 42 - Range gearbox

Fig. 43 - Removal of the groundspeed P.T.O. sleeve. Fig. 44 - Removal of the circlip securing the shaft.

Fig. 45 - Gears on range gearbox shaft. Fig. 46 - Checking the oil seals on the 4WD shaft.

74

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

75

Fig. 47 - Range gearbox synchronizer. Fig. 48 - Secondary shaft cover plate

Range gearbox synchronizer. Fitting the secondary shaft cover plate. Fit the cover A

Warning: the synchronizer hub must installed so that the applying LOCTITE 601 around the hole of the front gearbox

indicated by the arrow is positioned as shown in the figure. casing indicated X in the figure.

B - secondary shaft

Fig. 49 - Fitting the transmission speed sensor pickup.

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Fitting the baulk ring of the synchronizer forthe 1st speed gear mounted on the secon-dary shaft.Should it be necessary to restore the correctplay X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of the 1st speedgear (z=59), it is possible to select asynchroniser baulk ring of suitable thic-kness from the two available, as shown inthe figure.

Fig. 51 - Bearing for 4WD shaft.

Fig. 50 - it the 50x90x20 ball bearing, indicated A in the figure, without theretaining ring.

Fig. 52 - Position the groundspeed P.T.O. cover plate as indicatedin the figure.

76

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

Points where sealant is to be used

Fig. 53 - Rear gearbox.

Apply LOCTITE n° 601 to the base of studs A (n° 9) - B (n° 1) - C (n° 1), as shown in the figure, prior to assembly.

Fig. 54 - Fitting the wheel support.

Apply PIANERMETIC 510 sealant to the surfaces indicated with the letter L in the figure; apply SILASTIK sealant to the surfaces indi-cated with the letter S.

77

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Fig. 55 - Correct installation of the support tube for the clutch control sleeve.

Position the gearbox vertically with side A facing upwards. Apply Loctite 601 to the seat of the tube and fit the tube.

Wait about 1 hour before returning the gearbox to the horizontal position.

Tightening torques

Degrease and clean all bolts/screws before tightening.Kgm Nm

crown wheel retaining bolts 7 ÷ 8 68 ÷ 78

differential flange retaining bolts 6 58

bolts securing differential cage to half-shafts 6 58

rear carrier retaining nuts

(on assembly apply PIANERMETIC 510 sealant to threads) 9,2 ÷ 10,3 90 ÷ 100

P.T.O. shaft retaining nut 10 ÷ 12 98 ÷ 115

gearbox-engine flange bolts 9 ÷ 12 88 ÷ 107

bevel gear retaining nut 28 ÷ 30 274 ÷ 294

nuts securing gearbox to intermediate transmission casing 10 ÷ 12 98 ÷ 107

hex socket screws for reduction unit ring gear

(on assembly apply LOCTITE 242 to screws) 7 ÷ 8 68 ÷ 78

78

12"

11"

A

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS

Fig. 56 - Positioning of the 4WD shaft complete with engage-ment/disengagement system. After positioning the shaft,connect the oil manifold to solenoid control valve (located onthe mounting on the right-hand side of the gearbox) using thespecially shaped pipe.

Fig. 58 - The pipe connecting the hydraulic control of thefront-wheel drive must be connected to the solenoid valveblock at the external fitting indicated by the small arrow.

Fig. 60 - End-float is to be adjusted by fitting a shim of appro-priate thickness following the instructions given on page 35.

Fig. 57 - After positioning the pipe, connect the oil manifoldby inserting union A from the left-hand side of the gearbox.The PICK-UP speed sensor must be installed in hole B indi-cated by the arrow (see instructions on page 77).

Fig. 59 - The POWERSHIFT unit is to be installed in the gear-box and the shaft end-float adjusted with the shaft engagedwith the epicyclic reduction unit.

Fig. 61 - Checking shim thickness using a micrometer.

79

31

3Transmission

Gearbox

Fig. 62 - Fitting the shim to adjust end-float of thePOWERSHIFT shaft.

Fig. 64 - Fitting the epicyclic reduction unit inside the housingpreviously attached to the gearbox output shaft.

Fig. 66 - Oil seal on shaft between clutch and gearbox. Thisseal can be renewed by accessing the inside of the frontgearbox.

Fig. 63 - Positioning the epicyclic reduction unit of thePOWERSHIFT in the front gearbox.

Fig. 65 - POWERSHIFT unit installed in the gearbox.

Fig. 67 - Positioning the P.T.O. clutch unit inside the ge-arbox.

80

31

3 Transmission

Gearbox

Bevel drive adjustment (see figs. 1 and 3)

Install the pinion in the gearbox together with the bearings pack A (without interposing shims); position gear B and tig-hten ring nut to a torque of: 28 30 Kgm (275 294 Nm).

Fit the differential housing without the crown wheel; shim up the tapered bearings D and E so that they rotate freely inthe housings yet a slight preloading can be felt; then add a 0,1 mm. shim to the pack in order to preload the bearings.

Adjust the distance F between the differential housing and the head of the pinion, interposing shims in the position G in-dicated in figure 1; the exact measurement for this adjustment is obtained by adding or subtracting the value stampedon one of the pinion teeth to/from the base value of 2.5 mm.

Secure the bearings pack by inserting a circlip (select one from those supplied in thicknesses of 2.8 3.6 mm. (see figu-re 1) which fits perfectly in the seating preventing any bearing play.

nstall the crown wheel in the differential housing and, with a dial gauge, measure the crown wheel/pinion backlash; the

correct value range is 0,17 0,23 mm for tractor in the version 30 Km/h and 0,20 ÷ 0,27 mm for tractor in the version 40Km/h (see figure 4 on page 82). If the measured backlash does not come within this range, remove shims from pack Dand add them to pack E, to move the crown wheel nearer to the pinion, or vice versa to move it further away.

NB.: On completion of the bevel drive adjustment operations, loosen off the ring nut, apply Loctite 270, then tighten to a

torque of 28 30 Kgm (275 294 Nm) and then stake the pinion retaining nut.

Tighten the crown wheel retaining screws to a torque of 7 8 kgm (68 78Nm).

Fig. 2 - Value stamped on a tooth of the pinion.

C - SNAP RING2.1419.056.0/10 99x2,82.1419.057.0/10 99x2,92.1419.058.0/10 99x3,0

2.1419.059.0/10 99x3,12.1419.060.0/10 99x3,22.1419.061.0/10 99x3,32.1419.062.0/10 99x3,42.1419.063.0/10 99x3,52.1419.064.0/10 99x3,6

Fig. 1 - Shimming the bevel pinion. Fig. 3 - Shimming the crown wheel.

81

35

3Transmission

Differential gear

Fig. 4 - Checking the backlash between the crown wheel and pinion.

Servicing operations

Installation of the bevel drive without renewing any parts.New adjustment is not required; make sure that the same shims packs are refitted in the same places, and check thatthe distance between the head of the pinion and the differential housing is as prescribed.

Renewal of crown wheel bearingsShim the bearings to obtain a preloading of 0,1 mm; then adjust backlash between the crown wheel and pinion.

Renewal of pinion bearingsThe bevel drive will require adjustment.

Installing the rear differential lockThe rear differential lock system does not require any adjustment.

Fig. 5 - Parts comprising the differential unit. Fig. 6 - Rear differential lock control.

82

35

3 Transmission

Differential gear

Rear power take-off

Rear P.T.O. gears

The rear P.T.O. shaft, directly coupled to the engine, is equipped with a selector allowing selection of P.T.O. speeds of540/1000 rpm or, on request, 540-750-1000 rpm.The selector is of the sliding sleeve type. The selector is mechanically controlled and can only be operated when themoving parts are stationary. The P.T.O. output shaft rotates in a counter-clockwise direction, as viewed from the rear ofthe tractor.

Fitting the rear P.T.O. output shaftBefore installing the studs, remove any oil/grease from the threads, then apply “LOCTITE 242".

Technical characteristics

P.T.O. speeds540 r.p.m. AGROPLUS 60 14/53 = 1/3,7857

540 r.p.m. AGROPLUS 70 - 80 13/50 = 1/3,8462750 r.p.m. AGROPLUS 60 16/50 = 1/3,1250

750 r.p.m. AGROPLUS 70 - 80 15/46 = 1/3,0660

1000 r.p.m. AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80 20/46 = 1/2,3000

P.T.O. r.p.m. engine r.p.m. P.T.O. r.p.m. P.T.O. r.p.m.

power take-off

engine r.p.m. at max P.T.O. r.p.m engine r.p.m. at fas engine r.p.m. at fas

horsepower speed idling speed idling speed

for 60 HP

540 r.p.m. 620/2350 3,7857 (657/2490) ÷ (665/2520) (171/650) ÷ (184/700)

(2045 engine r.p.m.)

for 70 - 80

540 r.p.m. 611/2350 3,8462 (647/2490) ÷ (655/2520) (169/650) ÷ (181/700)


for 60 HP

1000 r.p.m. 1022/2350 2,3000 (1082/2490) ÷ (1095/2520) (282/650) ÷ (304/700)


for 70 - 80 HP

750 r.p.m. 752/2350 3,1250 (797/2490) ÷ (806/2560) (208/650) ÷ (224/700)


for 60 - 70

- 80 HP

750 r.p.m. 766/2350 3,0660 (812/2490) ÷ (822/2520) (212/650) ÷ (228/700)


Synchronised P.T.O. P.T.O. revolutions for each wheel revolution 14,7400

83

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

Fig. 1 - 540 - 1000 r.p.m. selector.

Fig. 2 - 540 - 750 - 1000 r.p.m. selector

84

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off

ADJUSTMENT OF THE P.T.O. CONTROL LINKAGEDisconnect tie-rod B from lever D.Move control lever A and lever D to the 540 rpm position.Turn fork C to adjust the length of tie-rod B so that the hole in the fork is perfectly aligned with the hole in lever D; then screw in fork Cby a 1/2 turn and connect tie-rod B to lever D.

Warning: after adjusting the tie-rod, move the control lever to neutral position and check that the P.T.O. output shaft rotates freelywhen turned manually.

NB: For versions with 3-speed P.T.O., check also that output shaft turns freely when the control lever is in the second neutral positi-on.

2-SPEED VERSION 540 – 750 R.P.M.

WARNING: on assembly, position the lever indicated with thearrow so that head of the lock screw is facing the frontof the tractor.

2-SPEED VERSION 540 – 1000 R.P.M.

Fig. 3 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts (2-speed version) for 60- HP models

85

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

Fig. 4 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts for 60 HP models (3-speed version)

86

35

3 Transmission

Power take-off

Fig. 5 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts for 70 - 80 HP models (3-speed version)

87

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

9 kgm

(90 Nm)

P.T.O. clutch

General characteristics

The P.T.O. clutch is a wet-type multidisc clutch and is operated by hydraulic pressure.

The oil required for the P.T.O. hydraulic control is drawn from the gearbox and filtered before it arrives at the gear pumplocated on the right-hand side of the gearbox.

The clutch control is electro-hydraulic. The electro-hydraulic system controls the circuit by means of a solenoid valve,which supplies oil under pressure to the clutch control piston. In both cases, the driving discs and driven discs are forcedtogether, thereby transmitting drive to the output shaft.

The P.T.O. clutch brake is operated mechanically by the piston during the return stroke determined by the helical clutchrelease spring. Three pins connected to the piston press against the brake counter disc.

Fig. 6 - Cross section view of the P.T.O. clutch.

88

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off


P.T.O. Clutch

Clutch oil-immersed multiple disc with axial piston

number of friction discs 5

diameter of discs 105

thickness of assembled friction discs

minimum mm 27.32

maximum mm 29.90

number of intermediate discs 5

disc lubrication pressure bar 5

P.T.O. clutch relief pressure setting bar 11

P.T.O. pressure control valve bar 160

2+

restrictor valve mm 1.1

Correct positions of P.T.O. sensors and cables

A - 3-speed P.T.O. for 70-75-85 HP models B - 3-speed P.T.O. for 55-60-65 HP models C - 2-speed P.T.O.

Springs technical data:

Piston return springdiameter of wire mm 6

external diameter mm 52,5

spring relaxed mm 50

spring compressed kg 82 (808 Nm ) mm 28

kg 98 (978 Nm ) mm 23,4

89

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

WARNING: to prevent oil leaks between the oil delivery and lubrication manifolds, apply Loctite 542to the threaded parts.

CORRECT INSTALLATION OF PINS ON P.T.O. CLUTCH CONTROL PISTONInsert the three pins and install the three grub screws, applying IDRAULERMETIC 542 to the threads, and tightenup against the pins; then unscrew each screw by a 1/4 turn to obtain a clearance of 0.25 between the pins and thepiston.

Fig. 7 - Rear P.T.O. control.

90

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off

Clutch inspection

Inspect the contact surfaces of the clutch friction discs. If worn or torn, the discs must be replaced.Inspect the control piston and replace if scored.

Inspect the clutch hub. If depressions are worn into the tops of the splines on which the friction discs slide, the hub mustbe replaced.

Check the efficiency of the piston return spring. The spring characteristics should match those specified in the relativetable; if not, replace the spring.

Examine the seals of the clutch control piston and the clutch brake piston and the brake disc. Replace if worn.

At each assembly of the P.T.O. clutch, carefully clean the oil ways in the clutch housing; use a compressed air jet if ne-cessary.

Checking clutch disc clearanceWith new discs installed, check that clearance A (Fig. 8) is 0.5÷2 mm .If the clearance exceeds the maximum value, fit one shim (code 2.1599.499.0) in the position indicated by the arrow.

Warning: Apply IDRAULERMETIC 542 to the threads of the three screws A before fitting; fully tighten the screws andthen back off each screw a 1/4 turn to obtain a clearance of 0.25 mm between the head of the pin and the piston.

Fig. 8 - Checking clutch disc clearance.A - If the clearance exceeds the maximum prescribed value, fit one shim code 2.1599.499.0

91

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

Checking clutch hydraulic pressures

Connect the mini fitting code 009.2923.4 (with M4 12x1.5 threaded fitting) to the electro-hydraulic control unit as shownin figure 9.Connect tool 5.9030.517.4 to the fitting and attach the pressure gauge 5.9030.514.0.Operate the control valve and check that the pressure gauge shows a reading of approximately 16 bar.For instructions on measuring pressure and relative values see the chapter “electro-hydraulic controls”.

Fig. 9 - Checking the operating pressure in the P.T.O. clutch control circuit.

92

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off

Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch

On the front shaft of the P.T.O., install circlip A and thrust washer B code 2.1599.761.0; position the shaft in the clutchunit and push it towards the front of the tractor so that it rest up against the oil seal shown in figure at C, then check thatclearance between the thrust washer B and the clutch hub is not less than 1 mm.If the clearance is less than 1 mm, remove thrust washer B.

Fig. 10 - Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch.

Fig. 11 - Installation of the waterproof seals.

Installing the waterproof seals rearP.T.O. output shaft and synchronised P.T.O.Fit the seal using a suitable installation tool;the seal is to be oriented as shown in the figureand pressed in to the full depth of the tool.The measurements indicated here are to beused to construct the oil seal installation tool.

93

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

Fitting the P.T.O. shaft

In the event of interference between shaft Band flange A, heat the flange to allow cou-pling. Before fitting plate D, apply Pianerme-tic 510 to the surfaces E of shaft B. Tightenbolt C to a torque of 68 Nm (7 kgm).

Fig. 12 - Fitting the P.T.O. shaft with interchangeable

output shaft (on certain models only).

RENEWAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. CLUTCH

The P.T.O. clutch unit can be removed without having to remove the driving platform.

proceed as follows:— Remove the top link;— Detach the lift rods of the 3-point linkagefrom the lift arms;— Detach the lift control rods from the control levers;— Disconnect the oil delivery pipe to the auxiliary control valves from the rear pump;— On models with 4-way control valves, detach the oil pipe from the lift control valve to the auxiliary hydraulic control

valves. On models with 6-way control valves, detach also the pipe from hydraulic control valves to the upper gearboxcover plate (for 4-way control valves);

— Disconnect the control levers of the hydraulic control valves from the relay levers connected to the control valves, byremoving the relative cotter pins and retaining pins;

— Remove the 3 screws securing the hydraulic control valve from the support bracket;— Disconnect the fuel tank breather pipe in the area above the lift;— Remove the 10 screws and the two nuts securing the lift unit to the rear gearbox;— Attach the lift unit to a hoist and lift it clear of the tractor (when removing the lift unit, take care not to damage the thre-

ads on the two studs);— Unscrew the screws securing the P.T.O. access cover (located above the gearbox) and remove this cover;— Using a suitable lever, push towards the front of the tractor the sleeve coupling the P.T.O. clutch output shaft to the

P.T.O. rear shaft;— Loosen the two screws and remove the rear shaft bearing stop plate;

NOTE: when removing this plate, take care that the spacers positioned underneath it do not fall into the gearbox.— Unscrew the 3 retaining screws and remove the top flange located at the rear of the gearbox. Then withdraw the bea-

ring together with the upper 540 rpm gear.NOTE: when withdrawing the gear, take care that the roller bearing located in the gear does not fall into the gearbox.

— Disconnect the pipe supplying oil for lubrication of the inversor shaft and to the oil-bath for the P.T.O. clutch discs, lo-cated on the right-hand side of the gearbox, by undoing the relative union; then remove the union of the oil supplypipe to the P.T.O. clutch;

— With the aid of a lever, push the P.T.O. shaft a few centimetres to the rear;This will only be possible if the shaft is positioned in such a way that there is no interference between the teeth of thegear and those on the shaft;

— Slide the sleeve onto the rear shaft after having first pushed the bearing located in the wall of the gearbox back a suf-ficient distance;

— Push the clutch unit together with the front shaft and the output shaft to the rear, so as to be able to withdraw the frontshaft to the front P.T.O. unit;

— Extract the complete clutch unit, disengaging it from the rear shaft;— Inspect the clutch discs and renew them if necessary, removing the large circlip and the spacer.

WARNING: on re-assembly, after having positioned the clutch unit complete with the front shaft, refit the two oil unionsin order to ensure that the unit is positioned correctly, then insert the rear shafts and complete the assembly.

94

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off

MAIN OPERATIONS FOR REMOVAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. UNIT.

Fig. 13 - The rear P.T.O. clutch may be removed without hav-ing to remove the cab from the tractor.Disconnect the controls of the auxiliary control valves.

Fig. 15 - Release the rear shaft of the P.T.O. towards the rear.

Fig. 17 - If necessary, push the rear shaft support bearing for-ward and withdraw the sleeve coupling the 2 rear shafts of theP.T.O. together.

Fig. 14 - Remove the lift and the front cover of the rear gear-box to gain access to the P.T.O. clutch unit.

Fig. 16 - Remove the circlip on the front clutch shaft.

Fig. 18 - Disconnect the oil supply pipes and remove the com-plete P.T.O. clutch unit from the gearbox.

95

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

OPERATIONS FOR REMOVAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. UNIT

Fig. 19 - Withdraw the front shaft from the clutch unit.

Fig. 21 - Check the condition of the lube pipe and nozzle forthe hydraulic pumps drive gears.

Fig. 23 - Remove the clutch discs.

Fig. 20 - Check that the clutch hub slides freely in its housing.

Fig. 22 - Remove the circlip securing the clutch discs.

Fig. 24 - The complete disc pack can be extracted along withthe clutch hub.

96

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off

Fig. 25 - Inspect the piston; note the three pins of the clutchbrake, which is engaged by the action of the clutch releasespring in the absence of hydraulic pressure.

Fig. 27 - Inspect the clutch discs for wear.

Fig. 29 - Examine the teeth of the clutch hub.

Fig. 26 - Remove the thrust washer from between the springand the clutch hub.

Fig. 28 - Examine the condition of the counter disc.

Fig. 30 - Remove the circlip securing the hydraulic manifold ofthe clutch unit.

97

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

Fig. 31 - Remove the shoulder plate.

Fig. 33 - Completely disconnect the lube pipe.

Fig. 35 - Check the manifold oil ways and check the manifoldfor wear.

Fig. 32 - Remove the lube pipe for lubrication of the hydraulicpump gears.

Fig. 34 - Remove the clutch oil supply manifold.

Fig. 36 - Remove the snap rings and check for signs of wear.

98

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off

Fig. 37 - The two holes at the front of the manifold as shown inthe figure serve for lubrication of the clutch discs, while thelarge hole to the rear of these supplies the oil to operate theclutch control piston.

Fig. 39 - Dismantle the two oil supply fittings and examinethem.

Fig. 41 - Remove the circlip securing the brake disc thrustplate.

Fig. 38 - Examine the seals on the oil supply fittings.

Fig. 40 - Remove the brake disc of the clutch unit.

Fig. 42 - Extract the two thrust plates together with the brakedisc.

99

36

3Transmission

Power take-off

Fig. 43 - Examine the clutch brake disc pack. Fig. 44 - Check the three pressure pins for wear.


the clutch slips

the clutch fails to di-sengage

check the hydraulicsystem of the sole-noid valve block

check that the pi-ston slides freely

check the clutchplates for wear

incomplete controlvalve stroke, sole-noid valve faulty

piston stuck

replace the springsof incorrectly cali-brated valves

check the seals onthe piston and ma-nifold

eliminate any roug-hness preventingfree movement

replace the plates

check the controllinkage

check the plates

replace the piston

if necessary, repla-ce the defectiveparts


plates burned

plates jammed

replace the plates

eliminate any roug-hness preventingfree movement

100

36

3 Transmission

Power take-off

Rear axle

Fig. 1 - Rear axle.

Installing the rear half-shafts (fig. 2)

— The half-shafts are fixed to the planet gear carrier flange of the epicyclic reduction unit by means of a plate insertedin the flange and attached to the internal face of the half-shaft by a screw.

— The correct position of the half-shaft in the trumpet housing is determined by the shim pack A indicated in figure 2.

To install the half-shafts, proceed as follows:

— secure the half-shaft in a vertical position to prevent its rotation;

— press the rings of bearingsB andC into the respective housings in the trumpet housing; (before installing the ring ofbearing C, position the cover underneath to retain the grease);

— then fit spacer I, oil seal D and bearing E to the half-shaft. Slide the trumpet housing onto the half-shaft, fit oil seal Hand bearing F, then position the planet carriers;

— secure the assembly by way of the plate and screw G, interposing a shim pack A between the plate and the half-shaftto obtain a rolling drag torque of 8 to 12 Nm;

— apply LOCTITE 270 to screw G and tighten to a torque of 18 kgm (177 Nm).

101

44

4Drive axles - axles

Rear axle

Fig. 2 - Fitting of rear stub axles.

Fig. 3 - Fitting of rear stub axles. Fig. 4 - Halfshaft securing plate.A - Planet carrier housingB - Spacer

102

44

4 Drive axles - axles

Rear axle

Fig. 5 - Fitting of bearing to halfshaft.

Fig. 6 - Fitting of O-ring to stub axles.

103

44


Rear axle

Removal and disassembly of the epicyclic reduction unit

Unscrew the three screws securing the planet carrier B ( Fig. 7) to the half-shaft.

Then remove the spacer and the flange, and recover the underlying shim pack.

Remove the epicyclic reduction unit and disassemble it into its component parts as follows:

1 - using a hammer and drift, remove the pin securing journal A of planet gear B (Fig. 8).

2 - withdraw the journal and remove the planet gear together with the roller cage and the two thrust washers.

3 - Remove bearing A from the flange of epicyclic reduction unit B, using a suitable puller (Fig. 9).

Fig. 7 - Removing the spacer.A - FlangeB - Planet carrier

Fig. 8 - Epicyclic reduction unit.A - JournalB - Planet

Fig. 9 - Removing the bearing from the epicyclic reduction unit flange.

104

44


Rear axle

FITTING LATERAL STUB AXLES OF THE WHEEL

Fig. 10 - Before installing the trumpet housing, position slee-ve A of the synchronised P.T.O..

Fig. 12 - Fit the differential housing support flange and theninstall the brake piston and brake disc.

Fig. 14 - View showing the side of the brake disc thrust plateto be positioned in contact with the ring gear of the epicyclicreduction unit.

Fig. 11 - Position the inner half-shaft in the differential hou-sing.

Fig. 13 - Install the thrust plate of the brake disc. The sideshown in the figure is to be positioned in contact with the bra-ke disc.

Fig. 15 - Fit the trumpet housing with the aid of a hoist.

105

44


Rear axle

2WD extendible axle

General information

The wide sideways front axle swinging obtained through excellent anchoring, not only makes it possible to operate thetractor nimbly on steep slopes but also permits the axle to be easily removed from the tractor when any repair is to beperformed. End play check is the only operation required on axle reassembly.

The telescopic-type axle is extremely rugged and enables the tread to be adapted to any work requirements without re-moving the hydrostatic steering cylinders.

Fig. 1 - Extendible front axle pivot system.

Tecnical specifications

front axle AGROPLUS 60-70-80

tread- minimum mm 1300- base mm 1400- maximum mm 1600

toe-in mm 2 ÷ 4

wheel caster angle 3°

axle swinging angle 10°

tyre inflating pressurebar 2,4

Kg/cm² 2,40

lubricating grease type NGLI 2 LITIO / Ca

steering angle 70°

106

42


2 W.D. extendible axle

Fig. 2 - Front axle assembly parts.

1 steering track rod 11 shoulder ring 21 wheel hub 31 shims2 clamp 12 bushing 22 spacer ring 32 pin3 sleeve 13 seal ring 23 internal bearing 33 disk4 ball-and-socket joint 14 bushing 24 retaining ring 34 lower taper roller bearing5 external steering lever 15 side LH axle 25 wheel shaft 35 centre steering lever6 ubricating nipple 16 cover 26 O.ring 36 upper taper roller bearing7 snap ring 17 seal ring 27 axial bearing 37 cover8 thrust ring 18 castellated nut 28 pin 38 spacer ring9 seal ring 19 shoulder ring 29 centre axle10 power steering cylinder 20 external bearing 30 axle securing pin

107

42



Removing the axle from the front support

Fig. 3 - Place some suitable vessels beneath the steeringcontrol cylinders, then loosen unions Aof control cylindersCfrom hoses B side.

Fig. 5 - Using a hammer and light-alloy punch tap on rear endof pin A.

WARNING: Keep the two shim packs separated so that thecorrect position can be restored on reassembly.

Fig. 7 - Remove the axle from the front support by tapping afew times the axle centre portion with the hammer.Lower axle A very slowly and make sure that it does not touchother parts in the process, then remove shoulder rings B.

Fig. 4 - Loosen both securing screws of pin A to axle supportB.

Fig. 6 - By way of both levers A withdraw pin B forward and re-cover the shims interposed between flange and front support.Ensure the securing pin surface shows no flattening, crakingor chipping, replace the pin if necessary.

Fig. 8 - Ensure that bushes A of the centre axle are not worn,checking for well-evident indentations, remove the bushes byhammer and punch if necessary.

108

42



Carry out installation according to the following procedure:

— Use very fine abrasive paper to remove any signs ofoxidation from both pin and front support;

— Bushes and pin should be properly lubricated withthe specified grease type;

— Coat the front support shoulder rings with grease tomake positioning easier;

— Making use of a hammer and light alloy punch tapon spacer F so as it may be moved toward the frontside;

— Insert pin E into the spacer and fit front shoulder ringB;

— Lift the axle and insert the pin into bush C;

Fig.9 - Front axle longitudinal section.

— Place rear shoulder ring D and push the pin almostfully inward;

— Fit shims G adjusting as instructed on page 216 andthen fasten front axle pin securing screws H;

— Top up the oil in the hydrostatic steering system andbleed the air from the system (see chapter on hydro-static steering).

A Front carrierB Front thrust plateC Axle bushesD Rear thrust plateE PinF SpacerG ShimsH Bolt

109

42



A Snap ringB Thrust ringC Seal ringD Power steering cylinderE Grease nippleF PinG Castellated nut

Fig. 10 - Front Axle

A Castellated nutB Ball-and-socket jointC External steering

lever

Fig. 11 - Steering arms.

— Check steering rod ball-and-socket joints for dama-ge or wear and make sure the are able to rotate fre-ely and without excessive play inside their seats.

— Ensure the rubber ball joint guard is intact, otherwi-se replace the ball joints.

— Examine the operating rods for damage or warping.Replace if required.

Fig. 12 - Steering linkage.A Steering rodsB Ball-and-socket jointsC Centre steering lever

110

42



Centre steering lever

— Use a universal puller to remove centre lever A together withbearing B.

— Still using a universal puller (see fig. 15) remove bearing C anddisk B along with O-ring A.

— Make sure the centre lever is not warped or damaged, otherwi-se replace.

— Carefully examine the bearings turning them slowly, if the bea-ring is sound no vibrations, noise nor slight jam-ups shall befelt.

— Fix centre lever A in a vice if required, and using a light-alloyhammer and punch remove tapered bearing outside races B,located in the centre hole (Fig. 14), taking care to remove firstthe upper race having smaller diameter by tapping from insideoutward.

— Re-install the centre lever operating in reversed removing or-der and accordingly with the following procedure:

– Before assembly carefully lubricate the tapered-roller bearingsand related races.

– Before mounting the lower bearing in the axle fit a new disk and anew O-ring.

– When installing the castellated nut keep to the following instruc-tions:

– Tighten the nut fully to bed the bearings properly

– Loosen the nut and tighten again until all plays have been taken up,then fit a new check pin.If the hole in the pin is not in the same line as the cut in the nut, tig-hten the nut furtherly as long as a new check pin can be inserted.

— When the reassembly is completed perform pin and bearing lu-brication with the specified grease type just operating the lubri-cating nipples placed on the lever.

Fig. 13 - Centre steering lever.A Centre steering leverB External bearing races

Fig. 14 - Centre steering lever bearing.A Centre steering leverB Upper tapered-roller bearing

Fig. 15 - Removing the centre steering lever Cbe-aring.A O.ringB DiskC Tapered-roller bearing

111

42



Fig. 16 - Removing the wheel hub.A Tractor wheelB Safety standC Front axle

Fig. 17 - Removing the guard cover.A Check pinB GasketC CoverD HubE Nut

Fig. 18 - Using a puller to remove the wheel hub.A Wheel hub shaft pinB Whole wheel hub

Fig. 19 - Wheel hub components.A Ball bearing D Ball bearingB Spacer E Oil sealC Hub

Wheel hub

— Using a universal puller withdraw whole wheel hub B from pin,(Fig. 18) .

— Make use of a suitable puller to remove front ball bearingA andtake spacer B, (Fig. 19).

— Remove retaining ring E by prising, then using a proper pullerremove rear ball bearing D, (Fig. 19).

— Before assembly coat bearingsB and D and new retaining ringA with the recommended grease, (Fig. 20).

— Carefully insert retaining ring A using a light-alloy hammer andpunch.

— Install wheel hubC onto pin G tapping slightly with the hammerfor proper bedding.

— Tighten castellated nut E to the prescribed torque.— Make sure the nut cut is duly aligned with the check pin hole in

the pin, otherwise tighten the nut furtherly to make them coinci-ding and re-install the check pin.

— Ensure wheel hubC end play is 0.12 to 0.48 mm with respect towheel shaft pin G.

Fig. 20 - Section view of the wheel hub.A Oil seal E - Castellated nutB Innner ball bearing F - Thrust plateC Whel hub G - Whel shaft pinD Outer ball bearing H - Space

112

42




Clean bearings and the other parts carefully, then dry using com-pressed air.Carefully examine the bearings turning them slowly, if the bearingis sound no vibrations, noise nor slight jam-ups shall be felt.

Carefully examine bearing race and rolling member conditions en-suring no scoring, marking, grinding signs due to foreign matterabrasion are noticed, otherwise replace the bearing.

WARNING: Should a bearing be no more serviceable, both the in-ternal and the external bearings must be replaced.

Make sure the wheel shaft has suffered no damage and threadingis whole, replace if required.

Ascertain clearance hole A permitting the external cover to be fi-xed is not obstructed by foreign matters, if so remove any cloggingto allow hub B to be properly lubricated.Wash any components carefully and dry with compressed air.

Be sure no signs of oxidation are visible on the wheel shaft, if soremove with very fine abrasive paper.

Check the shaft for either warp or damage, if so replace the shaft.Carefully inspect the axial bearing making sure no grinding, sco-ring or marking are evident neither on the rolling members nor onthe bearing races, otherwise replace the worn parts.

Check side axle upper and lower bushes B for wear, ascertainingthey still show evidence of the purpose-made indentations, other-wise replace.

Fig. 24 - Wheel pivot bushes.A Clearance hole

Fig. 21 - Wheel hub lubricating hole.A Clearance holeB Wheel huba

Fig. 22 - Removing the steering lever.A External steering leverB GasketC Wheel shaft

Fig. 23 - Removing the wheel pivot axial bearing.A Wheel shaftB Axial bearingC O.ringD Axial bearing race

113

42



Fig. 26 - Track rods.A SleeveB Steering knuckle

Fig. 25 - Adjusting the endfloat of the front axle .A Front carrierB PinC Thrust plateD ShimsE Bolt

Correct track rod assembly (Fig. 25).

Rotate sleeve A around its axis so that knuckle B is in the positionshown in figure, i.e. make sure the knuckle working angle is 90°,then insert and tighten both the sleeve securing bolts.

End float adjustment (Fig. 26).

Push the axle towards the rear and, using a feeler gauge, checkthat the maximum end float “G” does not exceed 0.4 mm.

— If the end float exceeds this value, proceed as follows.

— Unscrew bolts E securing pin B to the front carrier A;

— Slightly move the pin and remove some of shims D to restorecorrect end float.

— Re-tighten bolts E and check end float again.

114

42



FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE

Specifications

Front drive axle ratios

reduction gear-front-wheel drive30 km/h 21/47 = 1/2,238140 km/h 28/47 = 1/1,6786

bevel gears (13/13+50) = 1/4,8462

final epicyclic reducer 1/23,8618

total reduction30 km/h 1/23,861840 km/h 1/17,8966

mechanical ratio(number of front wheel turns for each rear wheel turn)

30 km/h 1,3790

40 km/h 1,3830

bevel gear teeth backlash mm 0,15 ÷ 0,20

front drive axle end play 0,1 ÷ 0,4

front drive axle swinging 10°

steering angle 50°

toe-in see specification table here below

wheel caster angle 7°

camber 1°

Check value for the adjusting the bevel gears mm 1

Fig. 1 - Measuring front wheel toe-in and front wheel geometry.

Adjusting toe-inAdjust the front wheel tie rod so as the difference A-B shown in figure 1 is:

wheel rim keying diamete r A-B mm2RM 4RM

up to 20” (508 mm) 2 ÷ 6 0 ± 2from 20” to 30” (509 ÷ 762 mm) 2 ÷ 6 0 ± 3over 302 2 ÷ 6 0 ± 3,5

Adjusting steering anglesMake sure the front drive wheel steering angle is as specified in the tableabove.Otherwise adjust by way of the special setscrews or spacers. Fig. 2 - Front-wheel drive steering angles.

115

43


4 W.D. front axle

Fig. 3 - Removing/Installing the front drive axle.A Swivel supportsB Front axleC SpacersD Swivel support

Fig. 4 - Checking the front axle end play.A Thickness gaugeB Shoulder ringC Differential housing

Fig. 5 - Front axle end play check point.A Front drive axleB ShimsC Front swivel support


Carry out a thorough check and adjust the end play as follows:

— Move the axle forward tapping with a non-ferrous metal ham-mer.

— Use thickness gauge A (see Fig. 4), to make sure that the endplay between shoulder ring B and differential housing C is wit-hin specifications given in the related table (see page 213).If the end play is correct loosen the four nuts securing front swi-vel support C to drive axle A (see Fig. 5) and add or remove anumber of shims B enough to obtain the recommended endplay.

— Bleed the air from the brake system.

— Check the toe-in and adjust the differential lock operating rod ifnecessary.

— Tighten the swivel support securing nuts to the specified tor-que.

Swivel support securing nuts

front 89 Nm (9,1 Kgm)rear 142 Nm (14,5 Kgm)

Fig. 6 - Power steering cylinder securing pin.A Pin securing pinB Power steering cylinder fixing pinC Power steering hydraulic cylinderD Dust coverE Spacers

116

43


4 W.D. front axle

Fig. 7 - Longitudinal section of the front-wheel drive.

117

Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle

4

43

Fig.8 - Views and sections of the front-wheel drive.

118

Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle

4

43

Final epicyclic reducer

Disassembling the hub

1 - If the operation involves the bevel gear pair, removal is enabledsimply by extracting the two hub swivel pins; the hub can then bedistanced together with the halfshaft.

2 - If the operation involves the hub, proceed as follows:— remove the protective cap located at the centre of the epicyclic

housing.— remove the circlip from its groove.

— fit puller p/n 5.9030.618.4/10 and remove the flange (see fig 9).— remove the circlip from the groove at the end of the halfshaft.— screw two bolts into the holes indicated by the arrows (see fig

9) and separate the hub from the epicyclic housing.

WARNING: Use a non-ferrous metal hammer and punch to tap onferrous parts for removal if necessary.

Stripping down the epicyclic (fig. 10)Remove the ten securing bolts from the flange of the housing, thenremove the flange and the shims beneath.Rest epicyclic reducer A on two wooden blocks as shown in figureand using a press and a punch operate on planetary carrier casecentreB until the planetary carrier, bearing C and seal ring D canbe removed from the bottom.

NOTE: If oil leaks are noticed from seal ring D, this ring can be re-moved from its groove without requiring the planetary carrier caseto be dismounted.

In any case, when seal ring D is removed the damage it usuallyhas to undergo is to such an extent to require replacement.Tap with a hammer and a punch on bearings C and E when ha-ving to remove, if necessary.Take planetaries A securing pins B; remove the planetaries andtake roller cages C.

Installation the hubRe-install the disassembled bearing C (Fig.10), in the planetarycarrier case paying attention to the assembly direction.Install planetaries B with bearings C (Fig.11) into the planetarycarrier case taking care to turn the pin dogs towards the hub cen-tre. Make the planetary and the crown wheel teeth match avoidingany damaging when inserting the planetary carrier into the exter-nal case.Install bearing C (Fig.10) if previously disassembled, use a ham-mer and a punch to tap slightly and evenly on the outer race surfa-ce.

Shimming epicyclic reducer bearingsFit a number of shims between the planetary carrier flange and thepin fixing plate, until the bearing rotate freely, even though a slightbearing preloading can be felt, then remove one 0.05 mm shimfrom the shim pack.Fit a new seal ring .

Fig. 9 - Removing the hub flange with SAT no.5.9030.618.4/10 tool.

Fig. 10 - Disassembling the epicyclic reducer.A Epicyclic reduction gearB Planetary carrier caseC Bearing

Fig. 11 - Epicylic reduction gear planetaries.A PinsB PlanetariesC Roller cage

119

43


4 W.D. front axle

Fig. 12 - Prising with a lever to hold the axle shaftin position when mounting the final epicyclic re-ducer.

Fig. 13 - Checking wheel hub clearance.A LeverB ScrewsC Pack of shimsD ScrewsE 0.5 mm shim.

The following procedure should be observed on re-assembly:

1 - BrakesReplace the brake control piston O-rings and insert piston in itsseat with the oil grooves turned outwards.

2 - Final epicyclic reducerInstall the final epicyclic reducer holding the axle shaft in positionas shown in figure 12 by prising on cross journal A outwards; thisto prevent the axle shaft from moving inwards.

3 - Axle shaftsWhen inserting the axle shaft pay attention not to damage the rol-ler bearing or the seal ring.The axle shaft end should be correctly introduced into the differen-tial gear planetaries.Make sure the axle shaft is free to rotate without any hindrance.

4 -ForksAfter installing the bearings and the dust rings mount the fork byplacing one 0.5 mm shim under the lower pin, then fit the pin, use ahammer if necessary, finally tighten the securing screws.

Fit a pack of shims thicker than the one taken on removal underthe upper pin. Install the pin tightening the securing screws.

Adjusting wheel fork bearing preloadingIn the pack of shim to be put together for adjustment it is alwaysadvisable to group more shims in one: as an example, it is betterone 0,2 mm shim be used instead of two 0,1 mm shims.Fit no. 5.9030.267.0 magnetic base with no. 5.9030.272.0 cente-simal dial gauge onto the drive axle and then place the gauge fee-ler perpendicularly to the lower pin close to centre and set to zero.Using lever A as shown in figure 13, move the fork fully upwardsand read the clearance on gauge dial.Loosen the two screws B and remove shims from pack C so thatany clearance may be taken up without preloading the bearings.

WARNING: The clearance amount should be reduced graduallyby repeating reading with the dial gauge each time so that the bea-rings are not preloaded.After all clearance has been taken up, remove a 0.10 to 0.15 mmshim pack, so that a correct bearing preloading can be obtained.Tighten screws B and D to the specified torque.

After correctly performing adjustment, ensure the shaft taper rollerbearing slide in their seats freely, even though a slight preloadingis felt.

120

43


4 W.D. front axle

Side hubs

Disassemble the twin universal joints if required, keeping to the following procedure:

— Remove both snap rings A from one cross journal B. A non-ferrous metal hammer and punch may help in carryingout this operation, (see Fig. 14).

— Fix the joint fork in a vice provided with protective jaws.

— Tap with a hammer on wheel shaft fork A (see Fig. 16), so that the bearing may be removed from its seat in fork A andtaken from the top. Separate cross joint D from the fork.

— Following the same procedure separate the cross joint from the universal joint fork as well as from the axle shaft fork.

— Recover bearing rollers A along with dust rings B.

Fig. 14 - Twin universal joint.A Snap ringB Twin universal joint cross journal

Fig. 15 - Axle shaft twin-type universal joint bearing.1 Rollers2 Dust rings

Fig. 16 - Disassembling the twin-type universaljoint from the axle shaft.A Wheel shaft forksB Roller bearingC Roller bearingD Cross joint

121

43


4 W.D. front axle

Pins

Check differential spider pin and final epicyclic reducer planetary holder pin surfaces for damaging; otherwise bothpins are to be replaced.Follow the same procedure for pin housings.

Axle shafts

Check for excessive wear: splines should not be nicked and permit a free gear movement.

Spider forks should not be warped and bearings shall slide freely.

Gears

Make sure all gear toothing is neither worn nor damaged, teeth should work on the whole contact face.

Bearings

Examine bearings for proper working conditions, ensure they show neither excessive radial nor end play.

Holding the bearings pressed by hand and making simultaneously turn in both directions of rotation, these should slidefreely and no sliding friction felt.

Tightening torques

Before tightening all screws should be degreased and cleaned.

Kgm Nm

Differential/bevel gear securing screws 6 ÷ 6,5 58 ÷ 64

Bevel pinion fixing nut 21 ÷ 23 206 ÷ 226

Bearing holding flange securing screws 3 29

Fork flange securing screws 7 ÷ 8 68 ÷ 78

Axle swivelling pivot securing screws- rear pin 14,5 142- front pin 9,1 89

Engine front support securing screws 28 274

Hydraulic cylinder fixing pin 16 157

Ball-and-socket joint castellated nuts 12 119

Transmission shaft flange securing screws * 5 49

Differential housing half securing screws 11,5 ÷ 12 113 ÷ 118

* Coat the nut with a small amount of Loctite 242.

Check periodically that the wheel bolts are correctly tightened.

— Front wheel bolts 2RM (M20x1,5) 50 kgm (490 Nm)4RM (M18x1,5) 36,8 kgm (360 Nm)

— Front wheel bolts (M20x1,5) 50 kgm (490 Nm)

122

43


4 W.D. front axle

Fig. 17 - Waterproof seals.

Installing the waterproof sealA inner half-shaftB outer half-shaftC pinionD hubE pinionX outline plug

Using a suitable installation tool, install the seals oriented asshown in the figure and pressing them to the full depth of theinstallation tool.The measurements indicated here are to be used to con-struct the oil seal installation tool.

123

43


4 W.D. front axle

Fig. 18 – Mise en place d’épaisseur de cales pourroulements de pignon.

Fig. 19 – Mesure du jeu d’entredent pignon/cou-ronne pour le réglage du couple conique.

Fig. 20 - Réglage du couple conique.

Réglage du couple conique.

1 - Monter le boîtier de différentiel en interposant entre les fla-sques-supports de roulements une épaisseur de cales jusqu’à ob-tenir une précontrainte des roulements de 0,04 mm.

2 - Déposer à nouveau le boîtier de différentiel et monter le pignonen interposant un jeu de cales A de 0,50 mm et un jeu de cales Bpour permettre, après avoir serré l’écrou au couple de 21 ÷ 23kgm (206 ÷ 226 Nm), la libre rotation des roulements dans leurs lo-gements respectifs malgré une légère précontrainte (ne doit pasêtre supérieure à 0,04 mm).

3 - Régler la distance E boîtier de différentiel-tête du pignon enagissant sur le jeu de cales A.

La mesure exacte pour cette opération s’obtient en additionnantou en retranchant de la valeur gravée sur le profil d’une dent du pi-gnon la valeur de 1 mm.Remarque: après avoir réglé la distance entre le boîtier de diffé-rentiel et la tête du pignon, il faut refaire le réglage de la précontra-inte, pour détérminer à nouveau le jeu de cales B.

4 - Remonter le boîtier de différentiel et vérifier avec un compara-teur le jeu d’entredent pignon-couronne: il doit être de 0,15 ÷ 0,20mm; si ce n’est pas le cas, enlever des cales au jeu C et les ajouterau jeu D pour approcher la couronne au pignon et vice versa pourl’éloigner de celui-ci.

124

43


4 W.D. front axle

Réglage interne du blocage de différentiel de typemécanique (Fig. 22).

(Pour le réglage de la commande extérieure, voir chapitre “com-mandes”).

1 - Assembler les pièces en plaçant l’épaisseur de cales A du côtédu circlipB; l’épaisseur de cales mise doit faire en sorte que le jeude l’entretoise C soit de 0 ± 0,05 mm.

2 - Déplacer un certain nombre de cales du jeu A dans la positionG jusqu’à obtention du déplacement du manchon D en positiond’enclenchement.

REMARQUE – Le déplacement des cales doit se faire par jeud’une épaisseur non supérieure à 0,20 mm. L’enclenchement dumanchon D sera correct quand le manchon recouvrira les billes Fsans forcer pour se mettre dans la position indiquée par le repèreE Fig. 22.

Montage du différentiel dans le pont

Orienter le groupe de manière que le manchon du blocage de dif-férentiel se situe du même côté du levier interne de commande.

Le manchon devra être déplacé vers l’extérieur afin de permettreaux patins du levier de s’engager dans la gorge.Après le montage du différentiel dans le pont, contrôlerl’enclenchement du blocage en actionnant le levier et en tournantmanuellement le pignon d’attaque.

Fig. 23 – Contrôle de la distance tête de pignon-surface rectifiée du boî-tier de différentiel.A Jauge d’épaisseurB Tête pignonC Axe porte-satellites

Fig. 21 - Orientation du différentiel dans le pont.

Fig. 22 - Réglage du blocage de différentiel.

125

43


4 W.D. front axle

Diagnostic des inconvénients

Usure des croisillons àcardan

Pertes d’huile

Usure des pneus

Oscillation des roues

pontavantsurchargé

contrôler l’usure desbagues d’étanchéité

reniflard d’huile obs-trué

usure uniforme

usure non uniforme

contrôler l’usuredes pneus

contrôler l’usure desarticulation de direc-tion

contrôler les roule-ments coniques dumoyeu

n’employer que deschargeurs frontauxreconnus par leconstructeur

changer les ba-gues usées

nettoyer

n’utiliser la doubletraction que sur ter-rain agricole

contrôler le pince-ment des roues

si nécessaire pré-voir la substitution

si nécessaire pré-voir la substitution

régler et les rempla-cer si nécessaire

prévoir le lestagearrière du tracteur

excessive exploita-tion du tracteur pourtransports routiers

prévoir le réglage

monter des pneusconvenables

126

43


4 W.D. front axle

Brakes

General informationThe service brakes are located between gearbox and final epicyclicreducers and assure a precise and safe braking action. In addition,the four-wheel drive tractor models are also equipped with integralbraking system providing braking on all tractor wheels.

The braking system is sintered-lining, oil-immersed disk type. Theright-hand brake control is completely independent from theleft-hand brake control; this allows the tractor turning radius to beconveniently reduced (this operation is only possible when wor-king on farm land and never during transport operations on publicroads).The braking system is provided with the “SEPARATE BRAKES”valve which enables the front wheel braking to be excluded.

Each brake pedal controls a hydraulic pump which delivers oil underpressure to a disk thrust plate, which causes the brake disk to lock.Operating both brake pedals simulteneously by coupling themwith the special joining latch, opens an oil duct connecting bothhydraulic circuits to balance the baking pressure on the wheels.Brake maintenance is limited to an easy adjustment and a systemair bleeding if necessary.

The parking brake has mechanical control and acts on transmis-sion downstream of gearbox.Pulling the control lever upwards makes the brake disks pack to-gether thus locking the shaft being constantly meshed with thewheels.Maintenance is very easy and consists of replacing the frictionpads when worn or adjusting the control lever travel.

Specifications

Fig. 1 - Front service brakes.

Fig. 2 - Parking brake parts.

service brakes front rear

2WD 4WD

Manufacturer SDF DEUTSCHLAND

Type oil-immersed disks

number of disks each brake 2 (each side) 1 (each side) 1 (each side)brake disk outside diameter mm 223,4 223,4 280

original brake disk thickness mm 4,80 4,80 7

brake disk minimum thickness allowable mm 4,40 4,40 6brake pedal free travel mm 40

braking piston max. Play mm 1,15thydraulic pump type Benditalia Ø 1’’

parking brakebrake type oil-immersed disks

number of braking pads double braking surface n° 2single braking surface n° 2

original braking pad thickness double mm 5single mm 3,5

braking pad minimum thickness allowable double mm 4,3single mm 3,2

brake disk number 3parking brake control lever travel mm 100

127

54

5Vehicle

Brakes

A - Oil tankB - Oil delivery pipesC - Oil pumpsD - Pumps connection pipeE - Brake pedal coupling latchF - Block for types without front brakesG - SEPARATE BRAKES valveH - Brake pedalsI - Parking brake leverL - Toothed quadrantM - Control rod

Fig. 3 - Brake control assembly parts.

Fig. 4 - Brake pump control unit.

Hydraulic pump

Disassebly and checking procedure

Referring to fig 4:— Remove guard boot A, take snap ring B and withdraw rod C

along with the support disk.

Referring to fig 6:— Fix the pump in a vice provided with protective jaws and pu-

shing pistons into the pump partly, as shown in figure 6, loosenthe piston retaining screws and then remove the pistons toget-her with the spring down below.

128

54

5 Vehicle

Brakes

A - Pump G - Snap ring P - Piston Z - ForkB - Delivery pipe H - Spacer Q - Seal ring X - Stop screw

union I - Seal ring R - Rod Y - GasketC - Delivery pipe L- Intermediate piston S - Support disk K - Pump union pipeD - Clamp M - Spring T - Snap ringE - Pipe fitting N - Seal ring U - Guard boot

F- Spring O - Washer V - Nut

Fig. 5 - Brake pump assembly parts.

— Examine the cylinder interior and the pistons for either scoringor rust. Replace if necessary.

— Check cylinder and pistons for wear. If excessive plays are no-ticed replace either the whole piston or the whole cylinder as-sembly.

— Inspect sealing rings and dust guard boot, replace any wornparts.

— Inspect all pump internal compartments, apertures and passa-ges and make sure all is properly clean and free from foreignmatters.

— Ensure the springs are neither yielded nor warped. Replace ifnecessary.

Fig. 6 - Piston retaining screw.

129

54

5Vehicle

Brakes

1 - Spring2 - Pump3 - Intermediate piston4 - Spring5 - Pipe fitting6 - Gasket7 - Seal ring8 - Washer9 - Piston10 - Seal ring11 - Support disk

Fig. 7 - section of the brake pump.

Fig. 8 - Installing the front brake disk pressu-re piston seal ring.

Fig. 9 - Brake assembly flange.A - Brake assembly flange

12 - Guard boot13 - Rod14 - Nut15 - Fork16 - Snap ring17 - Gasket18 - Stop screw19 - Seal ring20 - Seal ring21 - Spacer22 - Snap ring

Assembly of brake master cylinder (see fig 5).

Screw the front pistonL and the rear piston P together, then checkthat there is clearance between the two.Insert the pistons into the cylinder, checking that the recess affor-ded by the outer pistonP is aligned correctly with the seat of the li-miter screw X.

Verify correct operation of the cylinder, making certain that the pi-stons complete their full travel freely.

Fig. 10 - Brake assembly.A - Brake disksB - Intermediate diskC - Brake control piston

130

54

5 Vehicle

Brakes

Checking the front brake disks on 2WD and 4WDfront axles and the rear brake disks.

Check the ground surfaces contacting the brake disks for excessi-ve scoring.If excess wear is found replace the worn-out parts.

Check disk conditions and tickness, compare with specificationstable.

Examine the brake disk broaching for wear or damage.

If excessive oil consumption is noticed, check the piston rings asfollows:

Connect no. 5.9030.520.4 hydraulic pump to the oil delivery circu-it; if the hydraulic circuit is not fully oil-tight under a 1,5 bar pressu-re, the rings must be replaced. (To check the effectiveness of theseals more accurately, blow compressed air around the perimeterof the seal; if air bubbles appear, the seal is imperfect).

Check each brake.

For 4WD front brakes and rear brakes onlyMark piston and brake housing case with a reference near to a lo-cating pin so as to make reassembly easier.

Coat the brake housing case seal ring contacting surfaces of pi-ston A with recommended grease, see figure 11.

Carefully mount piston into the brake housing case.

Fit the brake housings and halfshaft trumpet housings, repeatingthe removal operations in reverse order and observing the follo-wing directions.

Coat the brake housing case inner surface as well as bothepicyclic gear crown wheel surfaces with recommended sealant.

Tighten the securing nuts of the brake housings and trumpet hou-sings to the prescribed torque (see values below).

- brake housing bolts: 3,3 ÷ 4,1 (32 ÷ 42)- trumpet housing bolts: 8,6 ÷ 9,6 (84 ÷ 94)

Adjusting service brake pedals

Operate right-hand pump fork A (figure 14) to adjust brake pedalposition, until the most suited position for the operator is attained,and in such a way that the pedal may complete its whole travel fre-ely when braking.

Operate left-hand pump forkB (figure 14) to adjust the related bra-ke pedal so that the coupling latch holes are in the same line.

Fig. 11 - Brake housing.A - Locating dowels.B - Brake housing

Fig. 12 - Greasing the seal contact surface of thebrake piston.A - Piston

Fig. 13 - Rear brake assembly.

Fig. 14 - Adjusting the brake pedals.

131

54

5Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 14 - Rear brakes for 2WD front axle.

Fig. 15 - Parking brake inspection window

Correct installation of inspection cover for parking brake discs

Before fitting the cover, apply the sealant PIANERMETIC 510 to the surfaces in contact with the gearbox (marked A inthe figure), then tighten the three screws marked B in the figure to a torque of 5.8 kgm (55 Nm).Check that with the control lever positioned at angle of approx. 40° relative to the horizontal, the brake play is that indica-ted in the figure. If the play exceeds this value, replace disc C with the single braking surface with a discs with a doublebraking surface (to recover 1mm of play). Alternatively insert a shim (code 009.9648.0) between the disc C and the re-action plate (to recover 2mm of play).

132

54

4 Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 17 - Section view of 4WD front brakes.

Fig. 18 - Section view of rear brakes.

133

54

5Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 19 - Parking brakechecking and adjusting di-mension.

Fig. 20 - Parking brake.

The parking brake, completely independent from the service bra-kes, is applied by pulling the special hand lever upwards.

Once the parking brake is applied the related pilot lamp on the da-shboard lights up.

Checking parking brake pads

Examine the brake pads for wear. If brake pad thickness is out ofspecifications these shall be replaced.

Brake pads can be dismounted after removing the lower brakepad lockpin, this permits access through the cover placed underthe gearbox to be gained.

Before installing new brake pads, check lockpin seal ring condi-tions, replace if necessary.

Parking brake control lever overall travel

This travel should be 100 mm, otherwise operate the special adju-sting screw until the specified dimension is obtained.

Measuring the brake disk thickness.

134

54

5 Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 21 - Parking brake assembly; (A- Brakes disk).

Bleeding air from the brake hydraulic system

Operate as follows:

— unhook pedals by removing the coupling latch: afterwards pla-ce the “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve control in OFF position;

— operate the right-hand brake pedal several times;

— by holding the pedal in fully depressed position, slightly un-screw and tighten soon after the relevant air bleeding valve onthe rear right-hand brake.

This operation should be repeated until such time as the oil flowsout of the bleeding valve without air bubbles.

Repeat the same procedure on the front right-hand brake by ac-ting on the related air bleeding valve.

Follow the same procedure on the front and rear left-hand brakesmaking use of the related air bleeding valves.

We recommend that only oil AKROS MATIC (with inter-national specifications ATF DEXRON II) used in the bra-king system.

Fig. 22 - Bleeding the air from the rear servicebrake hydraulic system.

Fig. 23 - Bleeding the air from the front servicebrake hydraulic system.

135

54

5Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 24 - Different braking action diagram.

Hydraulicconnections

PR - Rear RH brakeL - LH brake pedal pumpAL - Front LH brake

Fig. 25 - “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve.

“Separate Brakes” valve

The “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve permits the front wheel si-de-slip to be removed when performing independent braking.(This prevents cultivation damage as the front wheel is under nobraking action).

The valve operation can be stopped by operating the special con-trol tap A.

When both brake pedals are operated at the same time (coupledpedals), the braking of the four wheels will be always obtained.

IMPORTANT: The “idrostop” sensor must be installed in theSEPARATE BRAKES valve housing, smearing Loctite 542 on thescrew thread.

A = LH brake pedalB = RH brake pedalC = Both when coupled

R - RH brake pedal pumpAR - RH front brakePL - Rear LH brakeH - STOP pressure switch

136

54

5 Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 26 - Hydraulic circuit diagram for SEPARATE BRAKES system

137

54

5Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 27 - Brake hydraulic system schematic diagram with tap in position “ON”.A - oil pressureB - discharge oilHydraulic connections R - RH brake pedal pump

PR - Rear RH brake AR - RH front brake

L - LH brake pedal pump AL - Front LH brake

PL - Rear LH brake H - STOP pressure switch

138

54

5 Vehicle

Brakes

Fig. 28 - Brake hydraulic system schematic diagram with tap in position “OFF”A - oil pressureB - discharge oilHydraulic connections R - RH brake pedal pump

PR - Rear RH brake AR - RH front brake

L - LH brake pedal pump AL - Rear LH brake

PL - Front LH brake H - STOP pressure switch

139

54

5Vehicle

Brakes


poor braking

uneven braking

noisy braking

make sure no air isinside system

check for correctadjustment

check brake disksfor wear

make sure the re-commended oiltype is used

check for correctadjustment

make sure the re-commended oiltype is used

check brakes diskfor wear

bleed the air

adjust

replace

bleed the air

replace

adjust

replace

replace

140

54

5 Vehicle

Brakes

Hydraulic lift with “load sensing”

The automatic draft control device, connected directly to the top link, guarantees rapid lift operation and is highly sensi-tive to even minimal variations in the load on the implement.

The hydraulic lift is equipped with an internal cylinder positioned horizontally.The hydraulic lift is equipped with an open-centre control valve.

The oil in the suction line is drawn from the gearbox by a high-capacity pump (the same pump supplies the auxiliary con-trol valves) ‘and filtered through a filter with an interchangeable.The oil under passes through the auxiliary control valves before arriving at the lift.

Fig. 1 - Lift lever shaft

Technical characteristics

manufacturer SAME DEUTZ-FAHRDEUTSCHLAND

lift type with open-centre control valve

safety valve setting bar 1900

10+

minimum operating pressure bar 8

minimum permissible piston diameter mm 89,900

maximum permissible cylinder diameter mm 90,050

lifting capacity with load concentrated on lower link ballends at height of rear wheel centres kg 1600

tightening torque for cylinder retaining bolts kgm 15 - 16,5Nm 150 - 165

141

59

5Vehicle

Hydraulic power-lift

Installing the lift and front cover plate ofthe gearbox

Install the two lift mounting studs (A in figu-re) and the two cover plate retaining screws(B in figure), applying Loctite 242 to the thre-ads in both cases.

Fig. 3 - Lift unit components.

Fig. 4 - Hydraulic control valve.

Fig. 2 - Fixing the front lift and the front cover to the gearbox

Lift mechanismInspect the splines for grooves or excessive wear; replace the le-vers if necessary.Inspect the splines of the lift shaft for excessive wear and checkthat the machined surfaces in contact with the supports are not da-maged; carefully clean the lubrication slots for the shaft supports.At each dismantling, remove the seals and gaskets. Check thatthere are no oil leaks from the lift cylinder.

Checking the safety valvesCheck that the safety valve incorporated in the auxiliary controlvalves is set to 190 bar.Remember that to ensure the correct operation of the lift, the ope-rating pressure in the lift circuit must not exceed 150 bar.

142

59

5 Vehicle


A

B

D

L

K

P

GF

E

15

.8±

0.0

5

Checking the protrusion of the non-return valve control pin B

Move the ball A so that rests on the valve body D, and move the valve body D so that it rests on the control valve hou-sing, then insert pin B up against ball A (while making sure that the ball A does not move).

Check that the pin B protrudes 15.8 ÷ 0.05 mm as indicated in the figure.

Check that the moving parts slide freelyFor the control vale to function properly, the following parts must slide freely:- G - control valve spool- K - pilot valve- L - enabling valve

Checks to be carried out after re-assembly of the control valve.- Check that the control valve spool slides freely.

After assembly of the control vale housing with the connection housing, check that the spool Gslides freely in its bore.- Check coverage of lifting and lowering ports.Push the spool G in the direction of arrow E until the point where lifting commences. From this point, move thespool back in the direction of arrow F until lowering commences.Check that the spool travel between the lifting and lowering positions is 0.6 to 0.8 mm.

- Check for leaksCheck that no part of the control valve leaks (plugs, check valve, etc.) at a pressure of 150 bar.

Apply Loctite 542 to all the control valve plugs before fitting.The spring calibration values must match those specified in the tables.For bench testing of the control valve use oil of the recommended type and a pump with a capacity of 10 to 15 l/min.Warning: the presence of emulsified oil may prevent correct operation of the control valve.

Fig. 5 - Hydraulic control valve.

143

59

5Vehicle


1 - MAX. controlled draft2 - Green sector - CONTROL3 - MIN. controlled draft4 - Lowering5 - Red sector float6 - Mixed control7 - Yellow sector position8 - Raising

Fig. 6 - Lift control adjustment diagram.F - Position control lever (yellow knob)G - Draft control lever (green knob)

144

59

5 Vehicle

Hydraulic power-lift - first version

Adjusting the lift (Fig. 6)

Warning: before adjustment, attach a weight of approx. 200 kg to the 3-point hitch.

Adjust the forks of the external tie-rods of the lift control linkage so that the yellow lever and the green lever are free tomove the entire length of the control slot.

Adjusting the lift travel - YELLOW LEVER -

Start the engine, and move the yellow lever to the maximum lift position and move the green lever to position 12 in itscontrol slot.

Adjust screwE (fig. 6), so that it is up against its stop when the reference marks on the right-hand side of the lift housingand the lift arm coincide.

If necessary, also adjust fork B of tie-rod A.

Adjusting the GREEN LEVER

Move the yellow lever to the position CONTRof its control slot, and check that when the green lever is moved from posi-tion 12 towards 0, the lifting action commences when the lever is in correspondence with position 4.

If not, adjust fork D of tie-rod C.

Checking operation of the safety stop.

Move the green lever to the maximum lift position (position 0). The lift arms will be raised, rotating through a further an-gle of approx. 4° (corresponding to a movement of the notch on the lift arm of 6 mm).

Checking balance.

With the yellow lever in the CONTRposition, move the green lever from position 12 to 4 to find the point of balance (be-fore the lifting action begins); check that when the counterweight applied to the lift arms is pulled upwards, the lift raisesthe arms, and that when the counterweight is pushed downwards, the lift lowers the arms.

145

59

5Vehicle


Yellow = Oil delivery to the hydraulic control valveBlue = Oil flow from the control valve to the lowering valveGreen = Oil for piloting the valvesRed = Pressurised oil to the lift piston

Fig. 8 - Lift hydraulic circuit.

1 - Valvematic2 - Anti-shock valve3 - Down valve4 - Control valve5 - Pilot valve6 - Enabling valve7 - Inlet valveP - PumpT - Return

146

59

5 Vehicle


Fig. 9 - Hydraulic lift circuit - NEUTRAL

147

Vehicle


5

59

Yellow = Discharged oil

Red = Pressurized oil

Blue = Oil from hydraulic pump

Green = Oil trapped at relative pression

1 - Directional control valve

2 - Enabling valve

3 - Enabling pilot valve

4 - Unloading valve

5 - Down actuator piston

6 - Valvematic

7 - Inlet valve

8 - Anti shock valve






2 - Enabling valve


4 - Unloading valve


6 - Valvematic

7 - Inlet valve


Fig. 10 - Hydraulic lift circuit - RAISING

148

Vehicle


5

59






2 - Enabling valve


4 - Unloading valve


6 - Valvematic

7 - Inlet valve


Fig. 11 - Hydraulic lift circuit - LOWERING

149

Vehicle


5

59

Fig. 13 - Lift hydraulic control valve. Fig. 14 - Section views of the lift

150

Vehicle


5

59

Fig. 12 - Control linkage for draft control.

Fig. 15 - Pins of the draft control and position control levers

Fig. 16 - Control linkage for draft control and stop screw for the position control lever

151

59

5Vehicle


Fig. 17 - Top view of the lift.

Fig. 18 - Rear view of the lift.

152

59

5 Vehicle


Fig. 19 - Section views of the lift hydraulic control valve

153

59

5Vehicle


I BA

C D EF H

G

Sensing arm assembly

� Install on screw A:

� ring B,

� spacer C,

� spring D,

� ring E,

� screw in nut F to take up all play.

– Screw in nut F a further quarter turn to preload the spring.

– Slide this assembly into spring holder G.

– Fit eye H and tighten nut F against it to a torque of 100 ÷105 Nm (~10 Kgm), taking care that nut F does not turn onscrew A.

– Screw plug I into spring holder G to prevent axial movement of the previously assembled pack.

– Apply a small quantity of LOCTITE 242 before fitting plug I.

– Apply a small quantity of LOCTITE 242 before fitting nut F and eye H.

– Grease spring D before fitting

Fig. 20 - Sensing arm assembly diagram

154

59

5 Vehicle


Power-lift distributor valve spring setting specifications

oil flow control valve springno. of springs used n. 1wire diameter mm 1,4


released spring mm 54loaded spring (N 40,4) - kg 4,115 mm 47,5

(N 66) - kg 6,727 mm 43,37

pilot valve springno. of springs used n. 1

wire diameter mm 0,9

external diameter mm 7,8released spring mm 25,5

loaded spring (N 21) - kg 2,133 mm 15,2(N 28,5) - kg 2,899 mm 11,5

hydraulic distributor springno. of springs used n. 1

wire diameter mm 1,2external diameter mm 10,4

released spring mm 110

loaded spring (N 43) - kg 4,4 mm 65(N 39) - kg 4 mm 60

nonreturn valve springno. of springs used n. 2wire diameter mm 1,1


released spring mm 25loaded spring (N 29) - kg 2,96 mm 17

(N 43) - kg 4,43 mm 13

valvematicspringno. of springs used Nº 1

wire diameter mm 1,2

external diameter mm 9,5released spring mm 57,3

loaded spring (N 41,3) - kg 4,2 mm 35(N 54,3) - kg 5,5 mm 25,8

155

59

5Vehicle


ELECTRONIC LIFT

The electronic lift is controlled by an electronic control unit and a control panel.

The electronic control unit processes the signals from the input devices and generates the output signals for the elec-tro-hydraulic control of the lift control valve.

The system provides Draft and Position control functions.

IMPORTANTThe "ALL ROUND TESTER" provides the interface for electronic control unit self-diagnostic and programmingoperations. All the display messages are given in the chapter "LIFT TESTER Control unit version 1.24A" of theAppendix (see table of contents).

Fig. 1 - Configuration of the electronic lift system1 - Control Unit2 - Electro-hydraulically operated control valve (2 proportional solenoid valves)3 - Hydraulic pump4 - Draft sensor5 - Position sensor6 - Maximum lift height control knob7 - Lowering speed control knob8 - Draft/wheelslip intermix control knob9 - Depth control knob10 - Up/Down control11 - Lock and alarm warning light12 - Manual UP control (on the fender)13 - Manual DOWN control (on the fender)

156

59

5 Vehicle

Electronic power-lift

Control panel

The control panel comprises a series of potentiometers, lights and switches which serve to set the system operatingmode, raise or lower the lift and to provide information about system status.

The control panel is separate from the electronic control unit, to which it is connected by way of a multi-pin connector.

Fig. 2 - Control panel1 - Lowering speed control knob2 - Maximum lift height control knob3 - Draft/wheelslip intermix control knob4 - Up/Down control switch with integral Lock and Alarm warning light5 - Depth control knob

Control level or depth control knob (5)Used to set the reference value for the control function.Informs the electronic control unit of the required level of working depth or draft control for respectively the position anddraft control functions. This knob is fitted with a mechanical lock to prevent excessive force being applied at the limits ofpotentiometer travel.

� Turning the knob to the left increases the working depth. The first sector on the left permanent Float control.

Mix position/draft control (3)Used to select the control mode.

� When turned fully to the left, pure draft control is selected.

� When turned fully to the right, pure draft control is selected.

� In the intermediate sector, sets the minimum depth for draft control: the function is disengaged by turning the knobto the right, the depth is decreased by turning the knob to the left.

157

59

5Vehicle


Lowering speed control knob (1)Used to vary the at which the linkage is lowered.Sets the maximum aperture of the proportional solenoid valve that controls the lowering speed.Turning the knob to the left reduces the lowering speed.

Maximum lift height control knob (2)Used to set the maximum height to which the linkage is raised when the driver operates the lift control.Turning the knob to the left reduces the maximum lift height.

Up/Down control switch (4)Rocker switch used to raise or lower the linkage, incorporating a safety lockout/release.

Up controlPressing this button for at least 0.2 seconds raises the lift to the maximum lift height.

Control/Float modeIf the Down button is pressed for less than 0.2 seconds, Control mode is activated.If the button is held pressed for longer, Float mode is activated. In the latter case, the implement will be lowered at therate set by the lowering speed control knob and the lowering solenoid valve will be operated for as long as the button isheld pressed.The moment the button is released, the system will exit Float mode and automatically resume Control mode.

Lock/releaseActivates/deactivates total lock out of the control panel. When the lock is activated, the warning light illuminates.On starting, the system is always locked; to release the lock, hold the Up control button pressed for 3 seconds until thelight goes out. The light will flash rapidly while the button is pressed.To activate the lock, hold the Up control button pressed for 3 seconds after which the light will illuminate; again, the lightwill flash rapidly while the button is being pressed.On activating the lock, the linkage is immediately raised to the height determined by the maximum lift height controlknob. Any subsequent alteration to the position of the lift controls (including the maximum lift height control knob) willhave no effect on the position of the linkage until the lock is released.

Lift status indicator lightThis light provides information about the operating status of the lift.If the light is permanently illuminated, this indicates that the system is locked.If the light is off, this indicates that the system is operating normally. If the light is flashing, this indicates an alarm condi-tion.

WARNING: only use the Up control button located on the solenoid valve of the lift control valve in cases of extreme ne-cessity and when the engine is running at idle speed. Release the button before the linkage reaches the maximum he-ight, as the automatic stop determined by the both position sensor and the safety switch is excluded during this opera-tion.

158

59

5 Vehicle


Remote pushbuttons for lift operation from ground

Two remote pushbuttons are located on the rear fender.

To enable these pushbuttons it is first necessary to release the lift control system.

Operation of the manual controls overrides any current lift functions and places the control unit in STOP condition, awai-ting new control signals.

Fig. 3 - Lift control pushbuttons 1 - Up 2 - Down

Fig. 4 - Ground-operated lift controls.

159

59

5Vehicle


Lift operationOn starting the engine, the lift is in Lock condition; to release the lift, press the UP switch for at least 5 seconds.The lift control system enters STOP status in which condition the lift may be raised to the maximum lift height by pres-sing the switch for at least 0.5 seconds but no more than 3 seconds.To activate the lift control system, press the DOWN switch for less than 0.3 seconds; if the switch is held pressed for lon-ger, FLOAT mode is activated and CONTROL mode will only be resumed when the switch is released.The functions of the three potentiometers are as follows:1 - MAXIMUM LIFT HEIGHT (used to set the maximum height to which the linkage can be raised)2 - LOWERING SPEED (used to set the rate at which the implement is lowered).3 - CONTROL (used to select the control type: when turned fully to the left POSITION control is selected, when turnedfully right DRAFT control is selected). When turned to the intermediate sector, mixed draft and position control is selec-ted.

LIFT ALARMS

CODE MESSAGE ON TESTER Alarm description

11 “EVUP DISCONN” UP SOLENOID DISCONNECTED

12 “EVUP C.C. “ UP SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT

13 “EVDW DISCONN“ DOWN SOLENOID DISCONNECTED

14 “EVDW C.C. ” DOWN SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT

15 EPROM CECK- BLOCCO TOTALE DEL SISTEMA SOLLEVATORE-

21 “POS. SENS. C.C.” POSITION SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT

22 “POS. SENS. DIS” POSITION SENSOR DISCONNECTED

23 “GEN. FAIL. CPU” GENERAL FAILURE OF CPU.

24 -

25 -

31 -

41 “DRAFT SENS NC” DRAFT SENSOR DISCONNECTED

42 “DRAFT SENS C.C.” DRAFT SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT

45 “EEPROM CECK“ EEPROM ERROR

Example display of code 23:

all times in secondson

2 0.3 0.3 0.3 1,2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 2off

The criteria for encoding are as follows:

— light off for 2 seconds— number of 0.3 second flashes corresponding to the tens digit— light off continuously for 1.2 seconds

— number of 0.2 second flashes corresponding to the units digit— repetition of the cycle until the alarm ceases

160

59

5 Vehicle


Fig. 5 - Electronic circuit diagram of theECU

1 - Vcc2 - UP solenoid valve3 - DOWN solenoid valve4 - GND5 - Sensor Vcc6 - Position7 - Draft8 - Lowering speed9 - Maximum height10 - Mix11 - Main control12 - ISO 9141

A - UP solenoid valveB - DOWN solenoid valveC - Tester IN/OUTD - Position sensorE - Draft sensorF - Lowering speedG - Maximum heightH - DRAFT/POSITION mix controlI - Main controlL - DOWN/UP control

161

Vehicle


5

59

REAR LIFT ECU

1 2

EVup

1 2 56 10 11

Ele

ctr

ovalv

eU

P

+V

cc

Sensors

Positio

n

GN

D

3 7

Sensor

Position

31

V

2

Vcc

2

EVdown

1

Ele

ctr

ovalv

eD

OW

N

Sensor

Draft

2

V

1 3

Dra

ft

Speed

Lowering

21 3

L.S

peed

Maximum

Height

1 2 3

Max

H.

Mix

Draft/Pos

1 2 3

Mix

Main

Control

1 2 3

Main

Contr

ol

8 9

+ -

4 12

ISO

9141

Lock/Alarm

1K2

Down/Up

Control lever

Tester

In/Out

Up

Exte

rnup

Exte

rndow

n

PIN OUT

Down

A B C D E F G H I L

Calibration of the AUTOMATIC1 - Unlock the lift.2 - Move the lift arms to the required height using the ground-operated UP/DOWN controls.3 - Press the P.T.O. AUTO switch.4 - Press the P.T.O. engagement switch for approx. 10 seconds.

The selected height is set as the maximum height limit for P.T.O. operation.

Emergency manual lift controlIn the event of a malfunction of the electronic system, the lift can still be controlled by way of the mechanical pu-shbuttons located on the solenoid valves of the lift control valve (see figure below). However this operation shouldonly be carried in an emergency and with the engine running at idle speed.Release the pushbutton before the lift arms reach their maximum height, as the automatic stop determined by the posi-tion sensor is disabled during this manoeuvre.

Fig. 6 - Emergency manual lift control pushbuttons.

HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE A - Up Fig. 7 - Diagram of the hydraulic control valve.(located on lift casing) B - Down Hydraulic control valve of the electronic lift

This control valve is of the open centre type and has two solenoid valves for raising and lowering the lift arms.The two solenoid valves are controlled directly by the ECU.Do not connect the solenoid valves directly to an electrical power source, as they would be irreparably damaged.

162

Vehicle


5

59

LIST OF ELECTRONIC LIFT TESTS

Connect the ALL-ROUND TESTER to the diagnostics socket and select option (2) [REAR LIFT CONTROL].Press (0) twice and enter the password [BAC0] in order to modify the parameters.Press [E] twice to display the first screen page.The first screen indicates the selected tractor type (10N or 10S).If the selected tractor type does not correspond to the machine being tested, change the type by pressing the numberalongside the required model and follow the on-screen instructions to store the new type in memory.Release 1.23A does not display the tractor type selection screen and the parameters are those relative to the 10S type.

Enter the MENU screen and press (0) to enter the modification menu.

2 - Modification menu.

1 - Monitor2 - Parameters3 - Tests4 - Max/min height calibr.5 - Alarms6 - Calibr. PWMmin

- MONITOR -Displays data related to the control algorithm and the PWM controls (sensor and potentiometer status).

- Parameters 10S - Programming parameters of the control solenoid valves (Ev).

- Tests - allows you to test ground-operated pushbuttons and display sensor values.

- MAXIMUM/MINIMUM LIFT HEIGHT CALIBRATIONAllows you to calibrate the maximum lift height and the lifting speed.

DEFAULT VALUES 10S:1 - max. Height 8802 - Lifting speed. 500

To calibrate the maximum height, put the lift control in STOP condition (seeLIFT OPERATION) and select "CALIBRATION" from themain menu. Then select option 1 from the "CALIBRATION" menu, turn the MAXIMUM LIFT HEIGHT knob to the maximum positionand, using the ground-operated UP/DOWN pushbuttons, position the lift arms at the required maximum height.Press "E" and "C" to save and confirm the new maximum height value. Exit the "CALIBRATION" menu and continue the tests.

Fig. 8 - Functional diagram of the lift control valve.

1- UP valve2- DOWN valve3- Enabling valve4- Antishock valve5- Check valve6- Lifting cylinder

163

59

5Vehicle


Rear lift

210 Bar

(V=0.84 dm )3

P

B

1

2

3

45

6

Fig. 9 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - NEUTRAL1 - UP solenoid valve2 - DOWN solenoid valve3 - Enabling valve4 - Check valveP - Oil flow

164

59

5 Vehicle


Fig. 10 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - LIFTING1 - UP solenoid valve2 - DOWN solenoid valve3 - Enabling valve4 - Check valveP - Oil flow

165

59

5Vehicle


Fig. 11 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - LOWERING1 - UP solenoid valve2 - DOWN solenoid valve3 - Enabling valve4 - Check valveP - Oil flow

166

59

5 Vehicle


Fig. 12 - Hydraulic control valve for electronic lift.

167

59

5Vehicle


Fig. 13 - Position sensor calibration of the electronic lift.

POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATIONIf a new position sensor is fitted, it will have to be adjusted.Proceed as follows:1 - Move the lift arms to the minimum height position, connect the "ALL AROUND TESTER" and access the maximumheight calibration screen; screw the sensor in or out until a number between 4 and 10 is displayed.2 - Tighten down the sensor3 - Proceed with the calibration of the maximum height.

168

59

5 Vehicle


Fig. 14 - Pin for draft control of the electronic lift1 - Pressure test fitting for lift cylinder pressure2 - Lift control valve3 - Anti-shock valve

169

59

5Vehicle


1

2

3

Fig. 15 - Rear view of the electronic lift.

170

59

5 Vehicle


A

Fig. 16 - External hydraulic circuit of the lift.A - Lift control valve

171

59

5Vehicle


B

B

10

26°3

0'

26°30'

Cors

asensore

8.4

3

73°3

0'

Quota

sensore

monta

to:117.5

Quota

sensore

libero

:119

(ALIMENTAZIONE DA POMPA

O DA FRENATURA IDRAULICA)

27 L/min

27 L/min MAX.

(ALIMENTAZIONE DA REGOLATORE DI FLUSSO)

A

Fig. 17 - Top view of the electronic lift.

172

59

5 Vehicle


PA

T.

EL

ES

A

(Sa

lita

)

(dis

ce

sa

)

Asse

tubo

alim

.da

regola

tore

diflusso

xsolle

v.m

eccanic

o

Precautions for electronic equipment

The tractor is equipped with a number of sensitive electrical devices and electronic components.In particular, electronic components do not tolerate polarity inversion, over-current, connection errors, etc..The electronic components are provided with internal and external protections, but the following precautions are still ne-cessary:

— Switch off the control panel before carrying out any work on electrical components.

— Do not use a screwdriver of light bulb to test for electrical current; only use the appropriate diagnostic equipment (tester).— Do not apply excessive force when connecting and disconnecting electrical connectors; do not prise connectors

apart using a screwdriver, and always respect the polarity of the connection.— In the event of a fault in a circuit controlled by an electronic control unit, do not immediately replace the control unit,

but first check that the sensors and actuators are functioning correctly.— When replacing a defective electronic control unit, only unscrew the retaining screws; avoid interfering with other

screws as these could be calibration screws.

— Inspect contacts on sensors and connectors for corrosion.— Do not use arc welding in the vicinity of electrical circuits.— Avoid short-circuits and polarity inversion.

— When working on components controlled by microprocessors, always disconnect the power supply by turning theignition key to the STOP position before disconnecting the component.

— If the tractor is to be resprayed and passed through a paint baking oven, remove all electronic components.— Do not insert the probes of the tester into multi-pole sockets on connectors or other devices (this deforms the con-

tacts and thus leads to poor connections).— Do not test for the presence of electrical current by causing a spark, i.e. by short-circuiting components across wires

or to earth.

— Do not reverse the polarity or swap over wires in multi-pole connectors.

CHECKING THE ELECTRONIC SYSTEM

� Elements to check:

— Sensors

— Electronic control units— Actuators

1) Checking the system power supply:— current present at input to the connector plugged into the device;— current present at output from connector

— earth connection— voltage correct.2) Check downstream components: sensors.3) Check upstream components.

CHECKING MECHANICAL COMPONENTSCheck the splines on the external and internal lift arms for damage or excessive wear; replace the levers if necessary.

Check the bushes of the lift arm shaft for scoring or excessive wear.Check the bushes and the pins connecting the lift arms to the hydraulic cylinder are not worn and are firmly inserted inthe seats on the levers.

Check the diameters of the rod and bushes in the cylinders and compare with the maximum wear limits in the table.

Check that the splines on the lifting shaft are not excessively worn and that the machines surfaces in contact with thesupport bushes are not damaged.

NOTE: whenever the lifting cylinders are dismantled, new seals must be fitted.

173

59

5Vehicle


Front hydraulic lift

On request the tractor can be equipped with the front hydraulic lifting system.It is operated by means of two hydraulic cylinders actuated by the related control lever placed at the right-hand side ofthe operator driving position.The lever controls a single-acting distributor valve linked to the rear tractor power-lift case.

InspectionsEnsure that the cylinder pin bushings are not worn and be sure these are firmly secured in their seats.NOTE: Replace gaskets after each hydraulic lifting cylinder disassembly.

Specificationspower-lift type with two hydraulic cylinders and

removable arms

hydraulic cylinder type single-actingoil supply from the rear auxiliary

hydraulic distributorpeak operating pressure bar 180

cylinder stem diameter mm 50lifting stroke mm 170

lifting capacity Kg 1500

A - Front lift cylinders (2)

B - Hydraulic accumulatorVolume 0.700 litresNitrogen precharge 130 barmaximum operating pressure 250 bar

C - Antishock valve

D - Lowering speed regulator valve

E - Lockout cock (prevents oil fromdischarging from the cylinders whentransporting raised implements on the road).

Fig. 1 - Lift operation.

174

59

5 Vehicle

Front hydraulic power-lift

Hydraulic accumulator and antishock valve for front lift

The front lift is equipped with a hydraulic accumulator with an antishock valve. This improves hydraulic system perfor-mance and reduces strain on the front axle.

Fig. 2 - Front linkage components.The grease seal ring must be fitted as shown in the figure and must enter the housing bushing by 2 mm

Fig. 3 - Front linkage components with relative valves and accumulator.

175

59

5Vehicle


A - To lift cylindersB - Rate of drop valveC - Anti-shock valveD - AccumulatorE - Lowering speed control valveF - Directional control valve

Fig. 4 - Oil pressure accumulator and anti-shock valve. (The directional valve to which is connecting, is convertable into sin-gle-acting. For the operations to see auxiliary systems chapter).

176

59

5 Vehicle


Front power take-off

General information

The power take-off clutch is a multidisk, oil-bath and elec-tro-hydraulic control type.

The front power take-off is directly linked to the crankshaft by me-ans of a flexing coupling; while the shaft-end is equipped by anuniversal joint.The oil used for P.T.O. operation is contained in the P.T.O. casing.

A specific gear pump installed on the P.T.O. shaft sucks the oil,which flows first through a filter for being subsequently routed un-der pressure to the clutch assembly through an electro-hydraulicdistributor.The oil is strained through a second (15 micron) filter placed on thepressurized circuit located between oil pump and hydraulic distri-butor.

A maximum 57 kgm (560 Nm) torque can be transitted to the hit-ched implement in this way, i.e. 80 CV max. (or 58 kW).To avoid these standards may be exceeded it is recommendedthat a special joint having proper specifications be installed betwe-en implement and P.T.O.

The P.T.O. shaft rear teminal has clockwise direction of rotation(with respect to the driving position).

Specifications

Fig. 1 - Front P.T.O. shaft terminal.

Fig. 2 - Front P.T.O. clutch assembly.

clutchmanufacturer SAME DEUTZ-FAHR

DEUTSCHLAND

clutch disk no 4clutch disk diameter mm 124,5

clutch disk set thickness - max. wear mm 20,80- standard wear mm 21,80 - 22,20

counterdisk number 4 + 1(spacer)disk lubricating pressure bar 1,5

peak calibrating pressure (to press the disks together):- of brake disk bar 4

- of clutch disk bar 13piston axial thrust kg 1523

brake disk braking torque (peak pressure) kgm 1hydraulic pump gear typeoil flow rate (at engine peak speed) (dm3/min) litre/min 12

oil filter cod. 9012.424.2filtering capacity micron 90

filtering surface cm2 222hydraulic distributor stroke mm 1,5

rrear P.T.O. shaft terminal 1.3/8" - 6 splinesdirection of rotation with regard to driving position

oil reservoir capacity litre (dm3) 2,5oil type AKROS MULTI 10W30 (APl-GL4)

177

59

5Vehicle


engagement stage

A - Checking the clutch assembly engagement pressure (10 ÷ 13 bar).

Fig. 3 - Front P.T.O. clutch hydraulic circuit (engagement stage).

178

59

5 Vehicle


disengagement stage

A - Checking clutch assembly engagement pressure (4 ÷ 6 bar).

Fig. 4 - Front P.T.O. clutch hydraulic circuit (disengagement stage).

179

59

5Vehicle


Apply some LOCTITE 510 (red) on the surface betuen cover and box

Fig. 5 - Longitudinal section of the front P.T.O. assembly.A - Solenoid valve B - Clutch pressure control valve

C - brake apply press. control valve D - Clutch engagement pressure accumulatorE - Strainer F - Oil level indicator plug

Fig. 6 - Front P.T.O. shaft flexing coupling.

180

59

5 Vehicle


Apply some LOCTITE 212 (sky-blue) on the screw threads.

Fig. 7 - Cross-section of the front P.T.O. assembly.A - Brake disc B - Clutch discs C - Oil pumpD - Input shaft E - Strainer F - Oil drain plugG - P.T.O. shaft

Fig. 8 - Top view of front P.TO.Correct fitment of front P.T.O. shaft bearingLocate the bearing 2.2421.012.0 with the shoulder directed toward the gear as indicated in fig 8.

181

59

5Vehicle


Fig. 9 - “RING-FEEDER” rings installed.

Fig. 10 - Front P.T.O. assembly parts

Installing “RING-FEEDER” rings

Install all the parts following the order shown in figure.

Thoroughly tighten the pulley hub on engine crankshaft to 38 ± 2kgm (380 ± 20 Nm).

Fit an intermediate flexible coupling with a torsional rigidity of25,145 kgm/rad; the maximum applicable inertia must not exceed0.5 kgm2.

182

59

9 Vehicle


Checking clutch

Make sure that the clutch disk friction linings are neither worn nor torn, if so replace the disks.The control piston should be replaced if signs of scoring are noticed.If the splined sliding surface of the clutch disk hub is sunk in its upper part, the hub should be replaced.Check the efficiency of the piston return spring.The spring specifications should correspond to those indicated in the specific table. Replace if necessary.The clutch and brake piston sealing rings as well as the brake disk itself should be replaced if excessively worn.If either the rotary seals or the relevant seats are worn, these should be replaced.Every time the assembly is taken to pieces, carefully clean the oil passages in the clutch casing; use compressed air ifrequired.

Check the clearance of the clutch friction discsWith new discs in place, check that distance A (Fig 11) is between 0,5 and 2 mm.If the clearance is greater than the maximum value indicated, add 1 x shim p/n 2.1599.499.0 at the position arrowed.

Fig. 11 - Checking disk clearance of front power-take-off.

Checking clutch assembly engagement pressure

Fit no. 5.9030.517.4 equipment to the oil supply pipe using no.5.9030.632.0/10 union as shown in figure 3 at pages 254-255 andthen connect no. 5.9030.514.0 oil pressure gauge.With the P.T.O. engagedLet the oil circulate within the clutch casing and then be sure thefollowing conditions are established: with engine running at peakidling speed the pressure reading should be 13 ± 1 bar; with engi-ne running at the lowest idling speed the pressure reading shouldbe 10 ± 1 bar.N.B. - Make sure the P.T.O. shaft terminal is turning.With the P.T.O. disengagedLet the oil circulate within the distributor casing and then be surethe following conditions are established: with engine running atpeak idling speed the pressure reading should be 6 ± 0.5 bar; withengine running at the lowest idling speed the pressure readingshould be 4 ± 0.5 bar.N.B: Make sure the P.T.O. shaft terminal is being braked.

Fig. 12 - Electro-hydraulic control valve.

183

59

5Vehicle



clutch slipping

P.T.O. brake does notapply

Verify activation ofthe solenoid valve

check piston forfree stroke

verify movement ofpiston

inspect clutch discsfor wear

Check the solenoidoperated controlvalve

Check engage-ment pressure

piston jammed

replace the soleno-id valve if neces-sary

replace the springsof inefficient valves

inspect O-rings onpiston and manifold

remove any roug-hness preventingsmooth action

replace discs

replace the soleno-id valve if neces-sary

inspect O-rings andreplace if neces-sary

replaceout-of-setting valvesprings

recheck pressure


replace the soleno-id valves if neces-sary

Spring specifications

piston return spring cod. 2.4019.373.1

wire diameter mm 6,5external diameter mm 79,5released spring mm 61,5

loaded spring - kg 75,7 (Nm 742) mm 30- kg 79,7 (Nm 782) mm 28

hydraulic system valve springs cod. 2.4019.179.1quantità numero 2

wire diameter mm 1.2external diameter mm 8.8

released spring mm 63loaded spring - kg 3.6 (Nm 35) mm 44,6

- kg 4.6 (Nm 45) mm 39.5

184

59

5 Vehicle


Hydrostatic steering

code 290.6310.4/10 Danfoss type for 4WDcode 010.8555.4 danfoss type for 4WD with double steering cylinder and oversized pump capacity of 14cccode 009.3141.4/10 Danfoss type for 2WD

General information

There in no direct mechanical connection between the wheels and the steering wheel and therefore no vibration can re-ach the driver.Turning the steering wheel operates a rotary distributor connected to an oil flow control shutter permitting the pressureoil to be directed to the hydraulic cylinder in the amount necessary to provide the desired steering action.

The steering system is an open-centre reactive type: the user can directly feel the steering response on the steeringwheel and perform a prompt correction of the driving direction.In addition, the remarkable wheel caster angle will help increase the wheel self-centering effect as the wheels will auto-matically get in a straight line when the steering wheel is released.

The hydraulic circuit is fully independent. The oil drawn from the gearbox flows first through a high-delivery filter beforebeing routed under pressure to the distributor by a pump constantly in mesh driven by the engine and fitted on gearboxleft-hand side.Two powerful cylinders, connected to the front wheel hubs, ensure the thrust necessary to steering under any workingconditions.

Oil returning from the power steering unit is directed to the unit piloting the electrohydraulic controls and sole function tolubricate the gearbox.Moreover this system offers the advantage that the tractor can be driven also in the event of either a pump failure or anengine stop. A valve within the distributor will allow the oil to be drawn from the discharge circuit through the oil controlshutter, whenever a pressure drop occurs in the pump delivery circuit.

hydraulic directional control valve

type of valve ospc 80 or open-centre reactive type for 2WD and 4WD

ospc 125 or open-centre reactive type for 4WD with oversized

oil pump and double steering cylinder

relief valve setting bar 150 for 4 WDbar 100 for 2 WD

clearance between spool and sleeve mm 0,03

turns of steering wheel before road wheels respond

- engine running 0° - 2°

- engine at standstill 0° - 6°

steering cylinders

working stroke of piston rod mm 171

rod diameter 2WD mm 42

4WD mm 50

pushing force 2WD kn 13,6

4WD kn 19

steering wheel turns to full lock nº 2.17

tightening torques

valve cover securing screws kgm 3 Nm 29cylinder securing bolt kgm 16 Nm 155

185

63

6Controls


Fig. 1 - Fit diameter between internal and exter-nal elements of the control valve.

Fig. 2 - Testing pressure in the hydraulic steeringcircuit.A - fittingB - cylinder

Fig. 3 - Correct assembly of orbital pump unit


Steering pump

Clean all component parts of the pump thoroughly, using petrol.

Check that the gears are not unduly worn, otherwise replace.

Directional control valve

Clean all parts of the valve thoroughly.Check, utilizing a comparator for internal dimensions, that the cle-arance between spool and sleeve (A - B - Fig 1) is no greater that0.03 mm: otherwise replace.The two components are not available separately as spare parts.

Check the setting of the pressure relief valve

Couple pressure gauge 5.9030.513.0 by means of adaptor5.9030.579.0 to the fitting of the left hand steering cylinder (as in-dicated in fig 2).

Start the engine and allow to idle for a few minutes; then, with thesteering on full right hand lock, turn the wheel further until the handof the gauge stabilizes at around the maximum pressure. If this isdifferent to the maximum operating pressure (150 bar for 4WT and100 bar for 2WT), adjust the setscrew (A - fig 10, page 192) of thevalve until the requisite value is re-established in the circuit.

Repeat the same sequence of operations with the pressure gaugeand adaptor fitted to the right hand steering cylinder, this time onthe left hand lock.

Bleeding the hydraulic circuit

Start the engine and allow to idle at minimum rpm.

Loosen the two fittings at the cylinder and turn the steering wheeleach way until oil emerges devoid of air bubbles.

Assembly of orbital pump unit

Locate the rotor A in the stator B as illustrated, making certain thatthe pin C is perpendicular to the plane x - x of the valve body as in-dicated in fig 3.

186

63

6 Controls


Teering wheel shaft

Verify the integrity of the steering column, and in particular, makecertain that the surfaces of the bearings are not scored, also thatthe splines are neither damaged nor showing signs of excessivewear.Do not grease or oil the bearing inside the sleeve.

Check that the steering column rotates freely, without sticking, butalso without excessive play.Before refitting the rubber boot A (Fig 4), smear the steering co-lumn B with the grease at the position indicated in fig 4.Having tightened all components, check that the steering wheelcontinues to operate correctly even when at its two height adju-stment limit positions (fully raised and fully lowered).

Steering cylinders

Clamp the cylinder in a vice and withdraw the piston G (fig. 7);If necessary, remove the circlip F (fig. 8) from its groove with theaid of a suitable tool to allow withdrawal of the ball end G (fig. 8).

Fig. 6 - Components of directional control valve

Fig. 4 - Section through steering wheel shaftA - Rubber bootB - Steering column

Fig. 5 - Steering column.A - BearingB - Sleeve

A - Shock valvesB - Anticavitation valvesC - Pressure relief valve (150 bar)D - Emergency steering

check valveE - By-pass valve (redirects

return flow to inlet)F - Orbital pump unitG - Directional control valve

187

63

6Controls


Fig. 7 - Single acting cylinder.A - Snap ringB - BallC - CylinderD - Self-locking nutE - Guide ringF - SealG - PistonH - Shaft

Fig. 8 - Ball jointF - CirclipG - Ball joint

Fig. 9- Section through single acting cylinder.

I - Snap ringL - HeadM - GasketN - Dust sealO - SpringP - Ring nut

Servicing

Verify the integrity of the O-ring and wiper seals. Replace anycomponents showing signs of wear or damage.

Inspect the sliding surfaces both of the rod and of the cylinder forsigns of scoring, heavy wear or any kind of damage; if any of theseare discernible, replace the affected component.

Check for correct operation of the ball end, ensuring that it betraysno signs of heavy wear, scoring or oxidation, the presence ofwhich dictates replacement.Lubricate the wiper seals and ball end with care.

Reassemble the cylinder, repeating the dismantling operations inreverse sequence.

A - Wiper D - Head G - Self-locking nut L - PistonB - Ring nut E - Cylinder H - Ball end M - O-ringC - Gasket F - O-ring I - Circlip N - Shaft

188

63

6 Controls


Instructions for the hydro-static steering distributorassembly

3 - Press the spring blades to align incentre position.

6 -Fit the spacer onte the distributor.

9 - Axial bearing installation.

1 - Insert the spring set (blue) as shownin figure.

4 - Reassemble the rotary distributor.

7 - Insert the drive pin into the cylinder

10 - Use no. 5.9030.480.0 tool to fit theseal ring.

2 -Insert first the two external spring bla-des into the rotary distributor and subse-quently the two internal ones.

5 - Act on springs in such a way they areprevented from projecting outwards withrespect to the rotary distributor outsidesurface.

8 - Install the axial bearing following theassembly order shown in next figure.

11 - Insert the O-ring after fitting the toolsleeve into the distributor case.

189

63

6Controls


12 - O-ring as installed on the plug.

15 - Insert the distributor from the bot-tom trying to make installation easier al-ternately rotating in both directions.

18 - Screw down the valve grub screw inits seat.

21 - Fit the seal ring in the related seat.

13 - Insert the O-ring into the sleeve andpress until it is fully inserted.

16 - Press the distributor until the plug ispushed out of the opposite side.

19 - Insert the balls as shown by the ar-row.

22 - Fit the spacer in such a way the ho-les in it are in the same line as the corre-sponding grooves.

14 - Pull out the tool.

17 - Turn the distributor case upsidedown holding the rotary distributor inplace and iserting the shunt valve as in-dicated by the arrow in figure.

20 - Insert the two pins in the same posi-tions as previously shown.

23 - Insert the drive shaft in the distribu-tor so that the notching may engage intothe pin in a position being parallel to thedistributor face.

190

63

6 Controls


24 - Place the fork as shown in figure soas the drive shaft may be held in posi-tion.

27 - Place the spacer ring, (only for tho-se models which the spacer is fitted).

30 - Fix the cover with the securingscrews by tightening to the recommen-ded torque.

33 - Install the pressure relief valve.

25 - After inserting the two O-rings pro-perly lubricated into the oil flow controlshutter fit the stator positioning asshown in figure.

28 - Install the pin screw in the specialhole (the ball valve hole).

31 - Fit the seal ring.

34 - Insert the spring.

26 - The rotor should be placed to the sta-tor and then swiveled with regard to thedrive shaft as shown in figure.

29 - Fit the cover.

32 - Insert the seal ring into its seat.

35 - Fit the pressure relief valve capscrew.

191

63

6Controls


A - pressure relief valve F - return flow

B - check valve L - to left hand cylinderC - from pump R - to right hand cylinderD - anticavitation valve P - pumpE - emergency steering check valve T - discharger

Fig. 10 - Distributor cross-section.

192

63

6 Controls


1 - Oil to the main pump2 - Oil to the flow control shutter3 - Oil to the steering cylinder4 - Oil trapped in closed circuit5 - Oil in the discharging line6 - Oil in the aspirating line7 - Right-hand rotation8 - Left-hand rotation9 - Neutral position

Fig. 11 - Reactive-type, open-centre hydraulic distributor schematic diagram.

193

63

6Controls


Fig. 12 - Greasing the steering shaft.

Greasing the steering shaft

On assembly, grease the areas shown on the left with MolikoteGN-PLUS

Fig. 13 - Components of steering controls and hydrostatic power steering support

194

63

6 Controls


Fig. 14 - Hydrostatic steering operation diagram.

195

63

6Controls


L R

T P

8 Bar

OSPC 80 OR

100 Bar 2 WD

0.009.3141.4/11

150 Bar 4 WD

0.290.6310.4/10


Unable to steer tractor

Hard steering

Distributor and oil flowcontrol shutter worn

Blocked distributor

Wheels oscillation

Check oil level intank

Check safety valvesetting

Check safety valvesetting

Check oil filter fordirt

Check for dirty oil

Check for air insystem

Restore level

Check for airin system

Check for shorn di-stributor securingpin

Reset or replace ifnecessary

Check for air in thesystem

Change oil and re-place filter

Check that the oil isof prescribed type

Clean distributorand replace oil

Check that oil is notexcessively hot

Bleed the system

Check for oil leaka-ge in the hydrauliccylinder

Check valve setting

Bleed the system

Replace pin

Bleed the system

Check for leakagefrom the distributorand the piston sealrings in the hydrau-lic cylinder

Change oil and re-place filter

Stop tractor and letoil cool

Replace seal ring

Adjust

Replace worn sealrings

196

63

6 Controls


Mechanical controls

Given the constructional simplicity of these controls, we present a series of figures illustrating the individual compo-nents of the controls.Only some of these controls require adjustment; for instructions for these adjustments, refer to the chapter dealing withcorresponding unit.

Fig. 1 - Gearbox inversor controlFig. 2 - Gear-change controlFig. 3 - Gearbox reduction unit controlFig. 4 - Synchronised P.T.O. controlFig. 5 - Hand throttle controlFig. 6 - Accelerator pedal controlFig. 7 - Lift controlsFig. 8 - Ground-operated lift controlsFig. 9 - Auxiliary control valve controls

N.B.: For P.T.O. controls see instructions on page 178.

WARNING: It is important that those tie-rods fitted with adjustable forks are adjusted so that their respective control le-vers can be moved through their entire range from min. to max. without obstruction.

Fig. 1 - Gearbox inversor control

197

64

6Controls

Mechanical controls

Fig. 2 - Gear-change control.

Fig. 3 - Gearbox reduction unit control.

198

64

6 Controls

Mechanical controls

Fig. 4 - Synchronised P.T.O. control.Lever play adjustment: insert a washer 2.1311.010.2 and , if necessary, other washers 2.1580.004.0 in the space A toobtain a play of 0.5-1 mm.

Fig. 5 - Hand throttle control.Control adjustment: tighten nut A to a torque of 7 kgm (70 Nm), screw in screw B to obtain lever movement with a load of 70NTurn the control lever backward and forward 2-3 times through approx. 25° and re-check the load on the lever; adjust ifnecessary.

199

64

6Controls

Mechanical controls

FITTING AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE EXTERNAL CONTROLS OF THE MECHANICALGOVERNOR

Accelerator pedal (fig. 6).Attach the throttle cableA to bracket C and then to lever D, then fit spring P. Adjust the position of screw G to obtain a pe-dal travel of 75 mm as shown in figure 6 (corresponding to an angle of approximately 32°) and secure in position withlocknut Q.

Hand throttleAttach the throttle cable B to bracketE by tightening screw N and positioning the locknutsO and then attach the cable to le-ver V.

Connection of the accelerator pedal and hand throttle cables to the governor.Attach the throttle cable to bracket H of the governor by way of screw L, and secure with locknuts I;Connect the throttle cable to bracket M of the governor.Adjust the freeplay of the throttle cable by turning the screw L (after having undone the locknuts I) so that the cable iscorrectly tensioned, then re-tighten the locknuts.Attach the throttle cable S of the hand throttle to bracket T and then attach it to lever U.Then apply a force f = 5±0,5 to lever F and screw in self-locking nut R until the force applied is no longer capable of movingthe lever. Move the hand throttle lever to the “MAX” position and manually push lever F to the end of its travel, thenscrew in screw N until the throttle cable is fully tensioned, then tighten locknuts O.

Fig. 6 - Adjustment of the external controls of the mechanical governor.

200

64

6 Controls

Mechanical controls

Control adjustment: screw in the screw with spring (Bellevil-le) to obtain lever movement with a load of 35N.Turn the control lever backward and forward 2-3 times thro-ugh approx. 22° and re-check the load on the lever, and resetthe load to 45N.

Fig. 7 - Lift controls.

Fig. 8 - Ground-operated lift controls. Fig. 9 - Auxiliary control valve controls.

201

64

6Controls

Mechanical controls

Electro-hydraulic controls

Front P.T.O. clutch engagement controlThe front P.T.O. can only be engaged when the engine is running. Pressing the pushbutton engages the front P.T.O..The integral light illuminates to indicate that the P.T.O. is engaged.

Rear P.T.O. clutch engagement control

Activation and deactivation of the P.T.O. clutch are piloted by a dedicated control unit.The activate/deactivate control function is se-lected by pressing the button, which returns to the off position when relea-sed.An integral light shows when the function is activated, and serves also to indicate the type of fault that may affect theelectrohydraulic control.When the engine is started, the warning light blinks to indicate that the control system is activated.The P.T.O. is engaged by pressing and holding the button for at least 2 se-conds.If the button is held for more than 10 seconds, or if there is a fault with the electrohydraulic control, the P.T.O. will be de-activated automatically.The control unit also disengages the P.T.O. every time the engine is swit-ched off.The rear P.T.O. can be engaged by pressing the ground-operated pushbutton located on the rear right-hand fender.

Differential lock engagement controlPressing the pushbutton engages the front and rear differential locks. The integral light illuminates to indicate that thelocks are engaged. Pressing the pushbutton again disengages the locks.

Front-wheel drive engagement controlPushbutton with integral indicator light.Press to engage front-wheel drive; press again to disengage.

N.B. Engagement of the above devices is also signalled by indicator lights on the console.

Gearbox

The POWERSHIFT transmission offers the possibility to select each speed in or or (using the gear and ran-ge lever) without having to depress the clutch pedal simply by pressing the electro-hydraulic control switch.This is achieved by way of three multi-plate clutches.

Front and rear liftThe front lift is operated by way of the control lever of the auxiliary service control valves located on the right of the dri-ving seat, after first opening the shut-off cock in the oil delivery line to the front lift.The mechanical rear lift is operated by controls located to the right of the driving seat.

For tractors equipped with electronic lifts, see p. 157 for a description of the controls.

202

68

6 Controls


A - Main oil filter on supply circuitB - Hydraulic pump for auxiliary service

control valve and power liftC - Hydraulic pump for hydrostatic

steering and electro-hydraulic controlsE - Hydrostatic steering control valveF - Steering cylindersG - Oil coolerH - Pressure control valvesI - Gearbox lubricationL - Hydraulic power unitM - Differential locksN - 4WD engagementO - Rear P.T.O. clutchP - Auxiliary service control valveQ - Front lift hydraulic control valveR - Lifting cylinder

Fig. 1 - Hydraulic circuit diagram (with electronic lift - STANDARD version).

203

Controls


6

68

L R

T P

5 bar16 bar

P.T.O.

Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)

8 Bar

OSPC 80 OR

100 Bar 2 WD

0.009.3141.4/11

150 Bar 4 WD

0.290.6310.4/10

27 L/min.

150 Micr.

32

cc

ø 1.1

Main shaft

Sec. shaft

N.giri/min.pompe:2522

11 cm 3

x190 Bar

T

E

P

A AB B

1

0 0

2 21

10

T

H.P.C.

2.3719.730.0

(V=0.84 dm ) 3

35 L/min.

14 cm3

T

TP

T

TT

Lift Lower

Neutr

al

210 BarRear lift

6 Bar

19 cm 3

47 L/min.

11 bar

Rh Lf

A

P T

A

P T

Inn

.D

is.

Front

Diff.look

Rear Dis

.In

n.

4 Wd

A

P T

4RM 2RM

F

E

MN

O

I

L

H

B

C

A

P

R

Q

G

A - Main oil filter on supply circuitB - Hydraulic pump for auxiliary service

control valve and power liftC - Hydraulic pump for hydrostatic steering

and electro-hydraulic controlsD - POWERSHIFTE - Hydrostatic steering control valveF - Steering cylindersG- Delivery line filterH - Pressure control valvesI - Gearbox lubricationL - Hydraulic power unitM - Differential locksN - 4WD engagementO - Rear P.T.O. clutchP - 6-way auxiliary service control valveQ - Front lift hydraulic control valveR - Lifting cylinderS - Shut-off valve for front liftT - Control valve for hydraulic trailer brakingU - Front lift cylindersV1 - Anti-shock valve for front liftV2 - Lowering speed control valve for front liftZ - Hydraulic unloader (oil level pump)

Fig. 2 - Hydraulic circuit diagram (version with full complement of optional equipment).

204

Controls


6

68

A

P T

A

P T

Trailer brake

Tractor brake

Rear lift

2.3719.810.0/10 (Italia)

2.3719.550.0/20 (Francia)

70 Bar

2.3719.740.0/10

H M L

P T

A A

Inn.

Dis

.

Front

Diff.look

Rear Dis

.In

n.

4 Wd

TP

700

cc

11 cm

27 L/min.

3

210 Bar

P

Y

Rh Lf

190 barP-Ecc.

P-Reg.

T

N

Rear lift

AB AB AB

(V=0.84 dm )3

A

P

1

2.3729.320.0

Rear free return

L R

T P

5 bar16 bar

P.T.O.

Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)

A

P T

11 bar

OSPC 80 OR

100 Bar 2 WD

0.009.3141.4/11

150 Bar 4 WD

0.290.6310.4/10

27 L/min.

25 Micr.25 Micr.

32

cc

ø 1.1

Main shaft

Sec. shaft


11 cm 3

x

Freno inser.=13 bar,disinser.=5 bar=3 bar

F

E

M

N

O

I

L

H

B

C

G

U

V1

V2

S

R

Q

PT

A

22

1 1 3 3

2

3

4 5

6

X

ø 1

Z

D

A - Check valveB - Check valveC - Gearbox lubrication pressure control valve (5 bar)D - Sequence valve (16 bar)P - PumpT - Oil returnL1- Gearbox lubricationL2- PTO lubrication1 - Rear PTO2 - Differential lock3 - 4WD

Fig. 3 - Hydraulic circuit on right-hand side of gearbox.

205

Controls


6

68

The hydraulic injector A inserted in the transfer pipe B equalises the oil levels in the front and rear gearboxes.

The injector allows oil in the front gearbox to flow easily into the rear gearbox.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Flow used 1,8 l/min

Pressure of jet 16 bar

Flow transferred 25 l/min

A - Hydraulic injectorB - Transfer pipeC - Front gearboxD - Rear gearboxE - Venturi pipe

Fig. 4 - Details of front and rear gearboxes.

206

Controls


6

68

A - Circuit transmission lubrification\PTOB - Flow control valve

Fig. 5 - Machine with electrohydraulic controls operating differential lock, four wheel drive and power take-off, equipped withPOWERSHIFT.

207

68

6Controls


A - Circuit transmission lubrification\PTOB - Flow control valve

Fig. 6 - Machine with electrohydraulic controls operating differential lock, four wheel drive and power take-off, not equipped withPOWERSHIFT.

208

68

6 Controls


Specifications

Solenoid operated valve controlling four wheel drive engagement, differential lock, equipped with POWERSHIFT and the rearP.T.O. clutch.

Code 2.3719.670.0 max. delivery rate l/min 12 max. pressure bar 210.

Before tightening the lock nut, smear the thread with LOCTlTE 242 (blue).

Fig. 7 - Solenoid valve

209

68

6Controls


Specifications

Solenoid operated valve controlling the front P.T.O. clutch

Code 007.5339.0/10 max. Delivery l/min 12 max. pressure bar 210.

Before tightening the lock nut, smear the thread with LOCTlTE 242 (blue).

Fig. 8 - Solenoid valve

210

68

6 Controls


Fig. 9 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - LOW clutch engagement

211

68

6Controls


Fig. 10 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - MEDIUM clutch engagement

212

Controls

Electro-hydraulic controls68

6

Fig. 11 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - HIGH clutch engagement.

213

68

6Controls


Adjustment of front and rear differential lock control

Turn fork A and lock nut B to preload spring C, so as to obtain a distance X allowing contact with piston E (with spring Dattached) when the piston is positioned flush with surfaceF (on version with electrohydraulic controls) or protrudes 18.5mm (on version with mechanical controls).Also check that the shoes of the fork do not rub against the sides of the engagement sleeve.For adjustment of engagement sleeve, see chapter on front-wheel drive.To make sure that the shifting of the piston of the rear differential look is of 12 mms.

Fig. 12 - Front and rear differential lock control.

214

68

6 Controls


Platform

Fig. 1 - Instrument panel.

Fig. 3 - Structure of the platform.

Fig. 2 - Roll bar.

215

71

7Body

Driving position

Cab

general specifications

The cab responds to international standards in terms both of safety and of internal noise levels. The enclosure isequipped with ventilation, heating and air conditioning systems.Versions available are:— Cab with ventilation and heating— Cab with ventilation, heating and air conditioning

Fig. 4 - Structure of cab.

Fig. 6 - Front windows glass and seals.

Fig. 5 - Front window glass and seals.

Fig. 7 - Cab doors

216

71

7 Body

Driving position

Fig. 8 - Rear window.

Fig. 10 - Cab roof.

Fig. 9 - Internal claddings

Fig. 11 - Screenwash pump and liquid container.

217

71

7Body

Driving position

Fig. 12 - Cab air filter unit1 - Air filter2 - Protective grille

Cab air filterPeriodically (as dictated by operating conditions): clean the filter.To gain access to the filter, lower the protective grille,release the two filter clamp knobs, and removeThe filter is cleaned as follows:— blast with compressed air (6 bar max) in the direction opposite to that of normal filtration, until all accumulated dust

has been dislodged;— wash for about 15 minutes in a solution of detergent and water at 40 °C;

— rinse clean in running water;— leave to dry naturally at ambient temperature.Important: the filter must be replaced if damaged, or renewed routinely after cleaning 6 times.

Screen washPeriodically (as dictated by operating conditions):check the level of screenwash liquid in the plastic container located at the rear of the machine.In the event of the jet being rendered defective by an obstruction, this will be remedied generally by freeing the nozzleoutlet with a pin.If necessary, reposition the nozzle so that the jet strikes the screen at the top of the sweep made by the wiper blade.It is good policy during winter months to add antifreeze solution to the screenwash liquid, or methyl alcohol.Warning: it is important that all glass in the cab is kept thoroughly clean.The rear view mirrors must always be kept clean and properly positioned.

Screen wipers (front and rear)The wiper blade has a bayonet fitting.The blade is removed by lifting the catch of the central mounting.

218

71

7 Body

Driving position

Fig. 13 - Front screen wiper. Fig. 14 - Rear screen wiper.

REMOVING THE DRIVING PLATFORM COMPLETE WITH CAB

NOTE: even though not strictly necessary, we advise that you remove the rear wheels to facilitate access to parts re-quiring disconnection.

PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:

— Using a hydraulic jack, raise the rear of the tractor and place stands under the rear trumpet housings, then removethe rear wheels;

— Remove the top engine hood;— Remove the front panel, disconnecting the leads of the front lights and then disconnect the positive (+) and nega-

tive(-) battery leads;— Disconnect the leads from the starter motor and the engine oil pressure switch;— Disconnect the bulkhead connector of the dashboard warning lights;— Disconnect the leads on the right-hand side of the gearbox connected to the solenoid valves of the electro-hydraulic

services and the POWERSHIFT unit;— Disconnect the lead connected to the actuator of the electronic accelerator (only on tractors equipped with electronic

governors);— Disconnect the two tie-rods of the THROTTLE and ENGINE STOP from the governor;— Disconnect the lead connected to wheel speed sensor positioned on the left-hand side of the front gearbox;— Disconnect the three leads connected to the PTO selection sensors (540-775-1000 rpm);— Disconnect the lead to the cab heating element from the heater alternator;— Disconnect the oil pipe from the clutch control actuator;— Disconnect the brake pipes from the “separate brakes” valves;— Disconnect the lift control rods and remove them from the tractor;— Disconnect the hydrostatic steering oil delivery and return pipes underneath the platform and on the right-hand side

of the gearbox;

— Disconnect the three 3 control levers GEARCHANGE-INVERSOR-RANGE GEARS from underneath the platform,removing the retaining screws of each lever;

— Remove the two securing straps of the exhaust silencer and remove the silencer itself;

219

71

7Body

Driving position

— Detach the two pipe clamps positioned in the channel passing over the engine and disconnect the oil return pipefrom the cooler and the oil pipe of front lift;

— Disconnect the two hydrostatic steering delivery-return pipes from the hydrostatic steering oil cooler;— Disconnect the lead and remove the brake and clutch oil reservoir securing strap;— Disconnect the handbrake control and the synchro PTO control rod on the left-hand side under the driving platform;— Loosen the 4 screws securing the platform to the silent-blocks;— Disconnect the air conditioning system pipes at the quick-fit couplings and then loosen the respective retaining nuts

of the pipes connected to the cab so that they may be detached from their support brackets;— Connect the cab to a suitable hoist and raise it, taking care that it disengages form the tractor, then remove it from the

tractor;

Fig. 15 - Disconnecting the parts connectinga the Fig. 16 - Lifting the cab off the tractor using acab to the tractor. hoisting.

Remove cab.

WARNING: during the cab hoisting operation, check carefully that all the parts have been disconnected and that thecab disengages from the tractor.

IMPORTANT: If the fuel tank is also to be removed, discon-nect the flexible pipe from the rigid injector leak-off pipe.

Refitting the cab or driving platform.

Refitting: the reverse of removal.

BREAKAGE OF THE TOP ENGINE HOOD RELEASE CA-BLE

To open the hood, insert a screwdriver between the hoodand the grille to operate the hood catch.Push the screwdriver to the left (relative to the driving posi-tion) to release the hood.

Fig. 17 - Position the cab on suitable supports andproceed with the operations on the tractor.

220

71

7 Body

Driving position

Fig. 18 - Hood catch release control. Fig. 19 - Condenser and filter/dryer unit.

Fig. 20 - Air conditioning system pipes from compressor Fig. 21 - Air conditioning system compressorto condenser and from the condenser to the filter/dryer.

221

71

7Body

Driving position

Fig. 22 - High visibility cab air filter

Fig. 24 - High visibility cab roof.

Fig. 23 - Coverings and outlets for air circulation in highvisibility cab

222

71

7 Body

Driving position

84

Ventilation

The ventilation unit is housed in the cab ceiling.To switch it on and adjust it, turn the electrical fan switch to the desired speed.The cab becomes slightly pressurized when the ventilation system is in operation, so that fresh air can enter only by wayof the filter installed in the rear section of the cab roof.The fan switch can be operated only after the ignition key is inserted.

The air flow can be regulated and directed by suitably positioning the air diffusers.Air can be taken in fresh from outside or recirculated from within the cab by way of the relative side inlets.

� Recirculation inlets fully closed: air is taken in entirely from outside the cab through the rear grille and filte-red through a paper element positioned behind the grille.

� Either fully or partially open air recirculating grille: now the air is recirculated inside the cab.

N.B. - It is very important that the air diffusers never be completely closed so as to allow for a steady air flow.To obtain a greater pressurization inside the cab, it is necessary to take the air from the outside, therefore the inside airrecirculating grille should be fully closed.

Climate control system

A - Condenser

B - Temperature sensor

C - Control switches

D - 2400 Watt electric heating element(resistance across terminals 0.655 ohm)

E - Defroster

F - Ventilation unit

Heating System

The heater is switched on and adjusted by rotating the control knob at the roof console, then switching on the blowerand setting the selector at the preferred speed.To warm the cab up quickly, the knob should be rotated fully clockwise and the blower set to speed III.The screen is demisted or defrosted by air directed through a slot vent.For defrost or fast demist, all other vents should be closed off.

IMPORTANT: ventilation is provided by a single blower unit serving both the heating system and the air-conditioningsystem.After reaching the desired temperature adjust the system to suit your needs.

N.B. - For ideal system operation, the engine must run at 1600 r.p.m.

WARNING:Before starting the engine, make sure the system is off (by turning off the ventilation fan) so as not to overlo-ad the battery.

After using the system at full power for a long period of time, never turn it off suddenly but let it first idle for about 20 se-conds.

223

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

System configuration

The heating system consist of two units:1 - Electric heater 3 (3 fig. 1) and blower unit (4 fig. 1) installed behind roof console.2 - Power supplyng set, consisting of an auxiliary alternator (1 fig.1) located front of the engine and driven by a belt di-rectly linked to the engine pulley.

If the air does not come out from the diffusers right away as soon as the system is started, turn off immediately and iden-tify the fault.

N.B. Never turn on the heating system when working in dusty environments.

In the event of the system failing to operate, check the fuse in the roof terminal box.

Fig. 1 - Configuration of ventilation and heating unit.

1 - Alternator2 - Compressor3 - 3 speed fan4 - Electric resistence5 - Evaporator6 - Ventilator7 - Dehydrating filter8 - Condenser9 - Air filter

10 - Recirculation inlets11 - Pivotable air diffusers

224

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning

Temperature sensor

Ventilation switch

Temperature control potentiometer

Fig. 2 - Ventilation - heating system.

225

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

Temperature control knob

Blower motor

Heating relay

Fig. 3 - Components of the ventilation - heating system.

226

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning

Air conditioning unit for cabs

The air conditioning system will operate only with engine running and the 3-speed electric fan unit switched on.


type of refrigerant R 134 ainlet circuit pressure (*): high bar 2,5- normal bar 0,8 ÷ 2,5- low bar 0,8delivery circuit pressure bar see page 350

quantity of refrigerant in circuit g 1400quantity of oil cc 200

type of oil Suniso SP20minimum pressure switch settingbar 2maximum pressure switch setting bar 27electric fan pressure switch setting close at 15 bar - open at 11 bar

tightening torque for pipeline fittings kgm (Nm) 6 (58)

(*)Pressure is influenced by ambient temperature; in normal operating conditions, with a temperature of 27 °C, pressu-re in the delivery circuit will be 12 bar.

Pressure in the same system will register at around 16 bar with an ambient temperature of 38 °C.

1 - Electromagnetic coupling2 - Compressor3 - Condenser4 - Fan5 - Filter6 - Sight glass7 - Minimum pressure switch8 - Electric fan control

pressure switch9 - Maximum pressure switch10 - Expansion valve11 - Evaporator12 - Bulb13 - Potentiometer

Fig. 4 - Diagram showing operation of air conditioning system.

227

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

Operation and maintenance of the air-conditioning system

Air-conditioning process

The cooler is provided with a three-speed fan which aspirates the air from the cab interior thereafter forcing it across theradiant block, thus making it cool down.

The heat exchange occurring between the gaseous coolant and the air lapping the walls of the cooler radiant block re-sults in air cooling.

The conditioned air undergoes a humidification process, as the low temperature inside the cooler causes a great deal ofcondensate to deposit on the external walls of the cooler. This condensate is subsequently conveyed under liquid stateoutside the cab through a special drainage system.

The coolant at the cooler exit is still under gaseous state and has a temperature of 5 to 10°C, in spite of the thermal ex-change that has taken place, and then it is aspirated by the compressor again.

How to operate the system

Before starting the air-conditioning system set the electric fan onto the desired speed. If the electric fan is switched off,the conditioning system will not start.

The air-conditioning system is turned on by progressively rotating the control potentiometer clockwise, which is locatedin the front top section of the cab compartment. Rotate it anticlockwise to turn the system off.

Warning: Before starting the engine, always make sure the air-conditioning system is switched off so that the batterywill not be overloaded.

When the air-conditioning system is operating, the pivotable air diffusers should never be completely closed.To obtain a quick cab environment cooling the following is recommended:

— Fully open the air recirculation grating and the pivotable air diffusers;

— Turn first the fan control and then the potentiometer control all the way out;

— Open the doors a few seconds so as to let the hot air out of the cab compartment if the tractor has stood underthe sun radiation for a long period;

— Adjust the system according to personal preference when the desired temperature has been attained.

Checking the air-conditioning system charge

System fully charged(refrigerant entirely in liquid state)System fully discharged(refrigerant entirely in gaseous state)

System not fully chargedRefrigerant in part gaseous and part liquid state

Sight glass clear

Sight glass cloudy(Bubbles or foam visible)

228

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning

Switching on the air conditioning

Electromagnetic coupling

Pressure switches

Expansion valve

Temperature sensor

The system is activated by way of the 3 speedelectric fan switch.

Once the potentiometer is moved beyondthe initial contact, a voltage of 12 V is gene-rated between terminal B (red wire) and thebrown wire terminal of the potentiometer.

Engagement and disengagement is pilotedby the temperature control potentiometer,and by the pressure switch located at thedemoisturizing filter which cuts in respecti-vely at: 2 bar and 27 bar.

Pressure switch (positioned on demoisturi-zing filter). Comprises 3 switches:

— 1 controlling minimum pressure— 1 controlling maximum pressure— 1 controlling the electric fan of the con-

denser. The electric fan unit is interloc-ked to the pressure switch, which is set:- to close the circuit at 15 bar- to open the circuit at 11 bar

Electric fan unit

By-pass the pressure switch (place jumpers across the two terminals of the pressure switch and the 2 leads of the fanunit).

If the fan operates: the pressure switch is defective

If the fan does not operate: a) check the fuse;b) check the relay.

Tracing faults in the electric fan unit

Fault Causes Action

Fan does not start Defective pressure switch Replace pressure switch

Defective relay Replace relay

Defective electrical or mechanical Replace fan unit

Relay (see electrical diagram)

Place a jumper across terminals 30 and 87a; if the fan comes into operation, the relay needs to be replaced.

Water dripping from the points at which condensate drain lines are connected to the condi-tioning unit

The problem can be overcome by loosening the clip that fastens the drain line to the cab upright and pulling the tubedownwards, so that the water can run away freely.

229

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

Fig. 5 - Compressor, air conditioning system.

Fig. 6 - Demoisturizing filter, air conditioning system.

230

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning

Checking system

Check belt tension: under finger pressure applied to the mid point between the two pulleys, belt should not deflect morethan 8 to 10 mm maximally.

Always keep condenser fins duly clean.

Cleaning should be carried out by a water or air jet (be careful not to bend the fins, use the special combing tool to straig-hten them again).

Ascertain the compressor is firmly secured to tractor and the pulleys are properly aligned.

Warning: When removing the strainer or the air-conditioning unit it is required to plug the inlet and the outlet pipes atonce, this is to prevent both dust and moisture from entering.

Even a few minutes’ exposure to the environmental humidity makes it necessary to replace the filter.

System safety elements

Minimum pressure switch (7 Fig. 4).Switches the system off when a failure causes the pressure to drop below 2 bar within the high pressure circuit.

Maximum pressure switch (9 Fig. 4).Switches the system off when pressure exceeds 27 bar inside the circuit as a result of an excessive setting or a failure(high pressure area).

Condenser fan control pressure switch (8 Fig. 4)Switches the condenser fan on when coolant attains the same pressure of the switch setting pressure.

Note: The above three safety devices are grouped inside the thermostatic bulb located on the dehydrator filter. (figura6 page 230).

Temperature regulation

Temperature regulation is obtained through the potentiometer, which automatically regulates the temperature of the airflow from the radiator according to the environmental temperature, through a combined action with the fan.

A pressure switch located on the electric circuit opens and closes the electric circuit of the compressor electromagneticcoupling as a consequence of the potentiometer operation. When the circuit is open the pulley will be idling, on the otherhand, when the circuit is closed, this will operate integrally with the compressor shaft.

231

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

Charging the system

with recharging station p/n 5.9030.508.6

1 - High pressure gauge2 - Low pressure gauge3 - Low pressure valve4 - Vacuum pump valve5 - Metering pipeline valve6 - Recharge pipeline valve7 - Metering pipeline8 - Vacuum pump pipeline

9 - Low pressure circuit recharge pipeline(blue)

10 - High pressure circuit recharge pipeline(red)

11 - Vacuum pump12 - Electric switch13 - Metering gauge14 - Air bleed valves15 - Metering unit16 - Electrical power supply17 - Compressor18 - Refrigerant bottle19 - Electric leak detector

20 - Electric heater element for refrigerant

Fig. 7 - Charging station for air conditioning circuit.

Filling the metering unit

Connect the refrigerant bottle to the metering unit by means of the high or low pressure hose (9 - 10 Fig. 7).Make certain that the valve (5 Fig. 7) is securely shut, then open the valve of the bottle.As the refrigerant flows into the metering unit, open and shut the air bleed valve (14, Fig. 7) intermittently.Read thevaluegivenby thehandof themeteringunit pressuregauge (13,Fig.7)andposition thevalueagainst the indicator.Once1400gramsof refrigeranthavebeen transferred into themeteringunit, close thevalveof thebottleanddetach thehose.

Refilling the system with oil

Connect the high pressure hose (9, Fig. 7) of the recharge station by way of the smaller diameter valve A (Fig. 8) positionedon the pipeline connecting with fitting D (Fig. 5) at the compressor (mounted in the engine compartment), and the lowpressure hose (10, Fig. 7) of the station by way of the larger diameter valve B (Fig. 8) positioned on the pipeline connec-ted with fitting S (Fig. 5) at the compressor; then activate the pump for 30 minutes approx to establish a vacuum in thecircuit.The valves (3 - 4 - 5 - 6, Fig. 7) must remain open during this operation.

232

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning

Filling the system with oilDetach the low pressure hose from the recharge station and immerse the end in a graduated vessel containing 200 gapprox of SUNISO SP 20 or equivalent oil. Allow 250 grams of the oil to be drawn into the circuit.Reconnect the hose to the station.

Filling the system with R134a refrigerantWhen the low pressure gauge (2, Fig. 7) registers a minimum value (760 mm Hg) that remains stable for between 5 and10 minutes, close the valve (5 Fig. 7).Open the filler valve (5, Fig. 7) and wait until the specified quantity (1800 g) of refrigerant has entered the system.In the event that the flow of refrigerant contained in the metering unit should be interrupted, warm the unit by means ofthe electric heater (20, Fig. 7), rechecking the pressure on the relative gauge.

Should this not be sufficient, start the engine and throttle up to 1200 rev/min approx. Switch on the air conditioningsystem, and the R 134a refrigerant will be drawn directly into the circuit by the compressor.

Close the filler valve (5, Fig. 7), and check with the leak detector that there is no escape of fluid from the fittings of the cir-cuit. Should any leaks be detected, these must be eliminated, and the refrigerant reintroduced.

Caution: In the event of oil leaks being detected, the circuit must be emptied completely and the entire recharge proce-dure recommenced.

Fig. 8 - Valves for connection of the tractor to the air conditioning recharge and service station.A - “HIGH PRESSURE” valveB - “LOW PRESSURE” valve

Final checksOnce all the refrigerant has been put into the air conditioning circuit, check (with the engine running and the system inoperation) that the high pressure gauge shows a value of between 15 and 20 bar, and the low pressure gauge a valuebetween 1.5 and 2.5 bar.

233

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

Verifying operation of the system after recharging

The system can be regarded as performing to its full capabilites when the delivery pressure gauge shows the followingvalues:

Ambient temperature °C Delivery circuit pressure

27 12 bar32 14 bar35 15 bar38 17 bar40 18 bar43 20 bar

The temperature values indicated are those likely to be encountered in the course of a typical twelve month period.

Having established that the system is operating correctly, detach the high and lower pressure hoses of the station fromthe tractor and check again with the leak detector that there is no escape of fluid from any part of the system.

CAUTION: use only R 134a refrigerant as indicated on the Connecting the tractor to the air conditioning system rechargedata plate attached to the compressor of the air conditioning and service station.system.

Directions for tightening air conditioning system pipeline fittings.

All fittings have an internal seal. Screw the two parts of the fitting together by hand until the nut is finger tight, then hol-ding the one part steady with a fixed wrench, apply a torque wrench to the nut and tighten to the value indicated in the ta-ble.

Type Thread Tightening torque

6 5/8” - 18 UNF 13,6 ÷ 20,3 Nm (1,4 ÷ 2,1 kgm)

7 3/4” - 16 UNF 33,5 ÷ 40,0 Nm (3,3 ÷ 4,0 kgm)

8 7/8” - 14 UNF 35,5 ÷ 42,0 Nm (3,6 ÷ 4,3 kgm)

9 1 1/16” - 14 UNF 40,3 ÷ 47,3 Nm (4,1 ÷ 4,8 kgm)

234

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning

Fig. 9 - Control switches1 - Heating control.2 - Air conditioning control.3 - Ventilation control.

Fig. 10 - Receiver-drier located in cab roof. Fig. 11 - Ventilation - conditioning - heating.

1 - Level sight glass.

235

Systems

Air conditioning

8

86

Fig. 12 - Components of the ventilation - conditioning - heating system. Fig. 13 - Air handling unit for high visibility cab

236

Systems

Air conditioning

8

86

Fig. 14 - Condenser and fan unit for high visibility cab

237

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

Fig. 15 - Ventilation-heating unit for high visibility cab

238

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning

Fig. 16 - Ventilation-heating unit components for high visibility cab

239

86

8Systems

Air conditioning

Fig. 17 - Climatisation system components for high visibility cab

240

86

8 Systems

Air conditioning


LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT

Excessive pressure

Normal pressure

Excessively low pres-sure

System failsto operate

Poor system efficiency

excessive pressurein the high pressurecircuit

too a low pressurein the high pressurecircuit

excessive pressurein the high pressurecircuit

normal pressure inthe high pressurecircuit

normal pressure inthe high pressurecircuit

low pressure in thehigh pressure cir-cuit

burnt fuse

disconnected wires

coolant leaks

compressor notoperatin smoothly

pressures insideboth high and lowpressure circuitstend to balance

bubbles are visiblethrough the filter in-spection glass

poor system effi-ciency

after some workingtime

expansion valvejammed up

blocked circuit

discharged system

replace the fuse

connect the wires

inspect with aleak-finder

overcharged circuit

expansion valvejammed up

air in the circuit

Out-of-setting com-pressor needle val-ves

humidity inside thecircuit

replace the expan-sion valve

change the part andreplace the filter

recharge system

stop the leakageand recharge thesystem

release systempressure throughthe compressor ne-edle valves

replace the valve

dehydrate the cir-cuit

replace the valves

replace the filter andbleed the air. Re-charge the circuit

241

86

8Systems


Hydraulic system

KEY TO FIGURE 1:

1 - Delivery line pressure test point2 - Hydrostatic steering - maximum hydrostatic steering pressure

(see instructions on page 186-192)3 - 4WD steering cylinder pressure test point4 - 2WD steering cylinder pressure test point5 - Gearbox oil cooler6 - Electro-hydraulic control unit (see instructions on page 92)7 - Hydraulic power unit pressure test point (see instructions on page 40-92)8 - Lubrication oil pressure test point9 - POWERSHIFT

10 - Hydraulic unloader for equalising oil level in gearboxes11 - Gearbox lubrication12 - Rear P.T.O. (see instructions on page 92)13 - Diff. lock hydraulic actuators14 - 4WD engagement hydraulic actuator15 - Trailer braking hydraulic control valve16 - Pressure test point for trailer braking hydraulic control valve17 - 8-way auxiliary control valve (see instructions on pages 250)18 - Pressure relief valve oil pressure test point19 - Kick-out oil pressure test point (see instructions on page 250)20 - Hydraulic ways oil pressure test point21 - Connected implement22 - Rear lift23 - Front lift antishock valve and accumulator (see instructions on page 174)24 - Implement coupled to rear lift25 - Lifting cylinder26 - Rear lift antishock valve27 - Front lift (see instruction on page 174)28 - Lifting cylinder pressure test point29 - Front lift antishock valve30 - Shut-off valve for oil supply to front lift31 - Free oil return line on rear of tractor (for hydraulic motors)32 - Front P.T.O. control valve (see instructions on page 178)

242

82

8 Systems

Hydraulic system

Fig. 1 - Points provided for measurement of oil pressures in the tractor’s hydraulic system (see references on page 242).

243

Systems

Hydraulic system

8

82

A

P T

A

P T

Trailer brake

Tractor brake

Rear lift

70 Bar

H M L

P T

A A

Inn

.D

is.

Front

Diff.look

Rear Dis

.In

n.

4 Wd

TP

70

0cc

V max V max V max

13.9 cm14.7 cm11.6 cm 3 3 3

6/20 L/min.

19 cm

47 L/min.

3

ø 1

210 Bar

P

Y

Rh Lf

190 bar

P-Ecc.

P-Reg.

T

N

Rear lift

AB AB AB

(V=0.84 dm )3

A

P

A

B

Rear free return

F.to A2

L R

T P

5 bar16 bar

Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)

A

P T

11 bar

8 Bar

OSPC 80 OR

100 Bar 2 WD

150 Bar 4 WD

27 L/min.

25 Micr. 25 Micr.

32

cc

ø 1.1

Main shaft

Sec. shaft


11 cm 3

x

Freno inser.=13 bar,disinser.=5 bar

16 bar

150 bar 100 bar

5 bar

CENTRALINA COMANDI ELETROIDRAULICI

AGROSHIFT

PTO

16 bar

GUIDA

IDROSTATICA

DISTRIBUTORE IDRAULICO

PER LA FRENATURA DEL RIMORCHIO

SOLLEVATORE

ANTERIORE

SOLLEVATORE

POSTERIORE

DISTRIBUTORE IDRAULICO

ATTREZZO COLLEGATO

ATTREZZO COLLEGATO

Pressione dii esercizio

Sollevatore anteriore

con attrezzo collegato

Pressione di esercizio

190 bar

150 bar

1

4

5

7

8

10

12

13 14

21

24

26

28

3

190 bar18

31

2

6

22

23

24

17

25

2627

9

15

16

1920

29

30

11

VALVOLA DI COMANDO

PTO anteriore

32

4 bar13 bar9POWERSHIFT

Oil filters

The oil filters are mounted to the rigth hand side of the transmission at the rear end, and are easily replaced.Filters must be replaced whenever the blockage indicator lights up at the instrument panel.The filter blockage pressure switch is set at 0.5 bar, and must be replaced with another of identical specifications if faulty.Ensure that the replacement is stamped with the correct 0.5 bar setting.Whenever the transmission is stripped down for servicing or overhaul, clean the mesh strainer fitted to the bottom of the hou-sing.

CAUTION - Operate the lift system and auxiliary spool valves only when the blockage indicator is no longer alight.

IMPORTANT - If during normal operation of the machine the clogging filter indicator should light up, remplace the filter.

Hydraulic pumps

The hydraulic pumps require no servicing or adjustment even after a long period of operation, although the splines of thepump shaft must be inspected with care: there must be no signs of wear or damage.

Checking the relief valves of the hydraulic lift systemUsing tool 5.9030.520.4, check that the circuit pressure relief valve incorporated into the auxiliary spool valves is set at 190bar and the system pressure shock valve at 210 bar.Remember that for the lift to function correctly, operating pressure in the circuit should not exceed 150 bar.The operating pressure can be measured by coupling a gauge to the oil pressure line between the directional control valveand the lift; for machines with assistor cylinders, the gauge can be coupled to the pressure line connecting with the assistors.

A - Snap-ring H - BearingB - Seal ring I - BushesC - Cover L - Driver gearD - Gasket M - Pump caseE - Gasket N - GasketF - Gasket O - Driver gearG - Feather key P - Cover

Fig. 2 - Component parts of the hydraulic pump assembly

Fig. 3 - Pump assembly cover. Fig. 4 - Pump case.A - Cover B - Pump case.B - Pump caseC - Base

Stripping the hydraulic pump

Removal

The pump is secured to the tractor by 2 of the 4 bolts holding the pump assembly together. These two bolts are diagonally op-posite.Having removed the pump from the vehicle, the components are freed by unscrewing the two remaining bolts which keep thecover A (see fig 3) clamped to the frame C and the pump body B; this done, remove the washers and then the cover.Using a proper pointed tool remove gasket E (Fig. 6 pag. 343), mark with a reference the position of the bearings with respectto the pump case and then take the bearings from their seats by pushing from inside outwards and being careful the connec-ting pin neither be lost nor damaged.

Block the pump case in a vice as shown in figure and then remove snap ring F .

Remove the seal ring.

Fig. 5 - Pump disassembly.

B - Pump caseC - BaseD - BearingsG - GearsI - Screw

244

Systems

Hydraulic system

8

82

WARNING - If pump bearings, pinions or casing are found to bedamaged or worn, these parts cannot be repaired because of theirconstruction tolerances.

When performing checks, because of an oil leakage or an exces-sive and irregular delivery pressure, only the gaskets indicated inthe spare parts lists can be replaced.

After checking the pump for wear due to abrasion from impuritiesand for any other visible damage, when reassembling use, in anycase, a new set of gaskets.It is also indispensable to mark each single part to reinstall cor-rectly.

Inspections and checksAfter removing all gaskets, both on the covers and in the pump ca-sing, carefully clean all parts using a proper solvent.Carefully dry all parts with compressed air; this is to avoid that anysolvent residuals may damage the gaskets on reassembly.Visually check the pump case internally and ascertain it is not da-maged.Check both pinions and bearings for wear, abrasion due to foreignmatters or cavitation.

NOTE: Should any damage, wear or in any case a component re-placement be required, with the exception of the gaskets, the enti-re pump must be replaced.

WARNING: Do not press onto the stop ring to prevent any damage.

Use a dial gauge to make sure the stop ring height be21 0 15

0 05, ,

,

-

+mm,

otherwise replace taking care the new stop ring installed be mea-sured accordingly.If reading is above specification fit the new ring in reversed posi-tion.

A - Stop ringB - GasketC - Bearings

Fig. 9 - Inside seals.

D - BearingE - Gasket

Fig. 6 - Internal pump case parts.

C - HousingD - BearingG - GearH - Bush

Fig. 7 - Pump gears.

C - BaseF - Snap ring

Fig. 8 - Snap ring removal.

245

82

8Systems

Hydraulic system

A - Seal ring

Fig. 10 - Seal ring. Fig. 11 - Piloted check valve components

AssemblyBefore assembly all parts shall be oiled.Correctly position the gaskets in their seats paying particular attention stop ring A and gasket B be correctly fitted into bea-ringsC (see fig. 9). Coat the cover inner side with a slight grease layer then apply to pump case and tightening the secu-ring screws to the recommended torque.

WARNING:The securing screws should be tightened gradually making also sure that rotors are not hampered in theirmovements.

Tightening torquesPump cover securing screws:- M8 2 kgm (20 Nm)- M10 5 kgm (49 Nm)Restore the recommended oil level and then bleed the air from the hydraulic circuit.

Fig. 12 - Connection of check valve to hydraulic control valve.

NOTE: To ensure correct operation of the check valve, it must be connected to the element of the control valvefitted with DETENT (as shown in the figure )

246

82

8 Systems

Hydraulic system

1064-48

Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves

Auxiliary spool valves are used to control hydraulically operated external implements.The controls consist in 2 levers for a 4-way valve, or 3 levers for a 6-way valve.The levers are located on the driver’s right hand side.

Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves:

Version 1: 4 way, 2 way double acting - 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with spool detent

Version 2: 6 way, 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with kickout - 2 way double acting convertible to sin-gle acting, with spool detent (with perfect sealing valve) - 2 way double acting with float position - throttle valve (FLOWDIVIDER) with tap in cab - quick coupling for free discharge.

NB:with the auxiliary spool valve in use (unless a Flow Divider is incorporated), the operation of the hydraulic lift systemremains inhibited (except in FLOAT position).

Important: the lever should be recentred to the neutral position as soon as the external actuator has reached its strokelimit, to ensure that the hydraulic circuit does not remain pressurized any longer than strictly necessary; prolonged pres-sure will result ultimately in the hydraulic system being subjected to hazardous levels of stress.Auxiliary spool valves levers must always be in the neutral position when external services are not in use.

Fig. 1 - 4-way auxiliary control valves.A - Quick coupling for free discharge

247

88

8Systems

Auxiliary systems

Fig. 2 - 4-way auxiliary control valves.A - Quick coupling for free dischargeB - Pressure relief valve.

248

88

8 Systems

Auxiliary systems

NOTE : The 6-way auxiliary spool valve incorporates a FLOW DIVIDER which ensures that oil can be delivered at aconstant flow rate of between 3 and 42 l/min to the 2-way kickout section (first valve alongside the flow divider).The tap has set in the cab, to left hand of the place of guide.

NB: Even when the flow divider is shut off by turning the knob fully in the direction marked (-), a residual flow of oil willcontinue to reach the valve at a steady rate of 3 l/min.

Fig. 3 - 6-way hydraulic control valve.A - Pressure relief valveB - Screws to convert from double-acting to single-acting control valveC - Perfect seal valveP - Hydraulic pumpN - To rear liftT - Return

249

88

8Systems

Auxiliary systems

KICK-OUT FLOATDETENT.

190 bar

P-Ecc.

P-Reg.

P

B AB A

T

N

B A

P

B B

N

T

A

A

B

A

B

Float

A

B

55

55

55

4

C

Fig. 4 - Checking the operating pressure of auxi-liary spool valves.A - Quick couplerB - Implement oil lineC - Tee

Fig. 5 - A conversion screw allowing conversionfrom double to single acting operation; B conver-sion screw lock washer.

Fig.6 - Longitudinal section through 4/6-way spo-ol valve.

Checking the pressure relief valve setting

The setting of the pressure relief valve must always be 190 bar,and can be checked by fitting gauge p/n 5.9030.513.0 to either ofthe valve work ports and operating the relative lever. If the gaugereading is not correct, adjust the pressure relief valve see pages248 - 249

NOTE: Remember that the purpose of the relief valve is to mainta-in pressure in the hydraulic lift circuit within a given safety limit, inthis instance 190 bar.

Checking the operating pressure (see fig 4).

To verify the operating pressure of an implement connnected tothe work ports of the auxiliary spool valves, proceed as follows:

— Connect a Tee between quick coupler A and the implementpressure line B.

— Connect pressure gauge p/n 5.9030.513.0 to the Tee.— Start the engine, apply the parking brake in the interests of sa-

fety, and operate the spool valve connected to the implement.— The gauge will show the operating pressure currently registe-

ring in the circuit.

The operating pressure depends on the weight of the hitched im-plement, and should not normally exceed 150 bar.

Conversion of auxiliary spool valves from doubleacting to single acting operation (see fig 5)

Where particular requirements dictate, a double acting spool val-ve can be converted to operate in single acting mode.

To effect the conversion from double to single acting, hold the fit-ting secure and loosen the screw A by between 4 and 5 turns.NOTE: Once slack, the screw is best rotated by hand to avoidapplying excessive force and unseating the lock washer B; if thiswere to happen, the washer would find its way into the hydrauliccircuit and disallow normal operation of the lift system.

The conversion from single to double acting operation is effectedby tightening the screw A fully.

Checking the surface of the valve spools

Check that the machined surface of the spool is free of scoring orany other kind of wear.

250

88

8 Systems

Auxiliary systems

Trailer hydraulic braking system

The tractor can be equipped with a trailer hydraulic braking system on request.For trailers with “safety brake” (ITALY version), the system is equipped with a specific distributor.

The oil used is drawn from the tractor’s main hydraulic system by a special distributor.

This distributor is activated by a valve which is hydraulically connected to the tractor hydrostatic braking system control.

Trailer hydraulic braking distributor unit

Specifications (see Fig. 2, page 254)

P supplyN services connections

B trailer brake connectionT oil discharge

Y trailer braking system connectionE parking brake signaling pressure switch

Supply l/min 20 ÷ 80Constant pressure in B bar 12,5 ± 2(only for distributor ITALY version)Maximum pressure in B bar 135 ± 5(only for distributor ITALY version)

Maximum operating pressure in N bar 200(distributor ITALY version)Working temperature °C -20 + 100

Supply in P with hydraulic mineral oilPilot Y (supplied from below) with hydraulic mineral oil

251

89

8Systems

Auxiliary systems

Fig. 1 - Oil lines connected to directional control valve of hydraulic trailer braking system. A - bistable valve (fitted only in conjunctionwith ITALY version of the control valve) allows trailer brake to be applied even when tractor brakes are operated independently.

252

89

8 Systems

Auxiliary systems

Use of the tractor with CUNA 341/01 hydraulic trailer braking

The trailer hitched to a tractor equipped with this type of trailer braking requires a constant pressure of 12.5 ± 2.5 bar inorder to release the parking brake ( spring operated).

Therefore, before hitching or unhitching the trailer, this pressure must be eliminated at the coupler by switching off theengine, or better still, by applying the tractor handbrake.

The female quick-action couplers are specially-designed to remain connected if the internal pressure exceeds1.5 bar.

Unless the driver waits the few seconds required to eliminate the pressure, the coupling or uncoupling operation will beextremely difficult if not impossible.

The correct type of female coupler inserts are marked FASTER VFBO/1815F and can also be identified by the releasering, which is 44 mm in diameter and 38 mm long.

When uncoupling is performed to hastily, the pressure in the trailer's hydraulic system will lock the coupling, and in addi-tion to compromising the efficiency of the emergency brake, it will prevent re-coupling.

In this event:

— Uncouple the push-pull coupler which passes through the reservoir mounted on the trailer, by pulling on the pipeconnecting the trailer to the tractor.

— Discharge the pressure.

— Re-couple

Special recommendations

In order to change from parking brake applied from the trailer (tractor handbrake in lowered position) to efficient servicebraking, the tractor needs to send large quantities of oil to the cylinders.Some time is therefore required before trailer braking reaches full efficiency and therefore, should it be necessary touse the service brake urgently, after having released the parking brake, accelerate the engine to maximumspeed before releasing the tractor handbrake.

In general, remember that if the engine revs are high, braking will be more responsive.

Users who have trailers with "France" type non-type approved hydraulic braking may adapt the SAFIM brake valve tothis type of operation by unscrewing the hex socket screw on the pilot side cover by three turns (6 mm Allen wrench).In this way, the 12.5 bar pressure is eliminated, the red light remains on, only going out on braking.

It is dangerous to leave the valve by-pass lever in the braking position; trailers which do not conform to the Cuna 341/01standard are not equipped any protection against this.

The lever on the valve serves to completely by-pass the valve when trailers are not to be hitched to the tractor for longperiods (on trailers which conform to the Cuna 341/01 standard, even if the lever is left in the OFF position, the trailerparking brake is not released).

253

89

8Systems

Auxiliary systems

Starting

1 - Trailer parking brake control knob(present only on mechanically operated valves)

A - Rotation for engagementB - Rotation for disengagement

Fig. 2 - Control valve for hydraulic trailer braking.

No special precautions are required, simply start the engine and allow time(10-15 seconds) for the hydraulic pipes to fillwith oil before operating the brake pedal.

Checking operation

The red indicator light illuminates when the pressure at the trailer brake coupling is less than 10 bar; the light thereforegives an indication of whether the system is functioning correctly.During normal operation, providing the handbrake is released and the brake pedal is not depressed, the red light shouldbe off.When the handbrake is applied, the light will stay on even if the brake pedal is pressed.The light also comes on if the engine stalls under load, as there will be no pressure at the trailer brake coupling.In normal operation with the handbrake released, on pressing the brake pedal it is possible to hear the pump as it incre-ases the pressure.To test the pressures, apply a pressure gauge with a minimum full-scale value of 160 bar to the trailer brake coupling.

254

89

8 Systems

Auxiliary systems

Fig. 3 - Operation of the hydraulic control valve1 - Brake ON/OFF control2 - Lift3 - Trailer brake4 - Trailer brake lever

255

89

8Systems

Auxiliary systems

The pressure readings to be taken are:

— Engine running with handbrake released: 12.5 ± 2.5 bar (10 to15 bar)

— With handbrake applied: 0 bar— With handbrake released and brake pedal depressed, the pressure will rise from 12.5 to 130 ± 10 bar (120 to

140 bar).

N.B.: the valve is factory-set by Safim.

( ) values in brackets refer to pressure limits specified by the Cuna standard.

Malfunctions

Insufficient pressure

For valves with mechanical par-king brake control

For electrically controlled valves

The valve pressure rises veryslowly

The parking brake is slow torelease

Low and high pressure settings

Check the position of the valve by-pass lever, which should be ali-gned with the axis of the valve.

Release the handbrake lever.Check that the lever on the valve returns to the limit stop when thehandbrake is lowered.

Check that the microswitch is functioning correctly (operatedwhen the handbrake is lowered).

Check the power fuse and the power supply in general.

Check the connections to the coil on the two opposite poles.

If the coil is energised, by loosening the retaining nut it is possibleto feel the pull of the magnet; the coil will be very hot.

Clean the holes of the main piston; to access the piston, removethe plug on the opposite side to the pilot side (27 mm wrench).Withdraw the piston and blow clean.Close the hex socket adapter screw (France type).

Clean the holes (by washing and blowing) the rapid discharge pi-ston, which can be accessed by first removing the solenoid valveand the adapter.Warning: the valve has been tested and calibrated correctlyprior to delivery.Before attempting to adjust the springs and the shims, to solvepressure problems, clean all the holes of the piston and solenoidvalve with petrol and compressed air.

The pressure settings are regulated by way of shims, which canbe accessed by removing the pilot valve and withdrawing the 25mm diameter piston.The internal spring regulates the pressure of 12.5 ± 2.5 bar, whilethe outer spring regulates the pressure of 130 ± 10 bar.

256

89

8 Systems

Auxiliary systems

Fig. 4 - View of the hydraulic control valve.

1 - Lever position with handbrake fully applied2 - Start of trailer braking3 - Lever position with handbrake released

257

89

8Systems

Auxiliary systems

Installing the hydraulic braking valve for trailers equipped with “safety brake” (ITALY version)

For correct valve and related controls installation, it is necessary to proceed as follows:

— Secure the distributor to the tractor and connect the various oil tubes;

— Bring the tractor parking brake lever to position A (4th notch of the toothed sector) and carry out the parking bra-ke adjustment so that, in this position, the tractor is braked. Then bring the parking brake lever to position B(stop notch).

— Keeping the parking brake lever in position B, hook the hose fork to lever Y, pushing it against stop screw X.Then connect the hose to lock plate C by means of the special adjusting nuts.Under these conditions, acting on the parking brake hand lever of the tractor synchronizes the tractor and trailerstationary braking.

— Connect the wiring of the pressure switch, that is screwed on the distributor, to the specific warning light instal-led on the instrument panel of the dashboard.Then, when engaging the parking brake, the tractor warning light and the trailer warning light will light up at thesame time.

CAUTION:When the trailer is hitched to the tractor the knob on the control valve must always be turned counter-clockwise to posi-tion "1". When a trailer is not hitched or during trailer hitching/unhitching operations, the lever on the control valve mustalways be in the position "0".

On the hydraulic distributor is placed a sensor (E Fig, 5). This sensor active the warning light on the dashboard, whenthe trailer brakes is operated.

Fig. 5 - Diagram illustrating adjustment of brake control valve for trailer equipped with safety brake (ITALY version)

258

89

8 Systems

Auxiliary systems

Fig. 6 - Components of the hydraulic control valve - FRANCE version.

259

89

8Systems

Auxiliary systems

Fig. 7 - Components of the hydraulic control valve - FRANCE version

260

89

8 Systems

Auxiliary systems

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

261

ELECTRICAL WIRINGAGROPLUS 60 (up serial number 1017) - 70 (up serial number 2773) - 80

CONTENTS

THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT ..................................................................................263

HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT......................................................................................264

1. INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................2651.1 List of wiring looms....................................................................................................2651.2 Definition of components and symbols .....................................................................2661.3 General rules.............................................................................................................266

1.3.1 Modification of the tractor’s electrical/electronic circuits ............................2661.3.2 Main wiring faults .......................................................................................2661.3.3 Removal, refitting and drying of connectors and wiring .............................266

1.4 Diagnostic instruments..............................................................................................2681.5 Wire colour codes .....................................................................................................268

2. INDICES......................................................................................................................2692.1 Component description index....................................................................................2692.2 Component code index .............................................................................................2742.3 Connector index ........................................................................................................278

3. COMPONENTS ..........................................................................................................2863.1 Connector layouts .....................................................................................................2683.2 Component technical data ........................................................................................2883.3 Pinouts and descriptions of electronic control units ..................................................296

3.3.1 HML control unit.........................................................................................2963.3.2 Power lift control unit .................................................................................2973.3.3 Analogue instrument panel ........................................................................2983.3.4 Digital instrument panel .............................................................................300

4. SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................................3024.1 Earthing points ..........................................................................................................3034.2 Starting and preheating.............................................................................................3054.3 Lights - steering column switch unit (platform)..........................................................3064.4 Lights - steering column switch unit (standard cab) ..................................................3074.5 Lights - steering column switch unit (high-visibility cab)............................................3084.6 Accessories - Diagnostics (platform).........................................................................3094.7 Accessories - Diagnostics (standard cab).................................................................3104.8 Accessories - Diagnostics (high-visibility cab) ..........................................................3114.9 Wipers (standard cab)...............................................................................................3124.10 Wipers (high visibility cab).........................................................................................3144.11 Front instrument panel ..............................................................................................3124.12 Radio (version with standard cab).............................................................................3154.13 Radio (version with high-visibility cab) ......................................................................3154.14 Heater (standard cab) ...............................................................................................3164.15 Heater (high-visibility roof) ........................................................................................3174.16 Heating and air conditioning (standard cab) .............................................................3184.17 Heating and air conditioning (high-visibility roof).......................................................3194.18 Braking system - trailer braking.................................................................................3204.19 HML transmission .....................................................................................................3214.20 Electronic lift ..............................................................................................................3224.21 Rear and front PTOs .................................................................................................323

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

262

LAYOUTS, ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS, CONNECTOR POSITIONSEngine wiring ....................................................................................................................... 325Central wiring....................................................................................................................... 333Front light wiring (Version with cab) .................................................................................... 335FULLDRIVE wiring .............................................................................................................. 349Electronic lift wiring.............................................................................................................. 353

Standard cabRoof wiring........................................................................................................................... 359Worklights wiring ................................................................................................................. 367Screenwash pumps wiring................................................................................................... 373Windscreen wiper wiring...................................................................................................... 375Speaker wiring..................................................................................................................... 375Roof power supply wiring .................................................................................................... 381Heater wiring ....................................................................................................................... 387Air conditioning wiring.......................................................................................................... 393Air conditioning fan wiring.................................................................................................... 399

High-visibility roofRoof wiring........................................................................................................................... 403Worklights wiring ................................................................................................................. 409Screenwash pump wiring .................................................................................................... 413Windscreen wiper wiring...................................................................................................... 415Speaker and radio wiring..................................................................................................... 417Roof power supply wiring .................................................................................................... 423Heater wiring ....................................................................................................................... 429Air conditioning wiring.......................................................................................................... 435Air conditioning fan wiring.................................................................................................... 441

263

8

84Electrical system

Systems

THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT

For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:

1. Introduction

Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for troubleshootingand repairs, and the instruments required for troubleshooting.

2. Indices

Contains the indices arranged by connector name, by component code and by componentdescription.

3. Components

Contains the layouts of the connectors used in the electrical system, descriptions of thecomponents installed on the tractor, the technical data necessary for functional testing and thepinouts of the electronic control units.

4. Systems

Contains the electrical diagrams of the tractor’s systems.

5. Layouts, electrical wiring diagrams, connector positions

Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positioning of connectors on the tractor.

264

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT

6

42

2

2

Interruttore comandoPTO posteriore

E

BA

D

G

F

2X37Motorino d’avviamento

C

40

22

Interruttore comandoPTO posteriore

6

12

12

9

2.7659.108.0

2.9619.360.0

42

X10

2.7659.108.0 X10

X10 0.011.6955.4

X10

Interruttore comando PTO posteriore

0.01

1.69

55.4

0.011.6855.4

0.011.6855.4

X10

X10

How to consult the table

The quickest way to determine the cause of a malfunction of acomponent (e.g. the starter motor) is to check all the componentsin the system in which the component is incorporated.The example given on this page assumes a malfunction of thestarter motor, which fails to start the engine.1 -Look in paragraph «2.1. Component description index»

(figure A) for the starter motor and identify the systemin which it is incorporated.The system is indicated in the column «System (para4.xx)» and in this case is “2” (figure A).

2 - 2 -Consult paragraph «4.2 Starting» (figure B), in which allthe components in the system are indicated in the elec-trical diagram; these components are accompanied bynumbers that correspond to the key on the same page.

3 - 3 -Check all the components in the system, starting, forexample, with the switch “12”.

4 -Look in paragraph «2.1. Component description index»(figure A) for “Rear PTO control switch” and check inthe column «Technical description (para 3.2.xx)» ifthere is a technical description of the component (inthis case it is given at n° 42 of the paragraph «3.2Component technical data») (figure C). Make a note also of the name of the connector to which thecomponent is connected (in this case “X10”).

Only if the position of the component is not known5 - Look in paragraph «2.3 Connector index» (figure D) for

the name of the connector to which the component is con-nected (in this case “X10”) and note down the wiring loomin which it is incorporated (in this case “0.011.6955.4” or“0.011.6958.4”) and the type of connector (in this case“6”).

6 - 6 -Look for the wiring loom in chapter «Layouts, electri-cal wiring diagrams, connector positions» using themain index .

7 - 7 -Look for the name of the connector in the photos at-tached to the electrical diagrams and determine its posi-tion on the tractor from the drawing (figure E).NOTE.The electrical diagrams (figure F) contain the namesof the connectors and the descriptions used in all thetables in chapter 2.

8 - 8 -Using the data contained in the paragraph «3.2 Com-ponent technical data» (figure C) at position n° 42, checkthe operation of the switch. If the pinout of the connector is not known, look in paragraph«3.1 Connector layouts» (figure G) for the number foundin the column “Type” of paragraph «2.3 Connector index».

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

265

1. INTRODUCTIONThis section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to troubleshooting thetractor’s electrical and electronic systems.The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information about thetractor’s systems and components.Due to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in linewith our policy of continuous product improvement) and the corresponding amendment of ourprinted documentation, we are obliged to state that the data contained in this document aresubject to modification and as such are not binding.

1.1 LIST OF WIRING LOOMSI

DESCRIPTION NOTES CODE

Cab accessories wiring Standard roof 0.009.7851.4/40

POWERSHIFT lever wiring 0.011.7972.4

Roof power supply wiring Standard roof 0.009.7852.3/40

Roof power supply wiring High-visibility roof 0.011.3761.3/30

Speaker wiring Standard roof 0.011.0729.4/10

Speaker and radio wiring High-visibility roof 0.011.3596.3/30

Air conditioning wiring Standard roof 0.010.2130.1

Air conditioning wiring High-visibility roof 0.010.2562.1

Front light wiring Only with cab 0.010.5582.3/01

Central wiring 0.010.5303.4/60

Worklights line wiring High-visibility roof 0.011.3595.3/10

Engine wiring 0.009.7624.4/50

Electronic lift wiring 0.011.6943.4/10

Roof wiring Standard roof 0.009.7850.4/50

Roof wiring High-visibility roof 0.011.3606.4/51

Screenwash pump wiring High-visibility roof 0.011.3743.3

Screenwash pumps wiring Standard roof 0.009.7854.3/10

Heater wiring Standard roof 0.010.2123.2

Heater wiring High-visibility roof 0.010.2558.1

Windscreen wiper wiring Standard roof 0.010.4516.3/01

Windscreen wiper wiring High-visibility roof 0.011.3597.3/03

Air conditioning fan wiring Standard roof 0.009.7853.3/21

Air conditioning fan wiring High-visibility roof 0.011.3610.3/20

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

266

1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS

To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, listed below are definitions for some of the keyterms used in this unit.

Chapter “3.2 Component descriptions” contains the wiring diagrams for some switches andpushbuttons.The following symbols are used for clarity:

1.3 GENERAL RULESThe inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair operations are essential to ensurethat the tractor continues to operate correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions andbreakdowns.The scope of this paragraph is to describe repair procedures and to help improve the qualityof repairs.

1.3.1MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTOR’S ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CIRCUITSThe manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for theconnection of any non-approved electrical equipment or components.In particular, if it is discovered that the electrical system or a component has been modifiedwithout authorisation, the Manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicleand the vehicle warranty will be invalidated.

1.3.2MAIN WIRING FAULTSa. Poor contact between connectors

The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the maleinto the female connector, deformation of one or both connectors, and corrosion oroxidisation of the pin contact surfaces.

TERM DESCRIPTION

Connector Element used to connect two components (e.g. wiring-switch,wiring-wiring)

Temperaturesensor

Electrical component that converts the temperature of a medium(air, water, oil, etc.) into a voltage or resistance

Pressure sensor

Electrical component that converts the pressure of a medium (air,water, etc.) into a voltage or resistance

Position sensor

Electrical component that converts the angular or linear position ofan object into a voltage

Pressureswitch

Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according tothe operating pressure in the circuit in which it is installed

Thermostat Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according tothe temperature of the medium in which it is immersed.

Switch Mechanical component that opens or closes one or more electricalcontacts.

Solenoid valve Valve operated by applying electrical current to a coil (or solenoid)

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

Contact between pins CLOSED (stable switch position)

Contact between pins CLOSED (non-stable switch position)

LED warning light

Warning light

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

267

b. Welding or crimping of defective pinsThe pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or weldedarea, but the wires are subjected to excessive tension, leading to breakage of theinsulation or the wire itself and a poor connection.

c. Disconnecting wiringIf components are disconnected by pulling on the wires, or if components are removedwith the wires still connected, or if the wiring is subject to a heavy impact this coulddamage the connections at the pins, breaking strands of wire.

d. Penetration of water in connectorsThe connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however,it is possible that when the tractor is cleaned using high-pressure water or steam, watercould penetrate or condense in the connectors.As the connectors are designed to prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get inwill not be able to drain out, and thus may cause shortcircuits across the pins.For this reason it is good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet ofcompressed air after washing the tractor.

e. Oil or dirt on connectorsOil or grease on the connectors or pins can create a poor contact (oil and grease are non-conductors). Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low pressure jet ofcompressed air and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degrease thecontacts.

� Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them.� Use dehydrated but not lubricated compressed air.

1.3.3REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF CONNECTORS AND WIRING

a. Disconnection of connectorsWhen disconnecting wiring, pull on the connectors rather than on the wires themselves.For connectors that are held in position with screws or levers, fully loosen the screws,then pull on the connector. For connectors that are clipped together, fully depress theclip then pull the connector apart. After disconnecting connectors, cover them in awaterproof material to prevent dirt or moisture getting into the contacts.

b. Connecting the connectorsCheck the condition of the connectors:• Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil.• Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded.• Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split.� If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the

casing, clean it as described in paragraph 1.3.2.� If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one.When connecting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying anyforce.For connectors with clips, insert the two halves until they clip together.

c. Cleaning and drying wiringWhen wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, ifnecessary, with water or steam.If the wiring has to be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on theconnectors; if water penetrates the connector, proceed as described in paragraph 1.3.2.� Check that the connector is not short circuited by humidity by testing the continuity

across the pins.

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

268

� After checking the connector is good condition, degrease the contacts using adeoxidising product.

d. Renewal of damaged electrical components.• When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts

supplied by the manufacturer.• When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 standards

and in particular:- fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2- bayonet fuse (F2, F3, etc.) DIN 72581/3CThe fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards willinvalidate the warranty with immediate effect and release the manufacturer fromany liability.

• When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standardsmarked on the original relay.

1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS

For the correct diagnosis of any faults in tne tractor’s electrical system, the followinginstruments are required:1 - Digital multimeter with the following minimum characteristics:

AC VOLT 0-600DC VOLT 0-600OHM 0-32MAC AMP 0-10DC AMP 0-10

2 - All Round Tester

1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES

COLOUR CODES COLOUR CODES

A Light blue M Brown

B White N Black

C Orange R Red

G Yellow S Pink

H Grey V Green

L Dark blue Z Purple

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

269

2. INDICES

2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX

Component description Componentcode

Tech.descr.(Chap. 3.2.x)

Connector System(Chap. 4.xx)

Cigar lighter 2.7099.770.0 X2 6-7-8

Alternator ISKRA 65A 2.9439.420.0 X65 2

Alternator ISKRA 85A 2.9439.460.0/10 X65 2

Heating alternator ISKRA 70A 2.9439.440.0/10 X109/B+/B- 14-15-16-17

RH speaker X133 12-13

LH speaker X132 12-13

Radio X86-X131 12-13

Horn 2.8419.003.0 X61 3-4-5

Glowplug 01175757 X57 2

Preheating control unit 01178976 X43 2

Rear lift control unit 0.011.2992.4/20 X71 6-7-8-20

Hazard lights control unit 2.8639.007.0 X40 3-4-5

HML control unit 0.010.8869.4/20 X72 19

Heater settings control unit 0.007.6766.4 X136 14-15-16-17

Fan speed selector switch 0.009.4743.1 X139 14-16

Fan speed selector switch 0.010.2528.1 X154 15-17

Air conditioning compressor 0.009.7660.4 X59 16-17

Compressor for driver’s seat air suspension 0.007.6273.4 X12 6-7-8

Diagnostics connector X42 6-7-8-20

Analogue instrument panel 2.8339.212.0/10 X3 2-3-4-5-11-18-19-21

Digital instrument panel 2.8339.153.0/30 X3 2-3-4-5-11-18-19-21

Lights selector switch 0.009.6491.4 39 X36 3-4-5-6-7-8

Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF) 2.3729.240.0/10 8 X16 19

4WD control solenoid valve 2.3729.240.0/10 9 X15 19

High range control solenoid valve (HI) 2.3729.240.0/10 11 H 19

Low range control solenoid valve (LO) 2.3729.240.0/10 12 L 19

Preheating control solenoid valve 01179366 X58 2

Rear PTO control solenoid valve(PTO) 2.3729.240.0/10 10 X17 21

Lift lowering solenoid valve 2.3729.460.0 EV DW 20

Front PTO solenoid valve 2.3729.400.0 X63 21

Lift raising solenoid valve 2.3729.460.0 EV UP 20

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

270

Front right headlamp 2.8019.970.0 X13 3

Front left headlamp 2.8019.960.0 X27 3

Front right worklight 2.8029.730.0 X124 4-5

Front left worklight 2.8029.730.0 X121 4-5

Rear right worklight 2.8029.730.0 X123 4-5

Rear left worklight 2.8029.730.0 X122 4-5

Number plate light 2.8029.240.0/10 X28 3-4-5

Front right lights 2.8029.820.0/30 X64 3-4-5

Front left lights 2.8029.830.0/30 X62 3-4-5

Front right sidelight and direction indicator 04411920.4 X13 4-5

Front left sidelight and direction indicator 04411921.4 X27 4-5

Rear right light 2.8019.190.0 X14 3-4-5-18

Left rear light 2.8019.180.0 X29 3-4-5-18

Rear worklight(platform version) 2.8029.300.0 X22 3

Roof wiring fuse (40 Amp) X104 5-8-10

Starter switch 2.7659.127.0 28 X322-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-14-15-16-17-18-19-20-21

Air conditioning control switch 0.010.2560.1 X158 17

Diff lock control switch 2.7659.163.0 32 X9 19

4WD control switch 0.007.5945.0/20 34 X8 19

Rotating beacon control switch 2.7659.159.0 31 X96 8

Rotating beacon control switch 2.7659.126.0 X81 7

Front worklights switch 2.7659.154.0 30 X100 5

Front worklights switch 2.7659.078.0 X85 4

Rear worklights switch 2.7659.155.0 29 X99 5

Rear worklights switch 2.7659.079.0 X78 4

Front screen washer switch 2.7659.223.0 24 X80 10

Front screen washer switch 2.7659.091.0 X80 9

Rear PTO control switch 2.7659.108.0/10 36 X10 2-21

Front PTO control switch 2.7659.108.0/10 35 X35 21

Front wiper control switch 2.7659.092.0 25 X84 9




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

271

Front wiper control switch 2.7659.224.0 38 X98 10

Rear wiper control switch 2.7659.146.0 26 X79 9

Rear wiper control switch 2.7659.192.0 37 X97 10

Start enable switch 2.7659.097.0 X31 2

Handbrake switch 2.7659.129.0 17 X24 18

Hazard warning lights switch 2.7659.110.0 27 X33 3-4-5

Rear worklights switch (Not utilised) X34 3

Brake pedal switch 2.7659.097.0 X5 18

Flashing light X127 7-8

Windscreen wiper motor 04413192 X130 9-10

Rear screen wiper motor 2.9019.100.0/20 X125 9

Rear screen wiper motor 2.9019.180.0 X125 10

Starter motor 01180928 X37-X38 2

Clock 2.9389.002.0 X83 7-8

Interior roof light 2.8339.032.0 X74 7-8

Fuel pump X41 2

Front screen washer pump 0.9241.566.1 X129 9-10

Rear screen washer pump 0.9241.566.1 X135 9-10

Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer 0.011.2990.0 3 H1 20

Lift position adjustment potentiometer 0.011.2990.0 4 P1 20

Potentiometer adjustment heading 0.98707.67.3 X138-X145 14-15-16-17

Draft/wheelslip adjustment potentiometer 0.011.2990.0 5 M1 20

Lift lowering speed adjustment potentiometer 0.011.2990.0 6 V 20

Outlet socket (in cab) 2.6039.017.0 X11 6-7-8

Trailer socket(For lights and auxiliary power)

X26 3-4-5-18

Air conditioning pressure switch 0.010.2140.0 X118-X120 16

Air conditioning pressure switch 0.010.2262.0 X116 17

Trailer braking low pressure switch 2.7099.430.0 X25 18

Hydraulic oil low pressure switch 2.7099.660.0/10 15 X20 11

Pressure switch- hydraulic oil filter clogging X19 11

Engine oil pressure switch 01181549 16 X55 11

Engine governor reset button 2.7659.139.0 18 X45 11




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

272

Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton 2.7659.182.0 22 DW 20

HML control pushbutton 0.010.5330.4 M 19

Preheating control pushbutton 2.7659.140.0 21 X67 2

Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton 2.7659.182.0 23 UP 20

Rear lift control pushbutton 0.011.7720.0/10 33 C - I 20

Selection pushbutton 2.7659.140.0 19 X52 11

Display pushbutton 2.7659.173.0 20 X44 11

Relay - cab roof wiring X103 4-5-7-8-9-10-14-15-16-17

Relay -1st heater fan and air conditioning on X156 17

Relay - 3rd heater fan vspeed X157 15-17

Relay - air conditioning X143 16

Relay - alternator excitation X142-X147 14-15-16-17

Relay - maximum fan speed X146 15-17

Relay - heat exchanger fan X115 16-17

Relay - supplementary heat exchanger fan X114 17

Relay RL1 RL1 2

Relay RL2 RL2 2

Heater unit resistance X106 14-15-16-17

Resistor - right heater fan 0.010.2555.0 X149 15-17

Resistor - heater fan 0.010.2122.0 X140 14-16

Resistor - left heater fan 0.010.2555.0 X148 15-17

Air cleaner clogged sensor 2.7099.320.0/10 14 X60 11

Fuel level sensor 2.7059.998.0 13 X23 11

Brake fluid level sensor X66 18

Rear lift position sensor 0.009.2194.4 1 P2 20

Lift draft sensor 0.011.2164.0/10 2 S1 20

Heating air temperature sensor 0.010.2124.1 X137 14-15-16-17

Coolant temperature sensor 01177090 X54 11

Transmission speed sensor 0.008.1646.0 7 X50 11

PTO engagement sensor 2.7659.097.0 S 21

1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor 2.7659.131.0 1 21

540 rpm PTO engagement sensor 2.7659.131.0 5 21

750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor 2.7659.131.0 E 21

Intermittent windscreen wiper interval timer 2.8639.008.0 X82 9-10




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

273

Antifrost thermostat 0.009.4744.1 X144 16

Air conditioning thermostat 0.010.2522.0 X159 17

Right heater fan 0.011.2047.4 X153 15

Right heater fan 0.011.8858.4 X153 17

Heater fan 0.010.2121.1 X141 14-16

Air conditioning heat exchanger fan 0.010.0618.4 X119 16

Air conditioning heat exchanger fan 0.010.2545.2 X117a 17

Left heater fan 0.011.2047.4 X151 15

Left heater fan 0.011.8858.4 X151 17

Supplementary air conditioning heatexchanger fan 0.010.2545.2 X117b 17




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

274

2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX

Code Description



0.007.5945.0/20 4WD control switch 34 X8 19

0.007.6273.4 Compressor for driver’s seat air suspension X12 6-7-8

0.007.6766.4 Heater settings control unit X136 14-15-16-17

0.008.1646.0 Transmission speed sensor 7 X50 11

0.009.2194.4 Rear lift position sensor 1 P2 20

0.009.4743.1 Fan speed selector switch X139 14-16

0.009.4744.1 Antifrost thermostat X144 16

0.009.6491.4 Lights selector switch 39 X36 3-4-5-6-7-8

0.009.7660.4 Air conditioning compressor X59 16-17

0.010.0618.4 Air conditioning heat exchanger fan X119 16

0.010.2121.1 Heater fan X141 14-16

0.010.2122.0 Resistor - heater fan X140 14-16

0.010.2124.1 Heating air temperature sensor X137 14-15-16-17

0.010.2140.0 Air conditioning pressure switch X118-X120 16

0.010.2262.0 Air conditioning pressure switch X116 17

0.010.2522.0 Air conditioning thermostat X159 17

0.010.2528.1 Fan speed selector switch X154 15-17

0.010.2545.2 Air conditioning heat exchanger fan X117a 17

0.010.2545.2 Supplementary air conditioning heat exchanger fan X117b 17

0.010.2555.0 Resistor - right heater fan X149 15-17

0.010.2555.0 Resistor - left heater fan X148 15-17

0.010.2560.1 Air conditioning control switch X158 17

0.010.5330.4 HML control pushbutton M 19

0.010.8869.4/20 HML control unit X72 19

0.011.2047.4 Right heater fan X153 15

0.011.2047.4 Left heater fan X151 15

0.011.2164.0/10 Lift draft sensor 2 S1 20

0.011.2990.0 Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer 3 H1 20

0.011.2990.0 Lift position adjustment potentiometer 4 P1 20

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

275

0.011.2990.0 Draft/wheelslip adjustmentpotentiometer 5 M1 20

0.011.2990.0 Lift lowering speed adjustmentpotentiometer 6 V 20

0.011.2992.4/20 Rear lift control unit X71 6-7-8-20

0.011.7720.0/10 Rear lift control pushbutton 33 C - I 20

0.011.8858.4 Right heater fan X153 17

0.011.8858.4 Left heater fan X151 17

0.9241.566.1 Front screen washer pump X129 9-10

0.9241.566.1 Rear screen washer pump X135 9-10

0.98707.67.3 Potentiometer adjustment heading X138-X145 14-15-16-17

01175757 Glowplug X57 2

01177090 Coolant temperature sensor X54 11

01178976 Preheating control unit X43 2

01179366 Preheating control solenoid valve X58 2

01180928 Starter motor X37-X38 2

01181549 Engine oil pressure switch 16 X55 11

04411920.4 Front right sidelight and direction indicator X13 4-5

04411921.4 Front left sidelight and direction indicator X27 4-5

04413192 Windscreen wiper motor X130 9-10

2.3729.240.0/10 Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF) 8 X16 19

2.3729.240.0/10 4WD control solenoid valve 9 X15 19

2.3729.240.0/10 Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO) 10 X17 21

2.3729.240.0/10 High range control solenoid valve (HI) 11 H 19

2.3729.240.0/10 Low range control solenoid valve (LO) 12 L 19

2.3729.400.0 Front PTO solenoid valve X63 21

2.3729.460.0 Lift lowering solenoid valve EV DW 20

2.3729.460.0 Lift raising solenoid valve EV UP 20

2.6039.017.0 Outlet socket (in cab) X11 6-7-8

2.7059.998.0 Fuel level sensor 13 X23 11

2.7099.320.0/10 Air cleaner clogged sensor 14 X60 11

Code Description



Systems

Electrical system

8

84

276

2.7099.430.0 Trailer braking low pressure switch X25 18

2.7099.660.0/10 Hydraulic oil low pressure switch 15 X20 11

2.7099.770.0 Cigar lighter X2 6-7-8

2.7659.078.0 Front worklights control switch X85 4

2.7659.079.0 Rear worklights control switch X78 4

2.7659.091.0 Front screen washer control switch X80 9

2.7659.092.0 Front wiper control switch 25 X84 9

2.7659.097.0 Start enable switch X31 2

2.7659.097.0 Brake pedal switch X5 18

2.7659.097.0 PTO engagement sensor S 21

2.7659.108.0/10 Front PTO control switch 35 X35 21

2.7659.108.0/10 Rear PTO control switch 36 X10 2-21

2.7659.110.0 Hazard warning lights switch 27 X33 3-4-5

2.7659.126.0 Rotating beacon control switch X81 7

2.7659.127.0 Starter switch 28 X322-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-14-15-1617-18-19-20-21

2.7659.129.0 Handbrake switch 17 X24 18

2.7659.131.0 1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor 1 21

2.7659.131.0 540 rpm PTO engagement sensor 5 21

2.7659.131.0 750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor E 21

2.7659.139.0 Engine governor reset button 18 X45 11

2.7659.140.0 Selection pushbutton 19 X52 11

2.7659.140.0 Preheating control pushbutton 21 X67 2

2.7659.146.0 Rear wiper control switch 26 X79 9

2.7659.154.0 Front worklights control switch 30 X100 5

2.7659.155.0 Rear worklights control switch 29 X99 5

2.7659.159.0 Rotating beacon control switch 31 X96 8

2.7659.163.0 Diff lock control switch 32 X9 19

2.7659.173.0 Display pushbutton 20 X44 11

2.7659.182.0 Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton 22 DW 20

Code Description



Systems

Electrical system

8

84

277

2.7659.182.0 Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton 23 UP 20

2.7659.192.0 Rear wiper control switch 37 X97 10

2.7659.223.0 Front screen washer control switch 24 X80 10

2.7659.224.0 Front wiper control switch 38 X98 10

2.8019.180.0 Rear left light X29 3-4-5-18

2.8019.190.0 Rear right light X14 3-4-5-18

2.8019.960.0 Front left light X27 3

2.8019.970.0 Front right light X13 3

2.8029.240.0/10 Number plate light X28 3-4-5

2.8029.300.0 Rear worklight(platform version) X22 3

2.8029.730.0 Front right worklight X124 4-5

2.8029.730.0 Front left worklight X121 4-5

2.8029.730.0 Rear right worklight X123 4-5

2.8029.730.0 Rear left worklight X122 4-5

2.8029.820.0/30 Front right light X64 3-4-5

2.8029.830.0/30 Front left light X62 3-4-5

2.8339.032.0 Interior roof light X74 7-8

2.8339.153.0/30 Digital instrument panel X3 2-3-4-5-11-18-19-21

2.8339.212.0/10 Analogue instrument panel X3 2-3-4-5-11-18-19-21

2.8419.003.0 Horn X61 3-4-5

2.8639.007.0 Hazard lights control unit X40 3-4-5

2.8639.008.0 Intermittent windscreen wiper interval timer X82 9-10

2.9019.100.0/20 Rear screen wiper motor X125 9

2.9019.180.0 Rear screen wiper motor X125 10

2.9389.002.0 Clock X83 7-8

2.9439.420.0 Alternator ISKRA 65A X65 2

2.9439.440.0/10 Heating alternator ISKRA 70A X109/B+/B- 14-15-16-17

2.9439.460.0/10 Alternator ISKRA 65A X65 2

Code Description



Systems

Electrical system

8

84

278

2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX

Connector Type Wiring codeConnection

wiring or component code

Component description

1 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.131.0 1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor

5 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.131.0 540 rpm PTO engagement sensor

B-0.009.7852.3

2.9439.440.0/10 Heating alternator ISKRA 70A0.011.3761.3

B+0.009.7852.3


C 0.011.6943.4 0.011.7720.0/10 Rear lift control pushbutton

DW 3 0.011.6943.4 2.7659.182.0 Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton

E 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.131.0 750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor

EV DW 2 0.011.6943.4 2.3729.460.0 Lift lowering solenoid valve

EV UP 2 0.011.6943.4 2.3729.460.0 Lift raising solenoid valve

H1 3 0.011.6943.4 0.011.2990.0 Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer

H 2 0.011.7972.4 2.3729.240.0/10 High range control solenoid valve (HI

I 0.011.6943.4 0.011.7720.0/10 Rear lift control pushbutton

L 2 0.011.7972.4 2.3729.240.0/10 Low range control solenoid valve (LO)

M1 3 0.011.6943.4 0.011.2990.0 Draft/wheelslip adjustment potentiometer

M 3 0.011.7972.4 0.010.5330.4 HML control pushbutton

P1 3 0.011.6943.4 0.011.2990.0 Lift position adjustment potentiometer

P2 3 0.011.6943.4 0.009.2194.4 Rear lift position sensor

RL1 0.010.5303.4 Relay RL1

RL2 0.010.5303.4 Relay RL2

S1 3 0.011.6943.4 0.011.2164.0/10 Lift draft sensor

S 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.097.0 PTO engagement sensor

UP 3 0.011.6943.4 2.7659.182.0 Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton

V 3 0.011.6943.4 0.011.2990.0 Lift lowering speed adjustment potentiometer

X1 1 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5303.4

X2 0.010.5303.4 2.7099.770.0 Cigar lighter

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

279

X3 7 0.010.5303.4 2.8339.153.0/30 Digital instrument panel

X4 9 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5582.3

X5 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.097.0 Brake pedal switch

X6 8 0.010.5303.4 0.011.7972.4

X7 4 0.010.5303.4 0.011.6943.4

X8 6 0.010.5303.4 0.007.5945.0/20 Four-wheel drive control switch

X9 6 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.163.0 Diff lock control switch

X10 6 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.108.0/10 PTO control switch

X11 0.010.5303.4 2.6039.017.0 Outlet socket (in cab)

X12 0.010.5303.4 0.007.6766.4 Compressor for driver’s seat air suspension

X130.010.5582.3 04411920.4 Front right sidelight and

direction indicator

0.010.5303.4 2.8019.970.0 Front right headlamp

X14 0.010.5303.4 2.8019.190.0 Rear right light

X15 2 0.010.5303.4 2.3729.240.0/10 4WD control solenoid valve

X16 2 0.010.5303.4 2.3729.240.0/10 Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF)

X17 2 0.010.5303.4 2.3729.240.0/10 Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO)

X18 0.010.5303.4 Connector for joint

X19 0.010.5303.4 Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter clogging

X20 0.010.5303.4 2.7099.660.0/10 Hydraulic oil low pressure switch

X21 0.010.5303.4 Connector for joint

X22 0.010.5303.4 2.8029.300.0 Rear worklight(platform version

X23 4 0.010.5303.4 2.7059.998.0 Fuel level sensor

X24 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.129.0 Handbrake switch

X25 2 0.010.5303.4 2.7099.430.0 Trailer braking low pressure switch

X26 0.010.5303.4 Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power)

X270.010.5582.3 04411921.4 Front left sidelight and direction

indicator

0.010.5303.4 2.8019.960.0 Front left headlamp




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

280

X28 0.010.5303.4 2.8029.240.0/10 Number plate light

X29 0.010.5303.4 2.8019.180.0 Left rear light

X31 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.097.0 Start enable switch

X32 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.127.0 Starter switch

X33 6 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.110.0 Hazard warning lights switch

X34 6 0.010.5303.4 Rear worklights switch(Not utilised)

X35 6 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.108.0/10 Front PTO control switch

X36 5 0.010.5303.4 0.009.6491.4 Lights selector switch

X37

0.010.5302.40.009.7852.30.011.3761.30.010.5303.4

01180928 Starter motor

X38 0.010.5302.40.010.5303.4 01180928 Starter motor

X39 2 0.010.5303.40.009.7852.3

0.011.3761.3

X40 0.010.5303.4 2.8639.007.0 Hazard lights control unit

X41 0.010.5302.4 Fuel pump

X42 3 0.010.5303.4 Diagnostics connector

X43 10 0.010.5303.4 01178976 Preheating control unit

X44 6 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.173.0 Display pushbutton

X45 6 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.139.0 Engine governor reset button

X50 11 0.010.5303.4 0.008.1646.0 Transmission speed sensor

X52 3 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.140.0 Selection pushbutton

X54 0.010.5302.4 01177090 Coolant temperature sensor

X55 0.010.5302.4 01181549 Engine oil pressure switch

X57 0.010.5302.4 01175757 Glowplug

X58 0.010.5302.4 01179366 Preheating control solenoid valve

X59 0.010.5302.4 0.007.7660.4 Air conditioning compressor

X60 0.010.5302.4 2.7099.320.0/10 Air cleaner clogged sensor

X61 0.010.5302.4 2.8419.003.0 Horn

X62 0.010.5302.4 2.8029.830.0/30 Front left lights

X63 2 0.010.5302.4 2.3729.400.0 Front PTO solenoid valve




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

281

X64 0.010.5302.4 2.8029.820.0/30 Front right lights

X65 0.010.5302.42.9439.420.0 Alternator ISKRA 65A

2.9439.460.0/10 Alternator ISKRA 85A

X66 0.010.5302.4 Brake fluid level sensor

X67 3 0.010.5303.4 2.7659.140.0 Preheating control pushbutton

X71 0.011.6943.4 0.011.2992.4/20 Rear lift control unit

X72 14 0.011.7972.4 0.010.8869.4/20 HML control unit

X740.009.7850.4

2.8339.032.0 Interior roof light0.011.3606.4

X750.009.7850.4 0.009.7854.3

0.011.3606.4 0.011.3743.3

X76 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7853.3

X77 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7851.4

X78 0.009.7850.4 2.7659.079.0 Rear worklights switch

X79 0.009.7850.4 2.7659.146.0 Rear screen washer switch

X800.009.7850.4 2.7659.091.0 Front screen washer switch

0.011.3606.4 2.7659.223.0

X81 0.009.7850.4 2.7659.126.0 Rotating beacon control switch

X820.009.7850.4

2.8639.008.0Intermittent windscreen wiper intervaltimer

0.011.3606.4

X830.009.7850.4

2.9389.002.0 Clock0.011.3596.3

X84 0.009.7850.4 2.7659.092.0 Front screen washer switch

X85 0.009.7850.4 2.7659.078.0 Rear worklights switch

X860.009.7850.4

Radio0.011.3596.3

X87 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7852.3

X88 0.009.7850.4 0.010.4516.3




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

282

X89 0.009.7850.40.010.2123.2

0.010.2130.1

X90 0.009.7850.4 0.010.2130.1

X91 0.011.3761.3 0.011.3606.4

X92 12 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3597.3

X93 0.011.3606.40.010.2558.1

0.010.2562.1

X94 0.011.3606.4 0.010.2562.1

X95 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3595.3

X96 0.011.3606.4 2.7659.159.0 Rotating beacon control switch

X97 0.011.3606.4 2.7659.192.0 Rear wiper control switch

X98 0.011.3606.4 2.7659.224.0 Winscreen wiper control switch

X99 0.011.3606.4 2.7659.155.0 Rear worklights control switch

X100 0.011.3606.4 2.7659.154.0 Front worklights control switch

X101 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3596.3

X102 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3610.3

X1030.009.7850.4

Relay - cab roof wiring0.011.3606.4

X103-300.009.7852.3 0.009.7850.4

0.011.3761.3 0.011.3606.4

X104 0.011.3606.4 Roof wiring fuse(40 Amp)

X1060.009.7852.3

Heater unit resistance0.011.3761.3

X107 0.009.7852.30.010.2123.2

0.010.2130.1

X108 20.009.7852.3

Connector for joint0.011.3761.3

X1090.009.7852.3





Systems

Electrical system

8

84

283

X1110.009.7852.3


X113 4 0.011.3761.30.010.2558.1

0.010.2562.1

X114 0.011.3610.3 Relay - supplementary heat exchangerfan

X1150.009.7853.3

Relay - heat exchanger fan0.011.3610.3

X116 13 0.011.3610.3 0.010.2262.0 Air conditioning pressure switch

X117a 15 0.011.3610.3 0.010.2545.2 Air conditioning heat exchanger fan

X117b 15 0.011.3610.3 0.010.2545.2 Supplementary air conditioning heatexchanger fan

X118 3 0.009.7853.3 0.010.2140.0 Air conditioning pressure switch

X119 0.009.7853.3 0.010.0618.4 Air conditioning heat exchanger fan

X120 0.009.7853.3 0.010.2140.0 Air conditioning pressure switch

X1210.009.7851.4

2.8029.730.0 Front left worklight0.011.3595.3

X1220.009.7851.4

2.8029.730.0 Rear left worklight0.011.3595.3

X1230.009.7851.4

2.8029.730.0 Rear right worklight0.011.3595.3

X1240.009.7851.4

2.8029.730.0 Front right worklight0.011.3595.3

X1250.009.7851.4 2.9019.100.0/20

Rear screen wiper motor0.011.3596.3 2.9019.180.0

X1260.009.7851.4


X1270.009.7851.4

Flashing light0.011.3596.3

X1290.009.7854.3

0.9241.566.1 Front screen washer pump0.011.3743.3

X1300.010.4516.3

04413192 Front screen wiper motor0.011.3597.3




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

284

X1310.011.0729.4

Radio0.011.3596.3

X1320.011.0729.4

Left speaker0.011.3596.3

X1330.011.0729.4

Right speaker0.011.3596.3

X1350.009.7854.3

0.9241.566.1 Rear screen washer pump0.011.3743.3

X136

0.010.2123.2

0.007.6766.4 Heater settings control unit0.010.2130.1

010.2558.1

0.010.2562.1

X137

0.010.2123.2

0.010.2124.1 Heating air temperature sensor0.010.2130.1

010.2558.1

0.010.2562.1

X1380.010.2123.2

0.98707.67.3 Potentiometer adjustment heading0.010.2130.1

X1390.010.2123.2

0.009.4743.1 Fan speed selector switch0.010.2130.1

X1400.010.2123.2

0.010.2122.0 Resistor - heater fan0.010.2130.1

X1410.010.2123.2

0.010.2121.1 Heater fan0.010.2130.1

X1420.010.2123.2

Relay - alternator excitation0.010.2130.1

X143 0.010.2130.1 Relay - air conditioning

X144 0.010.2130.1 0.009.4744.0 Antifrost thermostat

X145010.2558.1

0.98707.67.3 Potentiometer adjustment heading0.010.2562.1

X146010.2558.1

Relay - maximum fan speed0.010.2562.1




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

285

X147010.2558.1

Relay - alternator excitation0.010.2562.1

X148010.2558.1

0.010.2555.0 Resistor - left heater fan0.010.2562.1

X149010.2558.1

0.010.2555.0 Resistor - right heater fan0.010.2562.1

X150010.2558.1


X151010.2558.1 0.011.2047.4

Left heater fan0.010.2562.1 0.011.8858.4

X152010.2558.1


X153010.2558.1 0.011.2047.4

Right heater fan0.010.2562.1 0.011.8858.4

X154010.2558.1

0.010.2528.1 Fan speed selector switch0.010.2562.1

X156 0.010.2562.1 Relay -1st heater fan and air conditioning on

X157010.2558.1 Relay - 3rd heater fan

speed0.010.2562.1

X158 0.010.2562.1 0.010.2560.1 Air conditioning control switch

X159 0.010.2562.1 0.010.2522.0 Air conditioning thermostat




Systems

Electrical system

8

84

286

3. COMPONENTSThis chapter contains:

1 - Connectors table: the shapes and pinouts of the connectors2 - Components table: technical and functional description of the components3 - Pinouts of the electronic control units

3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS

26

1

9

26

21

15

4

14

29

25

20

3

8

21

29

25

20

14

8

31

4

9

15

1

1 2

2

31 2

3

1 2

3 4

4 3 2 1

4

3 2 1

6 5 4

9 8 7

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

5

4

7

6

53

2

16

18

36

9

27

28

19

10

1

7

6

3

2

14

5

8

7

8

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

287

45

67

832

1

45

67

8 32

1

6

3

2

14

5

87

6

3

2

14

5

8

7

9 10 1

917

10

321

11

1

2

4

3

1

2

4

3

12

41

36

213

12

76

1

14

BA

A B

15

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

288

3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA

N° Description Code Characteristics Notes Connector

1 Rear lift position sensor 0.009.2194.4

Pin1 = earthPin2 = output signalPin3 = 10Vdc power0.2Vdc output (sensor not engaged)8.3 Vdc(Sensor fully pressed)

P2

2 Lift draft sensor 0.011.2164.0

Pin1 = earthPin2 = analogue signalPin3 = 10V powerSignal with sensor disconnected from the tractor between pins 1 and 2:~5 V

S1

3Max. lift heightad jus tmentpotentiometer

0.011.2990.0

Resistance between pin1 and pin 3:~4.7 kOhmResistance between pin1 and pin 2:0÷4.7 kOhm

H1

4 Lift position adjustmentpotentiometer 0.011.2990.0


P1

5Dra f t /whee ls l i pad jus tmentpotentiometer

0.011.2990.0


M1

6Max. lift heightad jus tmentpotentiometer

0.011.2990.0


V

7 Transmission speed sensor 008.1646.0 Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:

~1000 Ohm at 20°C X50

8 Diff lock control solenoidvalve (DF) 2.3729.240.0 Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:

~ 8 Ohm at 20°C X16

9 4WD control solenoidvalve 2.3729.240.0 Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:

~ 8 Ohm at 20°C X15

10 Rear PTO cont ro lsolenoid valve (PTO) 2.3729.240.0 Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:

~ 8 Ohm at 20°C X17

11 H igh range cont ro lsolenoid valve (HI) 2.3729.240.0 Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:

~ 8 Ohm at 20°C H

12 Low range cont ro lsolenoid valve (LO) 2.3729.240.0 Resistance between pin1 and pin 2:

~ 8 Ohm at 20°C L

13 Fuel level sensor 2.7059.998.0

Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3:___ Ohm (Tank full ___ mm)___ Ohm (Tank half full ___ mm)___ Ohm (Tank empty ___ mm)Illumination reserve warning light(Closes contact between pins 1 and 3):at _____ mm from tank empty signal

X23

14 A i r c leaner c logg ingsensor 2.7099.320.0 Normally open contact X60

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

289

15 Hydrau l i c o i l l owpressure switch 2.7099.660.0 Normally open contact X20

16 Engine oil pressure switch 01181549 Normally closed contact X55

17 Handbrake switch 2.7659.129.0 Normally closed contact(Handbrake on) X24

18 Engine governor resetbutton 2.7659.139.0 Normally open contact X45

19 Tyre s i ze se lec t ionpushbutton 2.7659.140.0 Normally open contact X52

20 Engine governor displaypushbutton 2.7659.173.0 Normally open contact X73

21 Preheating control push-button 2.7659.177.0

Normally open contact (NO)resistance with contact closed 3.9Ohm

X67

22 Rear lift "lower" controlpushbutton 2.7659.182.0


DW

23 Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton 2.7659.182.0


UP

24 Front screen washercontrol switch 2.7659.223.0 Normally open contact between

contacts 2 and 3. 32

N° Description Code Characteristics Notes Connector

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

290

N° Description Code Characteristics Connector

25 Winscreen wipercontrol switch 2.7659.092.0 X84

26 Rear wiper control switch 2.7659.146.0 X79

27 Hazard warning lightsswitch 2.7659.110.0 X33

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

0

1

2

PosPin

0

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

2

PosPin

0

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

2

0

1

2

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

01

30

4949a

L R

1530

b

PosPin

0

15 49 L 49a R30

1

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

291

28 Starter switch 2.7659.127.0 X32

29 Rear worklights controlswitch 2.7659.155.0 X99

30 Front worklights controlswitch 2.7659.154.0 X100


01

30

15

50

30/1

19

17

2

P

PosPin

P

15 30/1 50 19 30 17

0

1

2

123 87 4 5 6

0

1

PosPin

0

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

123 87 4 5 6

0

1

PosPin

0

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

292

31 Rotating beacon controlswitch 2.7659.159.0 X96

32 Diff lock control switch 2.7659.163.0 X9

33 Rear l i f t con t ro lpushbutton 0.011.7720.0 C - I


123 87 4 5 6

0

1

PosPin

0

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

1

01

3

45

6 7

12

PosPin

0

1 2 3 4 6 7

1

12

34

5

PosPin 1 2 3 4 5

1

2

0

201

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

293

34 4WD control switch 007.5945.0 X8

35 Rear PTO control switch 2.7659.108.0 X10

36 Front PTO control switch 2.7659.108.0 X35


01

30

4949a

L R

1530

b

PosPin

0

15 49 30 30b L R

1

01

30

4949a

L R

1530

bPos

Pin

0

15 49 30 30b L R

1

01

30

4949a

L R

1530

b

PosPin

0

15 49 30 30b L R

1

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

294

37 Rear wiper control switch 2.7659.192.0 X97

38 Winscreen wipercontrol switch 2.7659.224.0 X98

39 Lights selector switch 0.009.6491.4 X36


123 87 4 5 6

012

PosPin

0

1 2 3 5 6

1

2

PosPin

0

1 2 3 5 6

1

2

123 87 4 5 6

012

PosPin

Freccia sx

71 5 82 3 4 6

Freccia dx

Clacson

9

Lampeggio

Luci diposizione

Lucianabbagl.

Luciabbagl.

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

295

40 PTO engagement pushbutton 2.7659.142.0 X10


01

C

S

31 S1

1

PosPin

0

S1 S 31 C

1

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

296

3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

3.3.1 HML CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR X72

Pin Volts. Abbreviation Description

1 0V Battery negative

2 "M" warning light output

3 +12V Power (+) commmon for "H-M-L" solenoid valves

4 0V Configuration pin

5 Not utilised

6 Digital signal - range downshift pushbutton

7 Digital signal - range upshift pushbutton

8 0V Range switch common

9 Power for "L" solenoid valve

10 Power for "M" solenoid valve

11 Power for "H" solenoid valve

12 +12V Battery positive

1 2 3 4 5 6

12 11 10 9 8 7

1 6

12 7

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

297

3.3.2 POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR X71


1 +12V Battery positive

2 Power for "UP" solenoid valve

3 Power for "DOWN" solenoid valve

4 0V Battery negative

5 +10V Power (+) common for solenoid valves and sensors

6 Analogue input - lift position sensor

7 Analogue input - lift draft sensor

8 Analogue input - lift lowering speed adjustment trimmer

9 Analogue input - max. lift height adjustment trimmer

10 Analogue input - lift draft-wheelslip adjustment trimmer

11 Analogue input - lift position adjustment trimmer

12 ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)

1 2 3 4 5 6

12 11 10 9 8 7

1 6

12 7

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

298

3.3.4 ANALOGUE INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONNECTOR X3


1 Warning light - "Memorising selected gear"

2 Analogue input - "W" (Alternator rotation)

3 Not utilised

4 Input - engine temperature sensor

5 Input - fuel level sensor resistance

6 Warning light - "High beam"

7 Warning light - "Preheating"

8 "Clogged air cleaner" warning light

9 Warning light - "Low engine oil pressure"

10 Warning light - "Handbrake - Low fluid level"

11 Warning light - "Low gear" (L)

12 Warning light - "Fuel reserve"

13 Warning light - "Low trailer braking pressure"

14 Warning light - "Battery charging"

15 Warning light - "Hydraulic oil filter clogged - Low oil presure"

16 Warning light - "Front PTO engaged"

17 Warning light - "Rear PTO engaged"

18 Warning light - "Broken belt alarm"

19 Instrument panel lighting

20 Warning light - "Diff lock"

21 Warning light - "4wd engaged"

22 Warning light - "Direction indicators"

23 Warning light - "1st trailer direction indicators"

24 Warning light - "2nd trailer direction indicators"

36

35

3334

32

28

30

29

31

26

25

23

22

24

20

21

19

27

18

14

1116

15513

12 4

23

101

917

6

78

MADE IN SPAINREF.AST/Rev. DATE........

REF.SAME-10S-10N ANALOGICO

2200RPM=567A-473W HZ 12V

AST A

W

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

299

25 Warning light - "Rear PTO Groundspeed"

26 Warning light - "High gear" (H)

27 Warning light - "Medium gear" (M)

28 Warning light - "Rear PTO at 540 rpm"


30 Warning light - "Rear PTO ECO"

31 0V Common earth fore warning lights (pins 1,6,16,18,19,22,23,24)

32 +12V Power common for warning lights(Pins 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,17,20,21,25,26,27,28,29,30)

33 Power for "External alarm" warning light

34 Not utilised

35 Not utilised

36 Not utilised

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

300

3.3.5 DIGITAL INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONNECTOR X3


1 Warning light - "Memorising selected gear"

2 Input - engine speed signal (from engine control unit - Pin 22)

3 Digital input - transmission speed sensor

4 Input - engine temperature sensor

5 Input - fuel level sensor resistance

6 Warning light - "High beam"

7 Warning light - "Preheating"

8 Spia "Intasamento filtro aria"

9 Warning light - "Low engine oil pressure"

10 Warning light - "Handbrake - Low fluid level"

11 Warning light - "Low gear" (L)

12 Warning light - "Fuel reserve"

13 Warning light - "Low trailer braking pressure"

14 Warning light - "Battery charging"

15 Warning light - "Hydraulic oil filter clogged - Low oil presure"

16 Warning light - "Front PTO engaged"

17 Warning light - "Rear PTO engaged"

18 Warning light - "Broken belt alarm"

19 Instrument panel lighting

20 Warning light - "Diff lock"

21 Warning light - "4wd engaged"

22 Warning light - "Direction indicators"

23 Warning light - "1st trailer direction indicators"

24 Warning light - "2nd trailer direction indicators"

36

35

3334

32

28

30

29

31

26

25

23

22

24

20

21

19

27

18

14

1116

15513

12 4

23

101

917

6

78

MADE IN SPAINREF.AST/Rev. DATE........

REF.SAME-10S-10N DIGITALE

2200RPM=1760 Hz12V

AST

SWITCH SELEZIONE ACQUA/ARIA

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

301

25 Warning light - "Rear PTO Groundspeed"

26 Warning light - "High gear" (H)

27 Warning light - "Medium gear" (M)



30 Warning light - "Rear PTO ECO"

31 0V Common earth fore warning lights (pins 1,6,16,18,19,22,23,24)

32 +12V Power common for warning lights(Pins 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,17,20,21,25,26,27,28,29,30)

33 Power for "External alarm" warning light

34 Input - "Display" pushbutton

35 Input - "Reset" pushbutton

36 Input - "Select" pushbutton

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

302

4. SYSTEMS

N° Systems Platform Standard cab High Visib. Cab

1 Earths X X X

2 Starting and preheating X X X

3 Lights - steering column switch unit X



6 Accessories - Diagnostics X



9 Wipers X

10 Wipers X

11 Front instrument panel X X X

12 Radio X

13 Radio X

14 Heating X

15 Heating X

16 Heating and air conditioning X

17 Heating and air conditioning X

18 Braking system - Trailer braking X X X

19 HML transmission X X X

20 Electronic lift X X X

21 Rear and front PTO X X X

303

8

84Electrical system

Systems

4.1 EARTHING POINTS

GND3

F0026980

GND3

GND5

F0028100

GND5

GND1

F0028120

GND1

GND2GND2

F0028140

GND4GND4

GND8

F0028560

GND8

GND5GND9

D0007220

304

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

GND7

F0027210

GND7

GND6GND6

F0027370

D0007860

305

8

84Electrical system

Systems

4.2 STARTING AND PREHEATING

12

11

8

6

5

432

1

13

10

97

X57

X1

0.01

0.53

02.4

RL1

X43

X3

GND4

40A

F1

20A

F6

40A

Fm

ax

0.01

0.53

03.4

32

2

7

1 6 3 4 2

G

-

+

WB+D+

11 13 4

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37X38

X65

RL2

12

X58

14

5

87858630

X311234

87 85 86 3087a

X10

3

R

OF

FO

N

30b

49

15

30

L

6

1

4

2

7

X3215 30/1 5030

012

5 29

X411 2

GND3

31

PRERISCALDO

W (ROTAZIONE ALTERNATORE)

+12 VOLT

CARICA BATTERIA

-VCC

1 2

X67

D0008840

1 Preheating push button2 Relay RL23 Relay RL14 Starter switch5 Starter motor6 Alternator

7 Preheating control solenoid valve8 Glowplug9 Fuel pump10 Start enable switch11 Preheating control unit12 Instrument panel13 Rear PTO control switch

306

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

4.3 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (PLATFORM)

L

FD

FS

+

30

H

56a

56b

57/58

GND3

M

X37X38

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

10A

F9

20A

F2

10A

F8

15A

F3

20A

F4

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F10

10A

F11

10A

F12

X33

X34

X36

6

4

3

2

8

7

9

5

1

1824 2322

X319

X32 X26

X29

X27

X28

X14

X13

X40 X22

2

3

6

7

GND4

GND5

34 157

X62 X61X64 0.01

0.53

02.4

0.010.5303.4

12 3 12 3 2 1

1 21 2 6

G

-31

49a

4

C C2

3

C3

5

49

8 7 9 10 6

6

5

4

2

1

3

X4

7

5

6

3

1

2

4

5

6

4

3

8

9

7

2

1

461 3 5

49

7

OFFON

+15

+30

L 49a

R

6 7 8

9

1

2

3

5

10

11

131415

16

X1

X21

12

ILL.

CR

US

CO

TT

O

IND

. DIR

EZ

ION

E

IND

. DIR

. 2°

RIM

OR

CH

IO

IND

. DIR

. 1°

RIM

OR

CH

IO

AB

BA

GLI

AN

TI012

30/1 503015

4

1 2

20A

F6

+12

VO

LT

32 31

-VC

C

D0008850

1 Rear left light2 Front left headlamp3 Number plate light4 Rear right light5 Front right headlamp6 Starter switch7 Hazard warning lights switch8 Instrument panel9 Trailer socket

(For lights and auxiliary power)10 Hazard warning control unit11 Rear worklight12 Lights selector switch13 Horn14 Front left lights15 Front right lights16 Starter motor

307

8

84Electrical system

Systems

GND6

M

X37X38

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

10A

F9

10A

F8

15A

F3

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F10

10A

F11 10

A

F12

X331824 2322

X319

X32 X26

X29

X28

X14

X1

X40

GND5

34 157

X62 X61X640.01

0.53

02.4

0.010.5303.4

12 3 12 3 2 1

1 2 6

G

-31

49a

4

C C2

3

C3

5

49

8 7 9 10 6

654213

X4

3

12

4

5

64

3

21

1 6 43 5

49

7

OFFON

+15

+30

L 49a

R

X27

X1375

6

89

7

0.010.5582.3

10A

F7

X39

21

X87

12

3

0.009.7852.3

10AF8

10AF7

87858630

3 4 21

X85

X77

12

65

3 4 21

X78

GND6

0.009.7850.4

X121 X124 X122 X123

0.009.7851.4

2 11 22 11 2

X103

X11150A

F X103-30

20A

F2

X36978

L

FD

FS

23 54 16

+

30

H

56a

56b

57/5

8

6 7

9

10

11 1213 14 15 16

17

18192021

22

3

2

1

4

5

GND4

012

30/115 30 50

ILL.

CR

US

CO

TT

O

IND

. DIR

EZ

ION

E

IND

. DIR

. 2°

RIM

OR

CH

IO

IND

. DIR

. 1°

RIM

OR

CH

IO

AB

BA

GLI

AN

TI

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

32 31

20A

F6

8

D0008860

4.4 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (STANDARD CAB)

1 Rear left light2 Number plate light3 Rear right light4 Front left sidelight and direction indicator5 Front right sidelight and direction indicator6 Starter switch7 Hazard warning lights switch8 Instrument panel9 Trailer socket

(For lights and auxiliary power)

10 Hazard warning control unit11 Front worklights control switch12 Rear worklights control switch13 Front left worklight14 Front right worklight15 Rear left worklight16 Rear right worklight17 Roof wiring power relay18 Lights selector switch19 Horn

20 Front left lights21 Front right lights22 Starter motor

308

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

GND6

M

X37X38

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

10A

F9

20A

F2

10A

F8

15A

F3

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F10

10A

F11

10A

F12

X331824 2322

X319

X32 X26

X29

X28

X14

X1

X40

GND5

34 157

X62 X61X640.01

0.53

02.4

0.010.5303.4

12 3 12 3 2 1

1 2 6

G

-31

49a

4

C C2

3

C3

5

49

8 7 9 10 6

654213X4

3

12

4

5

64

3

21

6 43 5

49

7

OFFON

+15

+30

L 49a

R

X27

X13

75

6

89

7

0.010.5582.3

10A

F7

X392

X912

0.011.3761.387858630

X95

21

34

0.011.3606.4

X121 X124 X122 X123

0.011.3595.3

2 11 21 21 2

GND7

X103

GND7

40A

21

X104

10AF8

10AF7

X99X1002 3 17 5 6 4 8 2 3 17 5 6 4 8

X36978

LFD

FS

23 54 16

+

30

H

56a

56b

57/5

8X111

50AF X103-30

5

4

6 78

10

11 1213 14 15 16

1718

19202122

1

2

3

GND4

23

012

30/115 30 50

ILL.

CR

US

CO

TT

O

IND

. DIR

EZ

ION

E

IND

. DIR

. 2°

RIM

OR

CH

IO

IND

. DIR

. 1°

RIM

OR

CH

IO

AB

BA

GLI

AN

TI

1 3132

I+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

20A

F6

9

D0008870

4.5 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)

1 Rear left light2 Number plate light3 Rear right light4 Front left sidelight and direction indicator5 Front right sidelight and direction indicator6 Starter switch7 Hazard warning lights switch8 Instrument panel9 Trailer socket

(For lights and auxiliary power)

10 Hazard warning control unit11 Front worklights control switch12 Rear worklights control switch13 Front left worklight14 Front right worklight15 Rear left worklight16 Rear right worklight17 Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp)18 Roof wiring power relay19 Lights selector switch

20 Horn21 Front left lights22 Front right lights23 Starter motor

309

8

84Electrical system

Systems

12

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37X38

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F5

20A

F4

1 2

X121 2

X11

GND5

X42

2

X7

2

1

7

0.011.6986.4

PRESADIAGNOSTICA

15A

F13

X22 1 3

10A

F10

0.01

0.53

03.4

1

2

3

X32

4

1

X71

ISO 9141

GND

+12 VCC

1

3

0.011.6943.420

A

F2

X36978

L

FD

FS

23 54 16

+

30H

56a

56b

57/5

8

1

23

54

6

7

8

012

30/1 503015

D0008880

4.6 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (PLATFORM)

1 Diagnostics connector2 Starter switch3 Compressor for driver’s seat air suspension4 Outlet socket (in cab)5 Cigar lighter6 Starter motor7 Lights selector switch8 Rear lift control unit

310

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

1224

1X71

ISO 9141

GND

+12 VCC

1

3

0.011.6943.4

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37X38

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F5

20A

F4

1 2

X121 2

X11

GND5

X42

X7

217

0.011.6986.4

PRESADIAGNOSTICA

15A

F13

X22 1 3

10A

F10

0.010.5303.4

123

X32

10A

F7

2

X392

X873

X111

50AF

0.009.7852.3

X103-30

GND621

X74X83

58

23 1

15-

30

4

10A

F1

10A

F6

87858630 78 6 5 4

342 1X81 0.

009.

7850

.4

12

X126

X12712

0.00

9.78

51.4

X36978

LFD

FS

23 54 16

+

30

H

56a

56b

57/5

8

20A

F2

1

13

23 4

56

7

X103

8910

11

12

0012

30/1 503015

D0008900

4.7 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (STANDARD CAB)

1 Diagnostics connector2 Starter switch3 Compressor for driver’s seat air suspension4 Outlet socket (in cab)5 Cigar lighter6 Roof wiring power relay7 Flashing light8 Rotating beacon control switch9 Interior roof light10 Clock11 Starter motor12 Lights selector switch13 Rear lift control unit

311

8

84Electrical system

Systems

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F5

20A

F4

1 2

X121 2

X11

GND5

X42217

0.011.6986.4

PRESADIAGNOSTICA

15A

F13

X22 1 3

10A

F10

0.010.5303.4

123

X32

10A

F7

2X39

2

X91

3

X111

50AF

0.011.3761.3

X103-30

5AF2

10A

F6

10A

F1

GND7

4 2 3 1

X962 3 17 8

X101

2 1

X74

0.01

1.36

06.4

1 2 X126

X1271 2

0.01

1.35

96.3

GND6

X83

58

23 4

15-

30

1

1241

X71

ISO 9141

GND

+12 VCC

0.011.6943.4

21

3

X38X36978

LFD

FS

23 54 16

+

30H

56a

56b

57/5

8

20A

40A

21

X104

87

858630

X103

1

14

23 4 5 6

7

8

9

1011

12

13

012

30/1 503015

X7

D0008890

4.8 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)

1 Diagnostics connector2 Starter switch3 Compressor for driver’s seat air suspension4 Outlet socket (in cab)5 Cigar lighter6 Interior roof light7 Rotating beacon control switch

8 Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp)9 Roof wiring power relay10 Flashing light11 Clock12 Starter motor13 Lights selector switch14 Rear lift control unit

312

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

M

X37

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X38

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F7

X322

X39

0.01

0.53

03.4

X872

0.00

9.78

52.3

GND6

7.5AF6

7.5AF5

X79

12

3

X75

12348765

3

X77

7658

X8412348765

X822 1

X80

21

M

21

M

X135

X129

0.009.7854.3

21

X125

0.009.7851.431TI 15 53S 53M

M

0.00

9.78

50.4

32

16

X88

32

16

X130

0.010.4516.3

87858630

X111

50AF

X103-30 X103

11

1 2 34

5

6

7

8

9

10

012

30/1 503015

D0008910

4.9 WIPERS (STANDARD CAB)

1 Rear wiper control switch2 Front windscreen wiper control switch3 Intermittent wipe timer for windscreen wiper4 Windscreen washer pump control switch5 Windscreen wiper motor6 Roof wiring power relay

7 Starter motor8 Starter switch9 Rear screen washer pump10 Front windscreen washer pump11 Rear screen wiper motor

313

8

84Electrical system

Systems

M

X37

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X38

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F7

X322

X39

0.01

0.53

03.4

X912

0.00

9.78

52.3

7.5AF5

7.5AF6

GND7

X97 X98 X8231TI 15 53S 53M6231 5

2X101

6231 5

1

X7523

32

X80

0.01

1.36

06.4

21

0.011.3596.3

X125

GND6

21

M

21

M

X135

X129

0.01

1.37

43.3

X92

23

14

23

14

0.011.3597.3

X130

40A

1 2

X10487858630

X103

X111

50AF

X103-30

11

12

1 23

4

5

67

8

109

012

30/1 503015

D0008920

4.10 WIPERS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

1 Rear wiper control switch2 Front windscreen wiper control switch3 Intermittent wipe timer for windscreen wiper4 Windscreen washer pump control switch5 Windscreen wiper motor6 Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp)

7 Roof wiring power relay8 Starter motor9 Starter switch10 Rear screen washer pump11 Front windscreen washer pump12 Rear screen wiper motor

314

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

40A

Fm

ax

20A

F6

0.01

0.53

03.4

1342

2

3

1

0.01

0.53

02.4

21

P

t

515 124893132 33 133435366

+12

VO

LT

SE

LEZ

ION

E

AZ

ZE

RA

ME

NT

O

DIS

PA

LY

SE

NS

. VE

L. T

RA

SM

ISS

ION

E

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

BA

SS

A P

RE

SS

. OLI

O M

OT

OR

E

INT.

FIL

TR

O A

RIA

TE

MP.

MO

TO

RE

OLI

O ID

RA

ULI

CO

RIS

ER

VA

CA

RB

UR

AN

TE

LIV

ELL

A C

AR

BU

RA

NT

E

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

15 30/1 5030

012

X5032

Fn

X4457

7 51 2

43

21

X18

X19X20

GND5

X23 X38 X37

567891213

X55

GND3

X60 X54

X32X3X45X52

GND4

X1

11 10

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

40A

Fm

ax

20A

F6

0.01

0.53

03.4

1342

2

3

1

0.01

0.53

02.4

21

P

t

515 124893132 33 133435366

+12

VO

LT

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

BA

SS

A P

RE

SS

. OLI

O M

OT

OR

E

INT.

FIL

TR

O A

RIA

TE

MP.

MO

TO

RE

OLI

O ID

RA

ULI

CO

RIS

ER

VA

CA

RB

UR

AN

TE

LIV

ELL

A C

AR

BU

RA

NT

E

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

15 30/1 5030

012

32 57

7 51 2

43

X18

X19X20

GND5

X23 X38 X37

56781213

X55

GND3

X60 X54

X32X3

GND4

X1

11

D0009010

4.11 FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL

1 Selection pushbutton (only digital panel)2 Reset button (only digital panel)3 Instrument panel4 Starter switch5 Starter motor6 Fuel level sensor7 Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch

8 Hydraulic oil low pressure switch9 Display pushbutton (only digital panel)10 Transmission speed sensor (only digital panel)11 Coolant temperature sensor12 Air cleaner clogged sensor13 Engine oil pressure switch

Digital instrument panel Analogue instrument panel

D0009110

315

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1 2

X86

GND6

5AF2

3X87

0.00

9.78

50.4

X111

50AF

X37 0.00

9.78

52.3

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

2 4 1 3

0.01

1.07

29.4

12

12

X132

X131

X133

1

4

3

2

4

3

2

1

5AF2

3

X91

0.01

1.36

06.4

X111

50A

F

X37 0.00

9.78

52.3

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

0.01

1.35

96.3

12

X133

X1013

2 1

X862 4

X1311 3

GND6

12

X132

D0007500

4.12 RADIO (VERSION WITH STANDARD CAB) 4.13 RADIO (VERSION WITH HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)

D0007510

1 Radio2 Starter motor3 RH speaker4 LH speake

1 Radio2 Starter motor3 RH speaker4 LH speake

316

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

X109

3 1 2 4

2 1

X108

0.00

9.78

52.3

1

2

7

5

4

9

8

3

610

3

11

X136

X107

X14287

85

8630

2 1

X89

20A

F4

2

X87

2X39

X103-30

X111

50AF

GND6

0.00

9.78

50.4

10A

F7

40A

Fm

ax

X32

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37X38 0.01

0.53

03.4

M2

1

X141

1

23

4

X140

1

2345

C

B

H

M

3

2

L1

0

X139

31 2

X1381 2

X137

010.2123.2

3086

85

87

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

10

X106

012

30/1 503015

X103

1 2

G

-

+

B+1 2

B+B- DF D+

B-

D0008930

4.14 HEATER (STANDARD CAB)

1 Potentiometer adjustment heading2 Heating air temperature sensor3 Fan speed selector switch4 Resistor for heater fan5 Heater fan6 Roof wiring power relay7 Starter switch8 Starter motor9 Heating alternator10 Heater unit resistance11 Heater settings control unit12 Relay - alternator excitation

317

8

84Electrical system

Systems

3 1 2 4

2 1

X108

0.01

1.37

61.3

X1132 1

X93

40A

F

2

X91

2X39

X103-30

X111

50AF

GND6

0.01

1.36

06.4

10A

F7

40A

Fm

ax

X32

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37X38 0.01

0.53

03.4

12

X137

010.2558.1

30868587

X103

X109

G

-

+

B+B-1 2

B+B- DF D+

0

15 30/1 5030

012

1172154310612

98

X136

X1061 2

3

12

45

X145

X157

X147

878685

30

87b

878685

30

X146

87868530

87b

1

234

X148

M21

X151

1

234

X149

M

21

X153

1

234

X154

5C

IV

III

II

I

21

21

X150X152

87b

5

4

3

2

1

12

16

15

14

13

11

10

9

8

7

6

D0008940

4.15 HEATER (HIGH-VISIBILITY ROOF

1 Control relay for 3rd heater fan speed2 Relay - alternator excitatione3 Fan speed selector switch4 Resistor for right heater fan5 Right heater fan6 Left heater fan7 Resistor for left heater fan8 Control relay for maximum fan speed9 Potentiometer adjustment heading10 Heating air temperature sensor11 Heater settings control unit12 Heater unit resistance13 Roof wiring power relay14 Starter switch15 Starter motor16 Heating alternator

318

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

3 1 2 4

2 1

X108

1

2

7

5

4

9

8

12

610

3

11

X136

X107

X14287

85

8630

2 1X89

20A

F4

2X87

2

X39

X103-30

X111

50AF

GND6

0.00

9.78

50.4

10A

F7

40A

Fm

ax

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37X38 0.01

0.53

03.4

M

X141

X140

1

2

3

45

C

B

H

M

3

2

L1

0

X139

31 2 1 20.010.2130.1

3086

85

87

X103

X109

G

-

+

1 2B+B- DF D+

X1061 2 1 2 3 4

X141

87868530

12

X144

X32

4

2

3

1

1

X76

30A

F3

3

1

X115

0.00

9.76

24.4

X59

0

15 30/1 5030

12

30 86 85 87

X115

M

X1192 1

X118 X120

0.00

9.78

53.3

3 45

6

7

81

2

3

4

91

2

2 13 111

1213 14

15

16

18

1

2

10

17

B+B-

X143X137X138

0.01

0.53

03.4

D0008950

4.16 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (STANDARD CAB)

1 Heater control unit2 Control relay for alternator excitation3 Heater control potentiometer4 Heater air temperature sensor5 Control relay for air conditioning6 Demister thermostat7 Fan speed selector switch8 Resistor for heater fan9 Heater fan10 Heater resistance11 Roof wiring power relay12 Control relay for air conditioning fan13 Air conditioning fan14 Air conditioning pressure switch15 Starter switch16 Starter motor17 Air conditioning compressor18 Heating alternator

319

8

84Electrical system

Systems

4.17 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HIGH-VISIBILITY ROOF)

3 1 2 4

2 1X108

0.01

1.37

61.3

X1132 1

X93

40AF

2X91

2X39

X103-30

X111

50AF

GND6

0.01

1.36

06.4

10A

F7

40A

Fm

ax

X32

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

X37X38

12

X137

0.010.2562.1

30868587

X103

B+

G

-

+

1 2B+B- DF D+

11721543106

12

98

X136

X1061 2

3

12

45

X145

X157

X147

878685

30

87b

878685

30

87b

X146

87868530

87b

1

234

X148

M21

X151

1234

X149

M

21

X153

1

234

X154

5C

IV

III

II

I

21

X150X152

3 2

X941

878685

30X156

1 2 1 2

1

15 30/1 5030

012

63

X102

12

3

45

7.5AF4

304

F3

78

1

X115

0.01

0.53

02.4

X59

M

X117a X11530 86 85 87 87a

X114 X116

M

X117b

0.01

1.36

10.3

21

23

7 8

24

22

2120

191817

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

96

5

4

3

2

1

1 230 86 85 87 87a2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6

25

X159X158

B-

0.01

0.53

03.4

X109

D0008960

1 Control relay for 3rd heater fan speed2 Control relay for alternator excitation123 Control relay for 1st fan speed and air conditioning on4 Fan speed selector switch5 Resistor for right heater fan6 Right heater fan7 Air conditioning control switch8 Air conditioning thermostat9 Left heater fan10 Resistor for left heater fan11 Control relay for maximum fan speed12 Heater control potentiometer13 Heater air temperature sensor14 Heater control unit15 Heater resistance16 Roof wiring power relay17 Air conditioning fan18 Control relay for air conditioning fan19 Control relay for supplementary air conditioning fan20 Air conditioning pressure switch21 Supplementary air conditioning fan22 Starter switch23 Starter motor24 Air conditioning compressor25 Heating alternator

320

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

GND3

GND5

1 2

4 5

6

7

3

10

8

GND4

9

X6621

X1

X3

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F7

X5

X24

2

1

X295 643

X143 124

X266

0.01

0.53

03.4X32

2

1

20

X38 X37

1

2

X25

P

3 10 313213

PR

ES

S. R

IMO

RC

HIO

FR

EN

O A

MA

NO

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

20A

F6

0.01

0.53

02.4

012

30/1 503015

D0008970

4.18 BRAKING SYSTEM - TRAILER BRAKING

1 Rear left light2 Rear right light3 Trailer socket

(For lights and auxiliary power)4 Starter switch5 Instrument panel6 Brake fluid level sensor

7 Starter motor8 Handbrake switch9 Trailer braking low pressure switch10 Brake pedal switch

321

8

84Electrical system

Systems

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1X6

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

X72

11

12

GND

SPIA M

COM EV

CONFIG

LEVA LO

LEVA HI

LEVA COM.

EV LO

EV HI

+12 Vcc

1 2

H1 2

L X73

0.010.7972.3

123

123

M

M

X38

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

40A

Fm

ax

20A

F6

X32

X37

GND5

X3

0.01

0.53

03.4

6

R

OFFON

30b

491530L

3 1 4 2 7

X92 1

X166

OFFON

3 1 4 2 7

X8

1 2

X15

R30b

491530L

1

2 3

5

6 7

8 9

10

11

262711 20 21 32 31

GND4

012

30/1 503015

MA

RC

IA L

EN

TA (

L)

MA

RC

IA M

ED

IA (

M)

MA

RC

IA V

ELO

CE

(H

)

BLO

CC

. DIF

F.

DO

PP

IA T

RA

ZIO

NE

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

4

4

4

D0008980

4.19 HML TRANSMISSION

1 HML control unit2 Solenoid valve for High range control (HI)3 Solenoid valve for Low range control (LO)4 HML control pushbutton5 DF control switch6 Differential lock control solenoid valve (DF)

7 4WD control solenoid valve (DT)8 4WD control switch9 Starter switch10 Starter motor11 Instrument panel

322

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

4.20 ELECTRONIC LIFT

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 14

15

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

40A

Fm

ax

10A

F5

X32

X38 X37

X7

X42

GND5

1

2

3

4I

3

4

2

1

52

1

3

7

8

C

3

2

1

P1

3

4

2

1

52

1

3

7

8

2

3

1

DW

2

3

1

UP412 5 9 10 11 8 7 3 2 1 6

X71

3

2

1

H1

3

2

1

V

3

2

1

M1

3

2

1

S1

3

2

1

P2

2

1EV DW

2

1EV UP

0.01

0.53

03.4

0.011.6943.4

ISO

914

1+

10 V

CC

MA

X A

LZA

TAM

IXP

OS

IZIO

NE

VE

L. D

ISC

ES

AS

FO

RZ

OE

V D

WE

V U

PG

ND

+12

VC

CP

OS

IZIO

NE

U

S

U

F

1 Khom

4.7

Kho

m

1 Khom

4.7

Kho

m

1 Khom

4.7

Kho

m

1 Khom

4.7

Kho

m

213

16

012

30/1 503015

D0008990

1 Lift UP solenoid valve2 Lift lowering solenoid valve3 Rear lift position sensor4 Lift draft sensor5 Draft/wheelslip control potentiometer6 Lift lowering speed potentiometer7 Maximum lift height potentiometer8 Lift position adjustment potentiometer

9 Rear lift control pushbutton10 Rear lift control pushbutton11 Rear lift “down” control pushbutton12 Rear lift “Up” control pushbutton13 Rear lift control unit14 Starter switch15 Starter motor16 Diagnostics connector

323

8

84Electrical system

Systems

M

BATTERY

-+

+30

+50

40A

Fm

ax

20A

F6

X32

X38 X37

0.01

0.53

03.4X10

1 2

X173

OFFON

6 1 4 2 7

GND5

X3X357

R

OFFON

30b

491530L

2 1 4 3 6

GND4

X114

51ES1234

1 2

X63

GND3

0.01

0.53

02.4

R30b

491530L

28 1729302516 3231

1

2 3

4

5 6

7891011

012

30/1 503015

+12

VO

LT

-VC

C

PT

O A

NT.

PT

O P

OS

T. S

YN

CR

O

PT

O E

CO

PT

O 1

000

rpm

PT

O 5

40 r

pm

PT

O P

OS

T.

D0009000

4.21 REAR AND FRONT PTO

1 Front PTO solenoid valve2 Front PTO control switch3 Instrument panel4 Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO)5 Rear PTO control switch6 Starter switch7 Starter motor8 540 PTO engagement sensor9 1000 PTO engagement sensor10 750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor11 PTO engagement sensor

PAGE INTENTIONALLYLEFT BLANK

325

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1

9

26

21

15

4

14

29

25

20

3

8

X1

X54

X55

X37

X57

X58

X59

X60

X61

X62

X64

GND3X41X65

X66

X63

TO 0.010.5303.4

ENGINE WIRING (1/2)

0.010.5302.4D0008300

X1 To central wiringX37 Starter motorX41 Fuel pompX54 Cooling engine sensorX55 Engine oil pressure switchX57 Glowplug

X58 Preheating control solenoid valveX59 Air conditioning compressorX60 Air cleaner clogged sensorX61 HornX62 Front left lightsX63 Front PTO solenoid valve

X64 Front right lightsX65 AlternatorX66 Brake fluid level sensor

326

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

ENGINE WIRING (2/2)

HN 1

V 1

DIPPED HEAD LIGHTS

DIPPED HEAD LIGHTS

FULL BEAM HEAD LIGHTS

HORN

RPM INDICATOR

GENERATOR

TEMPERATURE

ENGINE OIL PRESS.

AIR FILTER

ANABBAGL.

ANABBAGL.

ABBAGLIANTI

AVV. ACUSTICO

W CONTAGIRI

GENERATORE

TEMPERAT.

P. OLIO MOT.

FILTRO ARIA

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

B 1

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

M 1

R 1

L 1

BR 1

Z 1

V 1

H 1

HN 1

1

2

3

N 1

MN

1

N 1

B 1

N 1

N 1

N 1

N 1

1

9

26

21

15

4

14

29

25

20

3

8

N 1

6

FULL BEAM HEAD LIGHTS ABBAGLIANTIV 1

CANDELATTAPLUGRN 1.5

RN 1.5PLUG CANDELATTA

ELECKTROVALVE ELETTROVALVOLABN 1

FRONT PTO PTO ANT.MN 1

COMPRESS.COMPRESSORVN 1.5

BRAKES OIL

+12 VOLT

OLIO FRENI

+12 VOLTMB 1

29

20ZN 1

L 1

BR

1

N 1

6

BN

1

VN

1.5

RN

1.5

N 1

Z 1

1 2

AM

PN 1

N 1

N 1

M 1

R 1

N 1

ZN

1

N 1

MB

1

N 1

RN

1.5

V 1

N 1

H 1

1

2

3

X54

X55

X37X57 X58 X59

X60

X61

X62

X64

GND3

X63

X65

X66X1X41

D0008310 0.010.5302.4

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

327

POSITION OF ENGINE WIRING CONNECTORS

1

2

3

X54

X66

F0028460

X66X1X1

X54

X55

F0028480

X55

X58

F0028450

X58

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

328

4

5

6

X60

F0028420

X60

X62

X64

F0028430

X64

X62

X61X63

F0028440

X63X61

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

329

7

8

9

GND3

F0026980

GND3

X67: conector for engine cooling fan speed with air conditioning system

F0028490

X41X41

X59

F0028520

X59

331

8

84Electrical system

Systems

7

1

3

4

5

6

8 9 10 11

2

10

11

X65

F0028410

X65

X37

F0028390

X37

ENGINE WIRING

0.010.5302.4

333

8

84Electrical system

Systems

CENTRAL WIRING (1/2)

0.010.5303.4D0008360

1 1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor5 540 PTO engagement sensorE 750 PTO (ECO) engagement sensorS PTO engagement sensorX1 To engine wiringX2 Cigar lighterX3 Analogue instrument panelX4 Connector (Platform version)

To front light wiring (Version with cab)X5 Brake pedal switchX6 To HML wiringX7 To electronic lift wiringX8 Four-wheel drive control switchX9 Diff lock control switch X10 PTO control switchX11 Outlet socket (in cab)X12 Compressor for driver’s seat air suspensionX13 Front right headlampX14 Rear right lightX15 Four-wheel drive control solenoid valveX16 Differential lock control solenoid valve (DF)X17 Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO)X18 ConnectorX19 Pressure switch for hydraulic oil filter clogging X20 Hydraulic oil low pressure switchX21 ConnectorX22 Rear worklight (platform version)X23 Fuel level sensorX24 Handbrake switchX25 Trailer braking low pressure switchX26 Trailer socketX27 Front left headlampX28 Number plate lightX29 Rear left lightX31 Start enable switchX32 Starter switchX33 Hazard warning lights switchX34 Rear worklights switch (Not utilised)X35 Front PTO control switchX36 Lights selector switchX37 Starter motor (+12V)X38 Starter motor (Start)X39 To cab wiringX40 Hazard warning lights control unitX41 Alarms control unitX42 Diagnostics connectorX43 Preheating control unitX44 Display pushbuttoX45 Engine governor reset buttonX50 Transmission speed sensorX52 Selection pushbuttonX67 Preheating control pushbutton

SERV

IZI

ELEC

T.2

STOP

S

15 A

E

GND5

C

15

S

13 2

13 24

10 A

40 A

20 A

15 A

10 A

20 A

10 A

20 A

10 A

10 A

10 A

10 A

12

X40X1

X2X3 X7

X8 X9 X10 X11

X12

X14

X13

X19

X20

X22

X15

X16

X17

X18

X21X21

X24X23

5 1 ES

X25

X26

X28X33

X32

X31

X36

X38 X37

X39

GND4

X42

X4X6

X5

X27X29X34X35

RL1 RL2

FM1

X43

X44

X45

X50

X67

X52

TO 0.009.7852.30.011.3761.3

TO 0.011.7972.4

TO 0.010.5302.4

TO 0.011.6943.4

334

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

AMP

AMP

M

X2

1

1

AMP

AMP

AMP

1

AMP

12

1

1

1

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE

Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X43 X40 X1

X23E 1 5

X3

X17 X16

X9X10

X44X45

X33

X34S

X35

X15

X8

X52

X12 X11

X18

X24

X19

X20

X6

X29

X27

X21

X22

X28

X14

X13

GND5X25X5

X26

X50

X31

RL 2

X38

X4

X42

X7

X4

X39

X32

FM1

X37

X36

RL1

GND4

6

4

2

5

3

1RN 1.5

M 4

BN1

N1

R1

S1

RN 1.5

1 2 3

654

AR

0.5

Z0.

5

N1

B1.

5

RN

0.5

SG

1.5

M1R1

BR1

RN1,5

Z1

B1

H1H1V1V1

L1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 19

20212223242526272829 MB1

RN1,5

181715141312

BN

1

VN1.5M

N1

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

MN1AN1

HN1

L1

GR1

CN1

ZN1HV1

V 1

146789 5 3 2

M1 B

1S

1M

B1

C1 R

1G

V1 B

R1

N1

192021222324252627

RN0,5

Z0,5AR0,5

GN1

HG1ZB1

ZV1

HR1AR1

CB1MG0.5

MN0.8 BM

1N

1 B1

N1 A

G1

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28

VB

1

VN

1

AG

1

MB1MB1

MB1MB1

MB

1M

B

MB

MB

1 2

MB

1

1 2

HV1N1

1

2

1 2

MB

1

RV

1

MB1

HR

1

HR

1

N1

AR1

RV

1M

B1

N1

1

2

35

6

7

HR

1

1

2

35

6

7

MV1

MB

1.5

MB

1

GR

1

GR

1

N1

VM

1

1

2

35

6

7

GN1

A1.5

A1

RN1

G1

N1

N1

N1N1

M1 M1

2

3

6

1

5

4

7

2 2

GN1

AN1

RN1G1

N1

N1

GN1AN1.5

N1

1

5

3

4

2

6

7

8

9

CB1

2

3 4

17

6

5

N1

MG

0.5

N1

4

1

2

35

6

7

N1

MN

0.8

AN1 AN1

AN1

AN1

ZB1

N1*ZN1ZV1 MB1 1

2

3

4

5

6

7 8

GN1.5

A1.5AN1.5

G1.5

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1.

5 N1.

5N

1.5 N

1.5

N1.

5 N1.

5N

1.5

GN1

A1N1

12

3

4 5

6

7

G1

AN

1

RN

11 2

RN

1.5

CN

1

N1

LB

1.5

2 3

N1

GV

0.885 86

H2,5

MV1

M1

MV

1

M1

M4

87

86

H2,5

87

MV

1

N1.5

MN 1.5

G 1

1

2

MN1

MN1MN1

NM

1

N1

VM

1

VB

1 N11

2

3 45

6

71

2

3 45

6

7

M1

M1

M1G

V1.

5 2 3

1 4

MV 1

N 1

HG

1

1

2

3 45

6

7

VB

1.5

SG

1.5

AN

1

B1.

5A

1

BN1.5

A1.5

AN1.5

A1

A1.

5A

1.5

1 2 3 4

MB1

N1

C1

HN

1

N1

N1

N1 N

1

N1 N

1N

1 N1

N1

B1.

5

B1.5

R1.5

G1.5

H1.5

B1.5R1.5 Z1

A1.5

AN1.5 3

2

1

65 4

9

8

7

VN1.5

MB1MB1

MB

1M

B1.

5

MB1MB1

MB1

M4

M4

MB1N1 85

30

87

MB1 R 1

F1 40A F2 20A F3 15A F4 20A F5 10A F6 20A

AR

4

M4

F7 10A F8 10A

10A

10A

10AF9 F10 F11 10A

15AF12 F13

R6

R4 M

1.5

M0.

5

GV

1.5

GV

1.5

VB

1.5

R1.

5

R1.

5

GN

1.5

BN

1.5

LB

1.5

BM

1.5

BM

1.5

GN 1 GN 1.5

AR

1.5

VN

1.5

V1.

5H1

H1.

5

H1

H1

G1

G1.

5

G1.

5

F1 40A

AR4

M4

VN

1.5

19

50

17

15

1 2

LB

1

L4

L4

L4

L4 30

30

N 1

G 1

N 1

GN 1

AN 1.5

A 1.5

3 87

1

64

52

87

46

5

31

2

G 1

GN 1

A 1.5N 1

N 1

AN 1.5

13

2

HG 0.5N 1

M 0.5

13

24

HG 0.5

N 1

M 1.5

AR1

MB

1X67

15 9

10 421

26 5 1

1622

23

24

26

27

28

29

18

17

19

20

11

12

13

14

6

7

8

2

3

GV

1.5

GV

1.5 N1

GV

1.5

4 4 4

D0008330

CENTRAL WIRING (2/2)

0.010.5303.4

335

8

84Electrical system

Systems

X4

X13 X27

TO 0.010.5303.4

D0009120

FRONT LIGHT WIRING (VERSION WITH CAB)

0.010.5582.3

X4 To central wiringX13 Front right sidelight and direction indicatorX27 Front left sidelight and direction indicator

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

337

CONNECTOR POSITIONS

1

2

3

X1GND4

X43

F0028510

X43GND4

X1

X67X67

X32

X2

X67

F0028750

X45X45

X67

X2

X32

X40

F0027610

X40

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

338

4

5

6

X33

F0028730

X52X52

X33

F0027680

X5X5

X44

X42

FM1

RL2

RL1

F0028740

X36X36

RL2

RL1

FM1

X42

X44

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

339

7

8F0027670

X31X31

X37

X38

F0027820

X38

X37

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

340

9

10

11

F0027550

X39X39

X16

X18

X17

F0027790

X17

X18

X16

X15X15

F0027750

X20X20

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

341

12

13

14

X19

F0027810

X19

X50X50X50

F0027930

F0027710

X24X24

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

342

15

16

17

F0027780

X23X23

SS

F0027760

55

EE

11

F0027770

X25X25

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

343

18

19

20

F0027740

X26X26

F0027720

X14-X29X14-X29

F0027730

X28X28

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

344

21

22

23

F0027700

X11X11

X12X12

X7

GND5

F0027800

GND5

X7

F0027690

X8X8

X10X10

X9X9

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

345

24

25

26

F0027580

X4X4

X3

F0027620

X3

X13-X27

F0027590

X13-X27

347

8

84Electrical system

Systems

CENTRAL WIRING

25 24 222321

20 19

19

18

17

16141312111098

7

6

5

3

26

26

19

X2226

19

27

2

1

4

27

X21

F0028540

X21

0.010.5303.40.010.5582.3

CAB

PLATAFORM

349

8

84Electrical system

Systems

HL

12 1213 2

X72

X6

LM H

TO 0.010.5303.4

POWERSHIFT WIRING (1/2)

0.011.7972.4D0008340

H Solenoid valve for High range (HI) control L Solenoid valve for Low range (LO) controlM To HML lever wiringX6 To central wiringX72 HML control unit

350

Systems

Electrical system

8

84


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

Z 1

ZN 1

ZB 1

ZV 1

B 1

M 1

ZN

1

M 1

ZB

1

Z 1

H 1

1

L H

H 1

B 1

2 3

4 5 6 7 8

N 1

ZB

1

ZN

1

ZV

1

MB

1

N 1

MB 1

M 1.5

N 1

98

76

54

32

1

12 2 114 2

1011

12

M

X6

X72

3

H 1

D0008350

POWERSHIFT WIRING (2/2)

0.011.7972.4

351

8

84Electrical system

Systems

2

1

3

CONNECTOR POSITIONS

1

2

3

HL

M

F0027830

L

MM

H

X72

F0028530

X72

X6

F0028550

X6

POWERSHIFT WIRING

0.011.7972.4

353

8

84Electrical system

Systems

32

15

4

1 2

21 3

H1

V

M1

I

EV UP EV DW P2

S1

1 3221

P

UP

1 2 3

DW

1 2 3

UP

DW

C

X7

X71

H

V

M

C

UP

DW P

S

12

34

I

13

21

32

13

21

32

32

15

4P1

TO 0.011.6955.40.011.6958.4

ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING (1/2)

0.011.6943.4/10D0006640

C Rear lift control pushbuttonDW Rear lift “Down” control pushbuttonEV DWLift DOWN solenoid valveEV UPLift UP solenoid valveH1 Maximum height adjustment potentiometer

I Rear lift control pushbuttonM1 Draft/wheelslip control adjustment potentiometerP1 Lift position adjustment potentiometerP2 Rear lift position sensorS1 Lift draft sensorUP Rear lift “Up” control pushbutton

V Lift lowering speed potentiometerX7 To central wiringX71 Rear lift control unit

354

Systems

Electrical system

8

84


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

1 2 3 321 321 1 2 3 321 54 4 3 2

1 2

1 2

321

21 3

4 6532 7 9 8 10 11 12 1

MA

X A

LZA

TA

VE

L.D

ISC

ES

A

MIX

PO

SIZ

ION

E

ISO

914

1

+12

VC

C

H05

L05

M05

N05

M05

N05

M05

N05

S05

M05

N05

VO

5

HR

1

MB

1

M1

HR

1

L05

S05

N1

MB

1

MB

1

MB

1

HR

1

V05

S05

H05

L05

BN

1

N1

AB

1

N1

N1

AB

1

AN

1

BN

1

N1

M1

B1

GN

D

+10

VC

C

PO

SIZ

ION

E

SF

OR

ZO

EV

UP

EV

DW

AN

1

M1

M1

N1

B1

MB

1

1 2 3

V05

21

H05 MB

1

3

H1 V M1 I C

X7

X71

EV UP

EV DW

P2

UP DW

S1

1

BN

1

321 54

MB

1

H05

V05

P1

ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING (2/2)

D0006650 0.011.6943.4/10

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

355

POSITION OF ELECTRONIC LIFT CONNECTORS

1

2

3

P1

V M1

IF0027440

I

M1V

P1 H1H1

C

X71

F0027420

X71

C

X7

X71

F0027430

X71

X7

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

356

4

5

6

UPDW

F0027410

DWUP

P2

F0027400

P2

EV UP

EV DW

F0027380

EV DW

EV UP

357

8

84Electrical system

Systems

4

67

5

3

2

1

7

S1

F0027390

S1

ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING

0.011.6943.4/10

PAGE INTENTIONALLYLEFY BLANK

359

8

84Electrical system

Systems

85 86

87

30

1

5

2 3 4

6 7 8

6

2

5

1

7

3

8

4

1

A H

8

1 23

4321

43

21

87

65

43

21

24

13

23

1

56

4

32

1

12

12

X 87

GND4

X 86

X 85 X 84

X 83

X 82

X 81X 80

X 79

X 78

X 88

X 89

X 90

X 74

X 75

X 76

X 77

X 103

TO 0.010.1359.3

TO 0.010.4516.3

TO 010.2147.2010.2153.2

TO 010.2153.2

TO 0.009.7854.3

TO 0.009.7853.3

TO 0.009.7851.4

ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

0.009.7850.4/50D0006890

X74 Interior roof lightX75 To screenwash pumps wiringX76 To air conditioning fans wiringX77 To worklights wiringX78 Rear worklights switchX79 Rear screen wiper control switchX80 Windscreen washer pump control switchX81 Rotating beacon control switchX82 Intermittent wipe timer for windscreen wiperX83 ClockX84 Front windscreen wiper control switchX85 Front worklights switchX86 RadioX87 To heater power supply wiringX88 To windscreen wiper wiringX89 To heater or air conditioning wiringX90 To air conditioning wiringX103 Relay for roof wiring power

360

Systems

Electrical system

8

84


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

N 1

R 1

A 1

RN1

GR1

V1

AN1

N1

AR

1

AN

1

V1

V1

V-N

1

R-N

1

AR1

AR

1

R1

R1

R1.

5R

1.5

G-V

1.5

M-G

1.5

A1

A-N

1

G-V

1.5

M-G

1.5

R 2.5

R 2

.5

M 2.5

M 2.5

R1

R1

A-N 2.5

A-N

-2.5

R4

R4

AN 1

A1

A1

H-N

1

H-N

1C

1

G-N 1.5

N 2.5

N 1.5

M 1.5

G 1.5

H-N 1

N 2.5

V1

V1

N1

N 1.5

A-R 1

C1

V1

V1V-N 1.5

N1

N1

N1

V-N 1

G-R 1

M 1

.5

M 1

.5

G-N

1.5

G-N

1.5

G1

G1

N4

L-B 1

V-N 1.5

N 2

.5N

2.5

N4

N1

A-N

1

LB

1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

N1

A-N 1

G-R

1

4 3 2 1

A1

N1

R1

A-N 1

A-N

1

N1

85 86

87

30

6

25

1

73

84

1

A H

8

26

1

543

7 8

1 23

4 3 2 1

10 A10

A

5 A R

ADIO

30 A

7.5 A20

A

7.5 A 10 A

43

21

87

65

43

21

24

13

23

1

56

4

32

11

2

1 2

X82

X85 X78 X81 X84

X80 X83

X79

GND6

X86X74

X77

X76

X75

X90

X89

X88

X87

X103

53NI

31

53S

15

T

D0006900

ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)

0.009.7850.4/50

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

361

POSITION OF ROOF WIRING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)

1

2

3

X86

F0027290

X86

X88

F0027300

X88

X74

F0027310

X74

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

362

4

5

6

X75

X87

X77

F0027320

X77

X87

X75

X83

F0027330

X83

X103X103

X76

F0027340

X76

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

363

7

8

9

X89

X90

F0027350

X90

X89

X82

F0028180

X82

GND

F0027370

GND

365

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1

109

87

6

2

34

5

10

F0028170

X84X84X79X79

X81X81

X78X78

X80X80X85X85

ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.009.7850.4/50

367

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1 2

X124

X121

X122

X123

X125

X126 X127

X77TO 0.009.7850.4

WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

0.009.7851.4/40D0006770

X77 To roof wiringX121 Front left worklightX122 Rear left worklightX123 Rear right worklight

X124 Front right worklightX125 Rear screen wiper motorX126 ConnectorX127 Rotating beacon

368

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

G 1.5

N 1.5

N 1.5

G 1.5

N 1.5

GN 1.5

N 1.5

GN 1.5

N 1.5

HN 1

1

2

G 1.5

GN 1.5

M 1.5

HN 1

M 1.5

N 1.5

N 1.5

N 1.5

N 1.5N 1.5

M 1.5

N 1.5

87

65

43

21

X77

X127

X125

X121

X122

X123

X124

X126


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

D0006780

WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)

0.009.7851.4/40

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

369

POSITION OF WORKLIGHTS CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)

1

2

3

X123-X124X121-X122

F0027200

X121-X122X123-X124

X77

F0027270

X77

X126

F0027180

X126

371

8

84Electrical system

Systems

5

1

4

3

2

4

5

X127

F0027170

X127

X125

F0027280

X125

WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.009.7851.4/40

373

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1 221

23

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

3

C 1.5

AR 1.5

N 1.5 N1


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X129

X75

X135

X129

X75

X135

TO 0.009.7850.4

SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.009.7854.3/10D0006750

X75 To roof wiringX129 Front windscreen washer pumpX135 Rear screen washer pump

374

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

V-N 1

R-N 1 G-R 1

M-N 1

3 2 1

456

(+MOT)

(GND)(AZZ.)

(+AZZ)(+AZZ)

R-N 1

G-R 1

(+MOT)

V-N 1

(AZZ.)

M-N 1

(GND)

V-N 1

R-N 1

G-R 1

M-N 1


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X88X130TO 0.009.7850.4

D0006740

WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.010.4516.3/1

X88 To roof wiringX130 Windscreen wiper motor

375

8

84Electrical system

Systems

R

L

X131

X132 X133

D0006760

SPEAKER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.011.0729.4/10

X131 RadioX132 Left speakerX133 Right speaker

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

377

CONNECTOR POSITIONS

1

2

3

X130

F0027120

X130

X88

F0027240

X88

X131

F0027250

X131

379

8

84Electrical system

Systems

WIRING FOR SCREENWASH PUMP - WINDSCREEN WIPER - SPEAKERS (STANDARD CAB)

4

4

3

2

1

5

6

4

5

6

X132-X133

F0027260

X132-X133

X129

F0027130

X129

X129X135

X75

F0028060

X75

0.009.7854.3/100.010.4516.3/1

0.011.0729.4/10

381

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1 2

3

1 2

1

2

50A

12

12

R 6

X108X109

B+

X108

B-

X39

X37X111

X103-30

X87

X106

X106

X107

X111

(X103)

TO 0.009.7850.4

TO 010.2123.2010.2130.1

TO 0.009.7850.4

SOLO PER 65A

HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

0.009.7852.3/40D0006800

B+ Heater alternator (+)B– Heater alternator (–)X37 Starter motorX39 To central wiringX87 To roof wiringX103-30 To roof wiring (X103)X106 Heater resistanceX107 To heater or air conditioning power wiringX108 Connector X109 Heater alternatorX111 Connector

382

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

G-R 1

B 1

1 2

G-R 1

B 1

3

1 2

12

N-L 1

N 16 N 16

N 16 N 16

L 1

12 AMP

34

12

B 1

N-L 1

G-R 1

L 1

R 2.5

L-B 1

V-N 1.5

R 6

V-N 1.5

L B 1

R 2.5

X108

B+

X39

X111 X37X111

X109

X108

X103-30

X87

X106

X107

X106

12

B-


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

D0006790

POSITION OF HEATER POWER CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)

0.009.7852.3/40

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

383

POSITION OF HEATING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)

1

2

3

X106

F0028150

X106

X106

F0027050

X106

X103-30

F0028160

X103-30

X107X107

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

384

4

5

6

X87

F0027070

X87

X39

X111

F0026880

X111

X37X37

X39

X109

F0028720

X109

X108X108

385

8

84Electrical system

Systems

24

1

56

7

37

X108

B+

F0026890

B+

X108

B-B-

HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.009.7852.3/40

PAGINA INTENZIONALMENTELASCIATA BIANCA

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

387

8

84Electrical system

Systems

123456789101112

X136X141 X140

43

21

X107

X89

1 2

12

X137

X139

12

3

X138

X14285

86

30

87

TO 0.009.7852.3

TO 0.009.7850.4

HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

0.010.2123.2D0007780

X89 To roof wiringX107 To heater power wiringX136 Heater control unitX137 Heater air temperature sensorX138 Heater control potentiometer

X139 Fan speed selector switchX140 Heater fan resistorX141 Heater fanX142 Relay for alternator excitation

388

Systems

Electrical system

8

84


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

8 9 612 10 3 4 5 1 72 11

1

2

3

4

1

2

87

86

85

30

R 2

.5

R 4

B 0

.5

C 4

N 0.5

N 0.5

H 0.5

C 0.5

V 0.5

M

1

2

3

0

N 4

R 4

L 1

GR 1

NL 1

B 1

N 4

C 4

B 1

Z 0.5

C 0.5

R 1

M 2.5

LR 1.5

X107

X89

X136

X137

X138

X141

X140

X139

X142

D0007770

HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)

0.010.2123.2

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

533

POSITION OF HEATING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)

1

2

3

X89X107

F0028260

X107 X89

X141

F0028230

X140X140

X141

X138

X137

F0028240

X139X139

X137

X138

391

8

84Electrical system

Systems

2

3

1

4

4X136

X142

F0028250

X142

X136

HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.010.2123.2

393

8

84Electrical system

Systems

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

123456789101112

X136X141 X140

43

21

X107

X89

1 2

12

X137

X139

12

3

X138

X142

85

86

30

87

85 8630 87

X143

X144

4321

X90TO 0.009.7850.4

TO 0.009.7850.4

TO 0.009.7852.3

0.010.2130.1D0007750

X89 To roof wiringX90 To roof wiringX107 To heater power wiringX136 Heater control unitX137 Heater air temperature sensorX138 Heater control potentiometer

X139 Fan speed selector switchX140 Heater fan resistorX141 Heater fanX142 Relay for alternator excitationX143 Air conditioner control relayX144 Demister thermostat

394

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

8 9 612 10 3 4 5 1 72 11

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

87

86

85

30

87

86

85

30

R 2

.5

R 4

B 0

.5

C 4

N 0.5

N 0.5

H 0.5

C 0.5

V 0.5

M

1

2

3

0

N 4

R 4

L 1

GR 1

NL 1

B 1

BV 0.5

NZ 0.5

CR 1

B 0.5

N 4

C 4

B 0.5

B 0.5

B 1

Z 0.5

C 0.5

R 1

CR 1

NZ 0.5

BV 0.5

C 1

M 2.5

LR 1.5

X107

X89

X136

X137

X138

X141

X140

X139

X142

X143

X144

X90

D0007760 0.010.2130.1

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

395

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

1

2

3

X90

X89X107

F0028270

X107 X89

X90

X141

F0028230

X140X140

X141

X144 X139

X138

F0028290

X138

X139X144

X137X137

397

8

84Electrical system

Systems

2

3

1

4

4

X143

X136

X142

F0028280

X142

X136

X143

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.010.2130.1

399

8

84Electrical system

Systems

WH

ITE

BIA

NC

O

85 87

86

87

30

ITALAMEC 037

113 2

X115

X76

X118

X120

X119

TO 0.009.7850.4

AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)

0.009.7853.3/21D0006620

X76 To roof wiringX115 Relay - heat exchanger fanX118 Air conditioning pressure switchX119 Air conditioning heat exchanger fanX120 Air conditioning pressure switch

400

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

30

8785 86

87

CB 1

A 2.5

AN 2.5 AN 1

N 1

V 1

VN

1

CB

1

WH

ITE

BIA

NC

O

1

3

2

4

113 2

AN 2.5

N 1

N 2.5

V 1

VN 1

A 2

.5

N 2

.5


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X76

X115

X118

X120

X119

D0006630

AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)

0.009.7853.3/21

401

8

84Electrical system

Systems

12

X1153

1

2

3

F0028210

X118X118

X120X120

F0028220

X119X119

X76

F0027340

X76

AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB)

0.009.7853.3/21

403

8

84Electrical system

Systems

GND7

5A 10A

7.5A

7.5A

30A

10A

7.5A

10A

RADIO

FREON

X95

X94

X92

X75

X91

X104

X103

X102

X101

X100

X99

X98

X97

X96

X80

X74

X82

X93

TO 0.010.2560.0

TO 0.011.3595.3

TO 0.010.2554.20.010.2560.0

TO 0.011.3597.3

TO 0.011.3743.3

TO 0.011.3754.3

TO 0.011.3596.3

TO 0.011.3610.3

ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

0.011.3606.4/51D0008810

X74 Interior roof lightX75 To screenwash pumps wiringX80 Windscreen washer pump control switchX82 Intermittent wipe timer PTOX91 To heater power supply wiringX92 To windscreen wiper wiringX93 To heater wiringX94 To heater or air conditioning wiringX95 To worklights wiringX96 Rotating beacon control switchX97 Rear screen wiper control switchX98 Windscreen wiper control switchX99 Rear worklights control switchX100 Front worklights control switchX101 To speaker and radio wiringX102 To air conditioning fan wiringX103 Relay for roof wiring powerX104 Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp)

404

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

2 3 8 7 2 3 8 7 2 3 8 7 3 5 2 61 6 5 3 2

1 23

5

GND7

1

A H

8

40A

RN1

GR1

V1

AN1

N1

AR1

1 2

3

R 1

R 1

R 1

.5R

1.5

GV

1.5

MG

1.5

A 1

AN

1

GV

1.5

MG

1.5

R 4

R 4

M 4

M 10

R 1

AN 1.5

R 6

VN

1.5

AN 1

G 1

HN 1

GN 1

R 1

N 1.5

V 1

V 1

AR 1

C 1

V 1V 1

VN 1.5

N 1

N 1

N 1

VN 1GR 1

M 1

.5

M 1

.5

GN

1.5

GN

1

G 1

G 1

N 6

LB 1

VN 1.5

N 1

.5

N 6

LB

1

N 1

N 1

N 1

N 1

N 1

N 1

AN

TE

RIO

RI

FAR

I LA

VO

RO

PO

MP

A T

ER

GI

PO

ST

ER

IRI

FAR

I LA

VO

RO

AN

TE

RIO

RE

TE

RG

I

PO

ST

ER

IOR

E

TE

RG

I

LAM

PE

GG

IAN

TE

M 1.5

GN 1

G 1

N 1

N 1

HN

1

A 1

A 1

C 1

VN

1

AN

1

AN

1

AR

1

R 1R 1

N 1

.5

N 1.5

AN 1.5

5A 10A

7.5A

7.5A

30A

10A

7.5A

10A

RADIO

FREON

VN 1.5

R 6

A 1

AN

1

V 1

RN

1

AR

1

N 1

53

AN

TE

RIO

RE

AN

1.5

AN

1.5

A 1

43

21

12

31

23

56

7

483

21

4

2

3

1B

A

X80X97X98X96X99X100

X101

X95

X102

X75

X94

X93

X92

X91

X74

X103

X104

X82

2 3

T 53S

15

I53N

31


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

D0006880

ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)

0.011.3606.4/51

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

405

POSITION OF ROOF WIRING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

1

2

3

X91

GND7

X103

X75

F0026770

GND7

X75

X103

X91

X100

X99 X97

X98X96

X80

F0026780

X96X80

X98

X97X99

X100

X104

X82

F0026790

X82

X104

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

406

4

5

6

X93

X95

X94

F0026800

X94

X95

X93

X101

X102

F0026820

X102

X101

X74

F0026810

X74

407

8

84Electrical system

Systems

4

13

2

1

7

6

5

3

7

X92

F0026830

X92

ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.011.3606.4/51

409

8

84Electrical system

Systems

GND7

G 1.5

N 1.5

N 1.5

G 1.5

N 1.5

GN 1.5

N 1.5

GN 1.5

GND7

34

12

34

12


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X95

X124

X123

X122

X121

X95

X123

X122

X124

X121

TO 0.011.3606.4

WORKLIGHTS WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.011.3595.3/10D0006840

X95 To roof wiringX121 Front left worklightX122 Rear left worklightX123 Rear right worklightX124 Front right worklight

411

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1

2

31

2

3

X123-X124X121-X122

F0027200

X121-X122X123-X124

GND7

F0027210

GND7

X95

F0027220

X95

WORKLIGHTS WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.011.3595.3/10

413

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1 221

23

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

3

C 1.5

AR 1.5

N 1.5 N1


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X129 X135

X75

X75

X135

X129

TO 0.011.3606.4

SCREENWASH PUMP WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.011.3743.3D0006820

X75 To roof wiringX129 Front windscreen washer pumpX135 Rear screen washer pum

414

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

V-N 1

R-N 1 G-R 1

M-N 1

(+MOT)

(GND)(AZZ.)

(+AZZ)

V-N 1

R-N 1

G-R 1

M-N 1

G-R

M-N

V-N

R-N

CABLAGGIO

WIRES

N

V-N

M

G

(+AZZ)

(AZZ.)

(+MOT)

(GND) MOTORINOTERGI

Wiper

CORRISPONDENZA TRA CAVI CABLAGGIO E CAVI TERGI ANTERIORE

R-N 1

V-N 1

M-N 1

G-R 1

X130 X92TO 0.011.3606.4

D0006830

WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.011.3597.3/33

X92 To roof wiringX130 Windscreen wiper motor

415

8

84Electrical system

Systems

WIRING FOR SCREENWASH PUMP & WINDSCREEN WIPER (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

1

32

CONNECTOR POSITIONS

1

2

3

X92

X75

F0027110

X92

X75

X130

F0027120

X130

X129

F0027130

X129

X129X135

0.011.3743.30.011.3597.3/33

417

8

84Electrical system

Systems

SPEAKER AND RADIO WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

M 1.5

R 1

HN 1

N 1.5

N 1.5

N 1

BN

1

B 1

C 1

CN

1

C 1

CN

1

N 1

2xR

1

N 1

.5

HN

1

N 1

.5

M 1

.5

N 1

.5

M 1

.5

BN

1

B 1

A 1

N 1

N 1

R 1

A 1

13

2

13

2

3

4

4 3 2 1

2

3

1

4

1 2

2

3

1

41 2


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X133

X125

X132

X86

X131

X127

X126 X83

X101

GND7

X83

X101

X133X132

X86

X131

X125

X127

X126

GND7

TO 0.011.3606.4

0.011.3596.3/30D0006810

X83 ClockX86 RadioX101 To roof wiringX125 Rear screen wiper motorX126 Connector

X127 Rotating beaconX131 RadioX132 Left speakerX133 Right speaker

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

419

SPEAKER AND RADIO WIRING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

1

2

3

GND7

X101

F0027140

X101

GND7

X132-X133

F0027150

X132-X133

X125

F0027160

X125

421

8

84Electrical system

Systems

2

1

1 2

4

6

3

5

4

5

6

X127

F0027170

X127

X126

F0027180

X126

X83X86

X131

F0027190

X86

X131

X83


0.011.3596.3/30

423

8

84Electrical system

Systems

3

1 2

1

2

124

32

1

R 10

50A

1 212

X113

X106

X91

X39

B+

X108X109

X37X111

B-

X108

X111

X103-30

TO 010.2558.1010.2562.1

TO 0.011.3606.4

TO 0.011.3606.4

HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

0.011.3761.3/30D0007210

B+ Heater alternator (+)B– Heater alternator (–)X37 Starter motorX39 To central wiringX91 To heater power supply wiringX103-30 To roof wiring (X103)X106 Heater resistanceX108 Connector X111 ConnectorX113 To heater or air conditioning wiring

424

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

GR 1

B 1

1 2

G-R 1

B 1

3

1 2

12

NL 1

N 16 N 16

N 16 N 16

L 1

12

12

43

21

B 1

NL 1

GR 1

L 1

R 4

LB 1

VN 1.5

R 10

VN 1.5

LB 1

R 4

R 10


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

X113

X106

X91

X108

X109

X39

B-

B+

X108

X103-30

X111 X37X111

D0006710

HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)

0.011.3761.3/30

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

425


1

2

3

X91

X103-30

F0026840

X103-30

X91

X113

F0026850

X113

X106

F0026860

X106

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

426

4

5

6

X106

F0026870

X106

X39

X111

F0026880

X111

X37X37

X39

X108

B+

F0026890

B+

X108

B-B-

427

8

84Electrical system

Systems

43

21

57

6

7X109

F0028720

X109

X108X108

HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.011.3761.3/30

429

8

84Electrical system

Systems

A B

1 2 3 4 5 6

12

34

5

85 86 30 87 87a 85 86 30 87 87b 85 86 30 87 87B4 3 2 1

54

32

1

B A

B A

1 2

BA

54

32

1

B A

B A

BA

12

34

56

78

910

1112

X113

X157 X147 X146 X93

X145

X154

X136

X153

X152

X152

X149

X151

X150

X150X137

X148

TO 0.011.3761.3

TO 0.011.3606.4

HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

0.010.2558.1D0007850

X93 To heater power supply wiringX113 To roof wiringX136 Heater control unitX137 Heater air temperature sensorX145 Heater control potentiometer

X146 Control relay for maximum fan speed X147 Control relay for alternator excitationX148 Resistor for left heater fanX149 Resistor for right heater fanX150 Connector

X151 Left heater fanX152 ConnectorX153 Right heater fanX154 Fan speed selector switchX157 Relay for 3rd fan speed and air conditioning on

430

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS T ABLE

Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/V iolet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Y ellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

30 85 86 87 87b

I II III IV C

M

M3085868787b

B 2

.5

N 2

.5

BR

2.5

N 2

.5

BR

2

AR

2

V 1

.5

A1

BR

2.5

R2.

5

N0.

5

B 1

.5

C 6

V0.

5

CB

0.5

H 0

.5

C 0

.5

A0.

5

Z 0

.5

Z 0

.5

H 0

.5

CB

0.5

V 0

.5

A0.

5

LN

0.5

LN

0.5

GR

0.5

GR

0.5

L0.

5 N 6

C 6

L 0.5

GR 1

LN 1

C 4

S 1

.5

N 0

.5

GL

2

AR

2

R 1

C 1

.5

ZB

0.5

B 1

B 1

LR

2

S 1

.5

B 1

.5

C 2

.5

R 2

GL

2

V 1

.5

A1R 1

.5R

1.5

N 2

.5

9

A 1

.5

Z 0

.5

Z B

0.5

Z 0

.5

8 12 6 10 3 4 5 1 2 7 11

L 0.5

GR 1

LN 1

B 1

30 85 86 87 87b

B 1

X151 X148X146

X145X137

X136

X93

X113

X157X147X154X149X153

X152

X150

D0007840

HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)

0.010.2558.1

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

431

POSITIONOF HEATER CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB

1

2

3

X145

X154

F0028300

X154

X145

X157

F0028570

X157

X147X147

X146X146

X113

X93

F0028330

X93

X113

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

432

4

5

6

X151-X153

X148-X149

F0028340

X151-X153

X148-X149

X150-152

F0028350

X150-152

X137

F0028360

X137

433

8

84Electrical system

Systems

12

3

4

5

67

7

X136

F0028370

X136

HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.010.2558.1

435

8

84Electrical system

Systems

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

A B 1 2 3

12

34

5

85 86 30 87 87a 85 86 30 87 87b

54

32

1

B A

B A

BA

54

32

1B A

B A

BA

12

34

56

78

910

1112

X113

X157 X147X93

X154

X136

X153

X152

X152

X149

X151

X150

X150

X148

43

21

X146 X156

85 86 30 87 87a85 86 30 87 87b

12

34

56

X145

X158

12

X94

12

X137

X159

TO 0.011.3606.4

TO 0.011.3606.4

TO 0.011.3761.3

0.010.2562.1D0007820

X93 To heater power supply wiringX94 To roof wiringX113 To roof wiringX136 Heater control unitX137 Heater air temperature sensorX145 Heater control potentiometerX146 Control relay for maximum fan speed

X147 Control relay for alternator excitationX148 Resistor for left heater fanX149 Resistor for right heater fanX150 ConnectorX151 Left heater fanX152 ConnectorX153 Right heater fan

X154 Fan speed selector switchX156 Relay for1st fan speed and air conditioning onX157 Relay for 3rd fan speed and air conditioning onX158 Air conditioning control switchX159 Air conditioning thermostat

436

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS T ABLE

Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/V iolet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Y ellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

30 85 86 87 87b

I II III IV C

M

M3085868787b

B 2

.5

N 2

.5

BR

2.5

N 2

.5

BR

2

AR

2

V 1

.5

A1

BR

2.5

R2.

5

N0.

5

B 1

.5

C 6

V0.

5

CB

0.5

H 0

.5

C 0

.5

A0.

5

Z 0

.5

Z 0

.5

H 0

.5

CB

0.5

V 0

.5

A0.

5

LN

0.5

LN

0.5

GR

0.5

GR

0.5

L0.

5 N 6

C 6

L 0.5

GR 1

LN 1

C 4

S 1

.5

N 0

.5

GL

2

AR

2

R 1

C 1

.5

ZB

0.5

B 1

B 1

LR

2

S 1

.5

B 1

.5

C 2

.5

R 2

GL

2

V 1

.5

A1R 1

.5R

1.5

N 2

.5

9

A 1

.5

V 0.5

Z 0

.5

Z B

0.5

Z 0

.5

8 12 6 10 3 4 5 1 2 7 11

L 0.5

GR 1

LN 1

B 1

30 85 86 87 87b

B 0

.5

VN

0.5

A 0

.5

B 1

30 85 86 87

GB

1

GB 1

B 0.5

V 0

.5

N 0

.5

C 1

.5

VN

0.5

X151 X148X146

X145X137

X136

X93

X113

X94

X159X158X156X157X147X154X149X153

X152

X150

D0007810

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)

0.010.2562.1

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

437

POSITION OF AIR CONDITIONING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

1

2

3

X158

F0028310

X158

X145

X154

F0028300

X154

X145

X156

X157

F0028320

X157

X146X146

X147X147

X156

Systems

Electrical system

8

84

438

4

5

6

X113

X93

F0028330

X93

X113

X151-X153

X148-X149

F0028340

X151-X153

X148-X149

X150-152

F0028350

X150-152

439

8

84Electrical system

Systems

1

23

4

5

6

78

9

7

8

9

X137

F0028360

X137

X136

F0028370

X136

X159

F0028380

X159

AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

0.010.2562.1

441

8

84Electrical system

Systems

85 87

86

87

30

ITALAMEC 037ITALAMEC 037

86 30

8785 87

BA BA2 3 4

876

1

51 4

2 63

X114 X115

X102

X116

X117a X117b

TO 0.011.3606.4

AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)

0.011.3610.3/20D0006860

X102 To roof wiringX114 Relay for supplementary air conditioning fanX115 Relay for air conditioning fanX116 Air conditioning pressure switchX117a Air conditioning fanX117b Supplementary air conditioning fan

442

Systems

Electrical system

8

84


Rosso/Red

Rosa/Pink

Nero/Black

Viola/Violet

Verde/Green

Marrone/Brown

R

M

S

N

Z

V

H

C

G

L

B

A

Grigio/Gray

Giallo/Yellow

Blu/Dark Blue

Bianco/White

Azzurro/Blue

Arancio/Orange

30

8785 86

87

CB 1

A 1.5

AN 1.5

R 1

N 1

V 1

VN

1

CB

1

AN 1.5

N 1

N 1.5

V 1

VN 1

A 1

.5

N 2

.5

C 1

85

L 1.5

87

87 86

AN 1.5

R 1

30

N 1

.5

L 1.

5

AN 1.5

C 1

N 1.5

N 1.5

A B BA

R 1

R 1

AN 1.5

N 1.5

1 2 3

765

4

8X102

X114 X115

X116X117a X117b

3 2 6

41

D0006870

AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)

0.011.3610.3/20

443

8

84Electrical system

Systems

3

213

AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)

1

2

3

X114

X115F0027080

X115

X114

X102

F0027090

X102

X117b

F0028190

X117bX117aX117a

X116X116

0.011.3610.3/20

Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number2772)


The electrical system is fully equipped for use on the road, with sidelights, main/dipped beam headlamps, direction indi-cators doubling as hazard warning lights, and work lights, all fully in compliance with legal requirements as embodied inthe highway code.

There are four essential components and assemblies: battery, alternator, starter motor, and auxiliaries.

The system operates at a nominal 12 Volts (the maximum voltage in operation is 14,3÷0,5 V).

The battery charge level is indicated by a relative meter on the instrument panel.

Specifications

batterytype maintenance freevoltage V 12

discharge capacity over 20 hours Ah 100rated current A (470)

starter motorvoltage V 12

nominal rated power cv 4 (3 kW)

electromagnetic control electro-magnetic with translation and rotation of pinion

alternatorRECHARGE SYSTEMcode 65A AA 125 R 14V 65A (MARELLI)

K1-14V 65A 20 (BOSCH)AA K3563 14V 65A (ISKRA)

85A AA K5114 14V 85A (ISKRA)HEATING SYSTEMcode 70A AA5112 12V 70A (ISKRA)type three-phase

nominal rated voltage V 12pulley nut tightening torque kgm 5,5 (62 Nm)

445

84

8Systems

Electrical system

GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

— Disconnect any electronic equipment from the system when the tractor is placed in any environment where tempe-ratures are likely to exceed 80 °C.

— Remove battery connections when carrying out servicing or repair operations on the electrical system.

— Avoid overvoltages in the electrical system. Always remove battery and alternator connections before carrying outwelding operations or when recharging the battery from the mains.

— Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running.

— In the event that the battery needs topping up, use only distilled or demineralized water; top up only when the batteryis AT REST and at AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (allow time for cooling after operation and following recharge).

— Never carry out servicing operations on the electric heating system with the engine running.

— When washing the tractor, ensure that the alternator and starter motor are well protected. These components mustnot be sprayed or splashed directly with water.

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCIDENT AND INJURY

WHEN COMMENCING ANY KIND OF WORK:

— Turn off the main ignition switch.

— Disconnect the battery; remember that electric shocks discharged through the human body will damage pacema-kers.

— The battery generates powerful and inflammable gases when recharging, which if ignited can cause the battery itselfto explode.

— Do not make temporary or makeshift connections to the battery, as these can cause dangerous sparks.

— The electrolyte in the battery is a solution of dilute sulphuric acid; if splashed on the skin, wash straight away withplenty of water and sodium bicoarbonate.

— Seek attention immediately from a doctor if electrolyte is splashed into the eyes.

— Never allow the battery near a naked flame.

— Keep a safe distance from a recharging battery when testing or measuring, and always wear suitable eye protection.

— Make certain that the electrical system and all its components are inspected and serviced periodically; any faultsmust be eliminated without delay, and parts subject to everyday wear replaced at the recommended intervals.

— Ensure that trailers are fitted with regulation lights.

IMPORTANT REMINDERS

The maker declines all liability in respect of any damages resulting from operations performed other than in the recom-mended manner and/or by unskilled hands.

— To ensure smooth operation of the machine, use only genuine replacement parts.

446

84

8 Systems

Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (under s.n. 1016) 70- (under s.n. 2772)

JUMP START UTILIZING ANOTHER BATTERY

NB: Emergency starting with the aid of a battery charger is not recommended.

PRECAUTIONSThe battery may be that of another tractor, but must in any event have the same rated voltage (and therefore an identicalnumber of cells).

1 - Make certain the two vehicles are not in contact with one another.

2 - Ensure that all auxiliary services are switched off.

3- Make certain the flat battery is securely connected to earth, that the filler caps are properly tightened and that theelectrolyte is up to the correct level.

PROCEDURE:A - Connect the two batteries as indicated in figure 1 (part A).

B - If the jump battery is that of another tractor, start the engine and run at approximately 1/4 of full throttle.

C - Turn the ignition key to start the engine of the stranded tractor, following the procedure given in the operator’shandbook.

D - Remove the jump leads following the sequence as indicated in figure 1 (part B).

A - connection of leads to the 2 batteries B - disconnection of leads from the 2 batteries

Separate connected batter.Batteries

STEP 1 STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 2

STEP 6

STEP 3

connected batteries separate batteries

Fig. 1 - Diagram of battery connections and relative leads.

447

84

8Systems

AGROPLUS 60 (under s.n. 1016) 70- (under s.n. 2772) Electrical system

PRACTICAL HINTS

Before installing a battery, and periodically thereafter:— Check over the electrical system, giving particular attention to connections; make certain there are no traces of oxi-

dation and that there is no loss of current.— Check the alternator and the voltage regulator setting. If the charging voltage is inordinately high, distilled water will

be consumed at a high rate, whereas a low voltage will not charge the battery sufficiently.— Check the charge level of a new battery with a density indicator or voltmeter; if the density is less than 1.25 kg/l or the

no-load voltage after at least 3 - 4 hours at rest is lower than 12.5 V, proceed to recharge.Install the battery in the machine with care, utilizing the anchorages provided.

When connecting the battery to the system:— secure the clamp.— before connecting the negative, make certain there is no sparking on contact with the corresponding terminal of the

battery. Sparks are due to insulation defects that must be located and eliminated.— Tighten the clamps on the terminals, smearing with petroleum jelly.

TABLE OF WIRING COLOUR CODES

BK=BLACK EXEMPLE:BL=BLUEBR=BROWN DK BL/WH 1 680DK BL=BLACK/BLUEDK GN=BLACK/GREEN DK BL/WH = DARK BLUE WITH WHITE LINEGN=GREENGY=GREY 1 = CROSS SECTION OF WIRE (mm)OR=ORANGE 680 = LENGTH OF WIRE (mm)PK=PINKRD=REDVL=VIOLETWH=WHITEYL=YELLOW

EXAMPLE OF CONNECTORS (CAN BE 4-PIN, 6-PIN OR 8-PIN)

448

84

8 Systems


449

84

8Systems


RECHARGE SYSTEM

65A ALTERNATOR

ISKRA AA 125R 14V 65A

RECHARGE SYSTEM

65A ALTERNATOR

BOSCH K1-14V 65A 20

RECHARGE SYSTEM

65A ALTERNATOR

ISKRA AAK3563 14V 65A

450

84

8 Systems


STARTING SYSTEM

EV 12V 3.0JF 12V 3.1 KWKW

HEATING SYSTEM

70A ALTERNATOR


RECHARGE SYSTEM

85A ALTERNATOR


Fig. 2 - Check panel with digital display

Ignition switch

Electtrical system deenergized - key removable(On version with electronic RPM control, the engine shuts off automatically;On versio with machanical throttle linkage, the engine is stopped by pulling the knob on the right of the in-strument panel).

Active electric circyit: - Lamps indicating operation of the alternator and low engine oil pressure light up onthe instrument panel. A lamp indicating pre-heating lights up when ambient temperature is below 10°C; waituntil the lamp has gone out (approx. 55 seconds) before turning the key to the next position. If the ignitionkey is turned to the start position with the thermostart indicator still alight, the heater cuts out and power issupplied to the starter motor.

Engine starting

451

84

8Systems


IGNITION KEY

VENTILATION CONTROLfor tractors equipped withstandard cab

PUSH BUTTON CONTROL

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS

452

84

8 Systems


PUSH BUTTON CONTROL

P.T.O. CLUTCHcod. 2.7659.108.0/10

DIFFERENTIAL LOCKcod. 008.1335.0

4WD COUPLERcod. 007.5945.0/20

PUSH BUTTON CONTROL

cod. 2.7659.138.0

SWITCH DIGITAL DISPLAY

453

84

8Systems


WARNING SWITCH

cod. 2.7659.080.0

WORK LIGHTS

FRONTcod. 2.7659.078.0

REARcod. 2.7659.079.0

SCREEN WASHER SWITCH

FRONTcod. 2.7659.145.0REARcod. 2.7659.146.0

BEACON PUSH BUTTON

cod. 2.7659.126.0

454

84

8 Systems


RELAY

cod. 2.7659.107.0

ELECTRONIC FLASHER UNIT

cod. 2.8639.004.0

455

84

8Systems


INTERIOR ROOF LIGHT COD. 2.8339.032.0

SWITCH CONTROLLING: differential lock - 4RM - 540 1000 rpm/min P.T.O. speed selector -Economy P.T.O. - Live P.t.o. - electric starter system.

cod. 2.7659.097.0

SWITCH FOR EMERGENCY BRAKE cod. 2.7659.129.0

456

84

8 Systems


Fuse box

457

84

8Systems


F1 - ThermostartF2 - Side/tail lights - hornF3 - Hazard warning lightsF4 - Work light - 12V socketF5 - Engine RPM control unitF6 - Thermostart/panel/HMLF7 - Engine STOPF8 - FlashersF9 - Side/tail lightF10 - Side/tail lightF11 - Dipped beamF12 - Main beam

F1 - Flasher unitF2 - RadioF3 - Air conditioningF4 - Blower/heaterF5 - Front wiperF6 - Rear wiperF7 - Front work lightsF8 - Rear work lights

tractor fuse box cab fuse box

Instrument panel with digital display

The basic panel is the same as described above, except that the dial is replaced by a 4-digit display showing:

— Lapsed time (hours)— Ground speed (speedometer)— P.T.O. speed— Trip meter (distance in metres)

There are also 4 high brightness Leds which indicate the function currently being displayed.Any specifications not individually listed below will be the same as for the basic panel.

OperationThe selection and content of the functions displayed are governed by pressing buttons, denoted P1, P2 and P3.

Button P1 - Red - Positioned to right of panel.Button P2 - Red - Positioned to right of panel.Button P3 - Red - Positioned near fuse box (cover must be removed to gain access).

Auxiliary electrical systems on (turn the ignition key to position ) the current total of working hours lapsed will bedisplayed.

Then, turn the ignition key to position , when the engine is started, the display sets itself to indicate ground speed(speedometer).

To display a function other than ground speed, simply press P1 repeatedly to select the function required.

1 - Lapsed work time indicated by 4 digits, to the nearest hour.

2 - Ground speed indicated by 3 digits, one of which after the decimal point (XX.X), in km/h. In the event that bigger orsmaller rear tyres are fitted, the new size must be entered (see directions point 5 page 373).

458

84

8 Systems


IMPORTANT: If a function other than speedometer is currently selected, the panel will revert automatically to displa-ying ground speed if 20 km/h is exceeded.

3 - P.T.O. speed is indicated by 4 digits (XXX0), in revolutions per minute.

4 - The trip meteruses 4 digits (XXXX), indicating the distance covered by the tractor in metres. The trip meter can bereset; this is done by selecting the function then pressing and holding P2 for at least 3 seconds, during which time the fi-gures will blink before returning to zero. If P2 is released before the 3 seconds have passed, there will be no reset.

5 - Entering the speed constant according to the tyre size.This operation becomes necessary only if the rear tyres are replaced with others of a different size.

With the engine at standstill and the ignition key in the off position , press and hold button P3 while turning the key

to the auxiliary position (without starting the engine), then release the button only when the tyre code appears inthe display. This code will correspond to the type of rear tyre currently fitted.Now press button P1 repeatedly to view the permissible tyre sizes, which will be displayed in sequence.When the size displayed matches that of the new tyres, press P3 again to memorize.If the key is returned to the off position without completing this last step, the tyre size code will not be updated.Listed below are the tyre options specified for the tractor. Each size has a relative display code which corresponds to thenumber of impulses per 100 metres picked up by the speedometer sensor.

Tyre Impulses for 100 metres

480/65 x 28110014.9 x 32

14.9 x 28

14.9 x 30 1058

420/70/30

16.9 x 281050480/70/28

540/65 x 28

12.4 x 36 1020

540/65 x 30105016.9 x 30

480/70/30

13.6 x 28 1153

380/70/28

420/70/24 1192

14.9 x 24

13.6. X 36 984

1- Diagnostics socket (on version with electronic RPM control only)

2 - Tyre size selection button (on version with the Instrument panelwith digital display)

A - Button P 1, used to selectthe function displayed - Colourred.The 3 available functions (spee-dometer, P.T.O. speed, trip me-ter) are displayed cyclically bypressing P1 repeatedly.The function selected is indicatedby a relative Led on the instru-ment panel.

B - Button P 2, used to reset thefunction selected - Colour redPress this to select another fun-ction.

459

84

8Systems


Operation of the broken belts alarm control unitIMPORTANT: (for tractors equipped with air conditioning) if the engine fan belt breaks:a safety device will activate the emergency warning light on the dashboard (red triangle) and a warning buzzer will so-und;

(on tractors also equipped with electronic governors) with the handbrake on, the engine will also stop.This control unit allows the operator to leave the tractor with the engine running.

The control unit acquires signals from the sensors and generates alarm conditions and may also stop the engine whennecessary.

control unit connections

INPUTS- engine oil pressure NOTE: the auxiliary input is optional. If it is not to be utilised,- alternator d+ leave the relative contact on the control unit free. This input- broken fanbelt sensor can be connected to a relay which connects the signal to- auxiliary input earth in the event an alarm.handbrake

OUTPUTS- control signal for engine oil pressure warning light- engine stop control signal- buzzer

Input and output operation

InputsInput D+ serves two functions:- alarms control enabling- alarms.When the engine is switched off, this signal is low to illuminate the alternator warning light. The control unit considersthe signal status low when it is below 3 volts. On starting the engine, this signal goes to +12 volts. If the signal voltage re-mains high (+12V) for 7 seconds, the control unit is enabled to check for alarm conditions.Once the alarm check has started, this input becomes itself a potential cause of an alarm; an alarm will be generated ifthe +12V is absent for at least 2 seconds.If the alternator is faulty, the signal D+ will never be activated and consequently control unit operation will not be initiated.

The broken fanbelt input is connected to a sensor on the cooling fan on air-cooled engines.The broken fanbelt alarm is activated when a frequency below 10 Hz ( 10 pulses/second) is detected on the input.

The oil pressure input is considered activated when it is low (earth) for at least 2 seconds, and deactivated when it stayshigh (12V) for the same duration.

The auxiliary input is considered activated when it remains low (earth) for at least 2 seconds, and deactivated when itstays high (12V) for the same duration.

The handbrake input is used by the control unit to determine the type of output in the event of an alarm condition.

OutputsThe engine stop command output is activated when one off the alarm inputs is activated while the handbrake is on. Thecontrol unit is capable of determining if this output is connected or not.

The engine oil pressure warning light is used to generate a diagnostic code if the alarm is activated when the handbrakeis released.

If the alarm is caused by the absence of engine pressure, the warning light will illuminate steadily.

460

84

8 Systems


The buzzer is used to alert the operator to the status of the control unit.The buzzer emits three different signals:- two short acoustic signals (0.3 seconds) each time the handbrake is released to indicate that the control unit is inalarm signalling condition (diagnostic code on oil pressure warning light) but without generating the engine stop output.- one long acoustic signal (1 second) each time the handbrake is applied to indicate that the control unit will activate theengine stop output in the event of an alarm.- intermittent signal ( 3 Hz) to signal that the control unit has activated the engine stop output.

OPERATIONThe control unit only operates after the engine has been started. The control unit uses the D+ signal of the alternator todetermine whether the engine is running.This signal must stay at high voltage for a duration of 7 seconds before control unit operation is initiated.If there is an alternator fault (signalled by the alternator warning light staying on when the engine is started), control unitoperation will not be initiated.The start of control unit operation is signalled by an acoustic signal which will depend on the handbrake status:

- two short acoustic signals (approx. 0.3 sec) id the handbrake is released.

- one long signal (1 sec.) if the handbrake is on.

At this point, the control unit will monitor the status of the broken fanbelt input, the oil pressure input, the auxiliary inputand the D+ input.

If one of these inputs is activated, the control unit will signal an alarm.There are two levels of alarm:

Level 1 alarm - handbrake released.

Level 1 alarm monitoring is activated when the handbrake is released, and is signalled by two short acoustic signals(0.3 seconds).If the handbrake is not on:

- and the fanbelt is broken, the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 2.

- and the auxiliary input is activated, the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 4.

- and the D+ input voltage is low (earth), the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 3.

- and the oil pressure is low, the engine oil pressure warning light will illuminate steadily (controlled by the pressureswitch).

The warning light will stop flashing the moment the alarm condition ceases to exist.

Level 2 alarm 2 - handbrake on.

Level 2 alarm monitoring is activated when the handbrake is applied, and is signalled by a long acoustic signal (1 se-cond).

If the handbrake is on:

- and any alarm is activated, the control unit will generate the ENGINE STOP signal. Consequently the engine oil pres-sure warning light will be steadily illuminated (as when the engine is stopped, the oil pressure will fall and thus the war-ning light will come on) unless there is no connection between the control unit and the engine stop device.The control unit will signal the ENGINE STOP condition with an intermittent acoustic signal (approx. 3 signals per se-cond).

To deactivate the ENGINE STOP, switch off and then restart the engine.

461

84

8Systems


ENGINE STOP DEVICES

The alarm control unit can generate an output signal to control a device which stops the engine.The alarm control unit output can be connected to an engine control unit type 2MH (manufacturer’s code for control unitwith 26 contact connector) and is also capable of operating a relay with currents up to 250mA.

ENGINE STOP OPERATION WITH A TYPE 2MH ENGINE CONTROL UNIT

The operation of the engine control unit in the presence of a STOP signal is very simple.

The control unit starts to monitor the STOP signal 2 seconds after the engine has been started, i.e. when it has attained idlingspeed.

The control unit checks for a STOP signal which remains active for at least 1 second.

On detection of a STOP signal, the control unit switches off the engine.

The engine control unit signals operation of the engine stop by 7 flashes of the HOLD led on the keypad.

The engine control unit will ignore the STOP signal if the engine is switched off. For example, if the engine stalls (underexcessive load), a STOP signal may be generated but it will be ignored.

Using the ALL ROUND TESTER it is possible to check that the STOP signal is connected correctly.One of the following messages will also appear on the monitor:

1) STOP NOT CONNECTED2) STOP CONNECTED3) STOP ACTIVE

On models equipped with STOP control units, the valid messages are nos. 2 and 3. Should message no. 1 “STOP NOTCONNECTED” appear, check the connection between pin 5 of the alarm control unit and pin 11 of the engine controlunit.

If none of the above messages appears, this means that the engine control unit does not have the correct program.

DIAGNOSTICS

To enable the operator to identify the problem which caused the intervention of the engine stop, the control unit providesa diagnostic code by means of the oil pressure warning light, but only when the handbrake is released.The diagnostic code is only given after the engine has been re-started and the control unit has given the first acoustic si-gnal, typically 7 seconds after the alternator warning light goes out.The diagnostic code consists of a series of flashes each with a duration of 0.3 seconds at 1 second intervals.The oil pressure input does not provide a diagnostic code as the illumination of the warning light is forced by the pressu-re switch.

462

84

8 Systems


Diagnostic codes

Below is a list of the diagnostic codes and their meanings:

flashes

WARNING LIGHT

2 Broken fanbelt sensor3 Alternator signal D+4 Auxiliary input5 Engine STOP output

example of code 2

ON

OFF

Description of faults

This chapter provides useful information for fault tracing.

Code 2 - Broken fanbelt sensor

This fault is signalled when the input signal from the fanbelt sensor fails to arrive at the control unit.If this fault occurs :- Check that the battery voltage is present between pins 1 and 2 of the sensor connector.- Check that pin 3 of the sensor connector is connected to pin 6 of the alarm control unit.

Code 3 - Alternator signal D+

This fault is signalled when the alternator signal D+ is no longer present after the alarm control unit has entered intooperation.If this fault occurs:- Check the alternator warning light: if on, the problem concerns the alternator itself; if off, the wire carrying the signal tothe control unit may have come disconnected.

Code 4 - Auxiliary input

This fault is signalled when the voltage on pin 8 of the control unit falls below 12V.This input is not currently utilised, consequently if this fault is signalled, check that pin 8 of the control unit is at +12V. Ifnecessary, remove the contact from the connector and test again.

Code 5 - Engine STOP output

This fault is signalled when the control unit does not detect any connection to its STOP output.If this fault occurs:- Check that pin 5 of the alarm control unit is connected to pin 11of the engine control unit.

463

84

8Systems


Broken belt alarm system and diagnostic codes. (If the light stays on continuously this indicates low engine oil pressure).

A - AlternatorB - Engine oil pressureC - Fan pick-upD - Brake fluid levelE - HandbrakeF - Alarm control unitG - Engine control unit

H - Electro stopI - Connection for engines with electronic governorL - Diagnostic codesM - N* of flashes2 - Broken belt sensor3 - Alternator signal5 - Engine stop output

464

84

8 Systems


ELECTRICAL WIRING

TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM TAV.1

KEY TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM -

TRACTOR WIRING

COMPLETE CENTRAL UNDERBODY WIRING TAV. 2

COMPLETE FRONT WIRING TAV. 3

GEARBOX WIRING TAV. 4

BATTERY WIRING TAV. 5

POWERSHIFT CONTROL WIRING TAV. 6

CAB WIRING

CAB WIRING DIAGRAM TAV. 7

CENTRAL WIRING TAV. 8

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING TAV. 9

WORK LIGHTS - SCREEN WIPER - ROTATING LIGHTWIRING TAV. 10

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WIRING TAV. 11

AIR HEATING WIRING TAV. 12

SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING TAV. 13

FRONT SCREEN WIPER WIRING TAV. 14

CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING TAV. 15

FUEL LEVEL SENDER TAV. 16

465

84

8Systems



466

84

8 Systems


467

TAV. 1 - TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

468

TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

KEY TO FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1 - PREHEATING SOLENOID VALVE2 - STARTING ENABLING SENSOR3 - STOP SENSOR4 - STOP LIGHTS5 - STOP LIGHTS6 - GLOWPLUG7 - GLOWPLUG WARNING LIGHT

17 - FUEL RESERVE WARNING LIGHT18 - FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR19 - SENSOR FOR FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR20 - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR21 - OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR22 - 540 RPM REAR P.T.O. INDICATOR LIGHT23 - 540 RPM P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT SENSOR24 - 1000 RPM REAR P.T.O. LIGHT25 - 1000 RPM P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT SENSOR30 - 4WD INDICATOR LIGHT32 - TRAILER BRAKING INDICATOR LIGHT33 - TRAILER BRAKING SENSOR34 - CHRONOMETER-TACHOMETER35 - ALTERNATOR WARNING LIGHT36 - HYDRAULIC SERVICES OIL FILTER WARNING LIGHT37 - HYDRAULIC SERVICES OIL FILTER SENSOR40 - AIR FILTER WARNING LIGHT41 - AIR FILTER SENSOR42 - BRAKE OIL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT43 - BRAKE OIL LEVEL SENSOR44 - REAR P.T.O. IN OPERATION WARNING LIGHT45 - SOLENOID VALVES OIL SENSOR46 -SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. INDICATOR LIGHT47 - SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. SENSOR48 - ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT49 - ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE SENSOR50 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT51 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH52 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID VALVE53 - 4WD ENGAGEMENT SWITCH54 - 4WD ENGAGEMENT SOLENOID VALVE55 - FRONT P.T.O. CONTROL SWITCH56 - P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT INDICATOR LIGHT57 - FRONT P.T.O. SOLENOID VALVE59 - REAR P.T.O. SOLENOID VALVE60 - REAR P.T.O. CONTROL SWITCH/ STARTING ENABLE

61 - ECONOMIC P.T.O. SELECTION INDICATOR LIGHT62 - ECONOMIC P.T.O. SENSOR63 - HANDBRAKE SENSOR66 - SIDE LIGHTS INDICATOR LIGHT67 - LEFT FRONT SIDE LIGHT68 - RIGHT FRONT SIDE LIGHT69 - RIGHT REAR SIDE LIGHT70 - LEFT REAR SIDE LIGHT71 - NUMBER PLATE LIGHT72 - RIGHT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT73 - LEFT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT74 - LEFT MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT75 - RIGHT MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT76 - MAIN BEAM WARNING LIGHT77 - HORN83 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT84 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT -1ST TRAILER85 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT - 2ND TRAILER86 - LEFT FRONT DIRECTION INDICATOR87 - LEFT REAR DIRECTION INDICATOR88- RIGHT FRONT DIRECTION INDICATOR89 - RIGHT REAR DIRECTION INDICATOR91 - WORK LIGHT93 - REAR WORK LIGHTS94 - FLASHER SOCKET

A - IGNITION SWITCHB - STARTER MOTORC - ELECTRONIC GOVERNORD - FANBELT ALARM CONTROL UNITE - 65A ALTERNATOR WITH SOCKET WF - LIGHTS, DIRECTION INDICATORS AND HORN CONTROLG - DIRECTION INDICATORS CONTROL UNITH - DIRECTION INDICATORS CONTROLSI - TRAILER SOCKETN - PRE-HEATING CONTROL UNITO - HIGH-MEAN-LOW CONTROL UNIT

R1 - PRE-HEATING RELAYR2 - STARTING ENABLEMENT RELAY

469

TRACTOR WIRING TAV. 2 - COMPLETE CENTRAL UNDERBODY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

470

TRACTOR WIRING TAV. 3 - COMPLETE FRONT WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

471

TRACTOR WIRING TAV. 4 - GEARBOX WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

472

TRACTOR WIRING TAV. 5 - BATTERY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

1200 3 CIL.1300 4 CIL.

473

TRACTOR WIRING TAV. 6 - POWERSHIFT WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

474

CAB WIRING TAV. 7 - CAB WIRING DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

7 - HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

AOPTIONAL CLIMATE CONTROL CONNECTORB POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR

R OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEATER CONNECTOR

1 - FLASHING SWITCHES2 - FLASHING3 - COURTESY LIGHT4 - 12V RADIO SOCKET5 - CONDITIONER RELAY6 - CONDENSER FAN8 - PRESSURE SWITCH9 - COMPRESSOR (R 132A)

10 - HEATING ALTERNATOR11 - SCREEN WIPER SWITCH

12 - FRONT SCREEN WIPER MOTOR13 - FRONT SCREEN WASH PUMP14 - SCREEN WASH BUTTON15 - SCREEN WIPER SWITCH16 - REAR WIPER MOTOR17 - REAR SCREEN WASH PUMP18 - FRONT WORK LIGHTS SWITCH19 - FRONT WORK LIGHTS20 - REAR WORK LIGHTS SWITCH21 - REAR WORK LIGHTS

KEY TO COMPONENTS

475

CAB WIRING TAV. 8 - CAB WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

476

CAB WIRING TAV. 9 - CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

KEY TO CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

E ELECTRONIC HEATING CONTROL UNITN NTC TEMPERATURE SENSORP FAN SPEED CONTROL RESISTORC FAN SPEED CONTROL SWITCHRA HEATING RELAYRC AIR CONDITIONING RELAYA ELECTRIC HEATING ALTERNATORP HEATER ELEMENTF POWER SUPPLY FUSET AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE SWITCHCO COMPRESSORS THERMOSTATR OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEATING CONNECTORB POWER SUPPLY CONNECTORA OPTIONAL CLIMATE CONTROL CONNECTOR

477

CAB WIRING TAV. 10 - WORK LIGHTS - SCREEN WIPER - ROTATING LIGHTWIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

478

CAB WIRING TAV. 11 - AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

479

CAB WIRING TAV. 12 - AIR HEATING WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

480

CAB WIRING TAV. 13 - SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

481

CAB WIRING TAV. 15 - CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

CAB WIRING TAV. 14 - FRONT SCREEN WIPER WIRING

482

CAB WIRING TAV. 16 - FUEL LEVEL SENDER - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)

APPENDIX

Power Lift Electronic Control Unit

TESTER manual

CONTENTS

Functional diagram .............................................................................................................................III

Presentation screen ...........................................................................................................................LV

Initialisation menu................................................................................................................................V

1 Main menu .......................................................................................................................................VI1 Calibrations menu..........................................................................................................................VII2 Monitor menu...................................................................................................................................X

1 Lift menu......................................................................................................................................XI2 Draft menu.................................................................................................................................XIII3 Position menu ...........................................................................................................................XIV

3 Tests menu ...................................................................................................................................XV1 Sensors menu...........................................................................................................................XVI2 Power supply menu .................................................................................................................XVII3 Inputs menu ............................................................................................................................XVIII

4 Alarms menu .................................................................................................................................XX

Scope

The scope of this document is:

- to present the diagnostic information that can be accessed through the All Round Tester (ART®);

- to list the alarm conditions that the electronic control unit is able to diagnose, along with the possible causes of thealarms and the relative actions of the electronic control unit.

II

Appendix

Power lift tester

Functional diagram of the lift ECU.

1 - Vdc A - UP solenoid valve

2 - UP solenoid valve B - DOWN solenoid valve

3 - DOWN solenoid valve C - Tester IN/OUT

4 - GND D - Position sensor

5 - Sensor Vdc E - Draft sensor

6 - Position F - Lowering speed

7 - Draft G - Maximum height

8 - Speed limit H - DRAFT/POSITION MIX control

9 - Maximum height I - Main control

10 - Mix L - UP/DOWN control

11 - Main control

12 - ISO 9141

III

Appendix

Power lift tester

REAR LIFT ECU

1 2

EVup

1 2 56 10 11

Ele

ctr

ova

lve

UP

+V

cc

Se

nso

rs

Po

sitio

n

GN

D

3 7

Sensor

Position

31

V

2

Vcc

2

EVdown

1

Ele

ctr

ova

lve

DO

WN

Sensor

Draft

2

V

1 3

Dra

ft

Speed

Lowering

21 3

L.

Sp

ee

d

Maximum

Height

1 2 3

Ma

xH

.

Mix

Draft/Pos

1 2 3

Mix

Main

Control

1 2 3

Ma

inC

on

tro

l

8 9

+ -

4 12

ISO

91

41

Lock/Alarm

1K2

Down/Up

Control lever

Tester

In/Out

Up

Exte

rnu

p

Exte

rnd

ow

n

PIN OUT

Down

A B C D E F G H I L

Presentation screen

The presentation screen displays preliminary information about the electronic control unit:

� Software version� Date of software issue

The screen appears as follows:

L i f t

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

S o f t w a r e X . x x x

D a t e d d / m m / y y

P a r a m e t e r s f o r

T R A C T O R x x x

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

[ C ] C H A N G E P A R A M .

[ E ] C O N T I N U E

Where:Version software versionDate: date of software issue

The various functions are described below:

Pressing "C"displays the initialisation menu for the tractor type:- lift for tractor 10N (Golden)- lift for tractor 10S (Dorado)As described on page V

Pressing "E"displays the menu described on page vi

IV

Appendix

Power lift tester

Initialisation menu

From the Initialisation menu you can configure the lift in accordance wit the type of tractor.

The menu is displayed on the ART as follows:

I N I T I A L I S A T I O N

C u r r e n t

P a r a m e t e r s

f o r 1 0 X

C h a n g e

P a r a m e t e r s

1 - L i f t f o r 1 0 N

2 - L i f t f o r 1 0 S

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

[ C ] C O N T I N U E

Where:

Current parameters defines the configuration currently saved in memory

To change and save the configuration, press "1" or "2".

Press "1" to configure the lift for the 10N tractor. (Golden)Press "2" to configure the lift for the 10S tractor. (Dorado)

Press "C" to pass to the main menu.

V

Appendix

Power lift tester

1 - Main menu

From this menu you can select the component on which diagnosis is to be performed or display the general list of alarmsdetected up until that point.

The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:

M A I N M E N U

1 C a l i b r a t i o n s

2 M o n i t o r

3 T e s t s

4 A l a r m s

S E L E C T

E E X I T

The various menus and submenus are described below.

VI

Appendix

Power lift tester

1 - Calibrations menu

From this menu you can calibrate the lift system.


C a l i b r a t i o n s M e n u

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 - M a x . h e i g h t

P e r s o n a l i s a t i o n

L i f t i n g s p e e d

2 - L i f t i n g s p e e d

[ E ] E X I T

These operations are to be performed with the lift lock released.

The various calibration functions are described below.

VII

Appendix

Power lift tester

Maximum height calibration:

On pressing "1" on the ART, the following screen is displayed:

1 - M a x . H e i g h t

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C u r r e n t : x x x x

N e w : x x x x

[ A ] C a n c e l

[ C ] C O N F I R M

Where:

Current The position value between 0 and 1000 saved in memory.New The position value between 0 and 1000 read by the position sensor.

Operation: To decontrol the lifter pressing for 3 second the key of command basculante on the position UP.With the keys of controls manual, to position the lifter to the maximum desired height.

To press the key [E] on the tester and the key [C] to confirm the new value.

Press:

� "A" to cancel the operation;� "C" to save the new value in the Eeprom.

VIII

Appendix

Power lift tester

Implement lifting speed

This parameter regulates the speed at which the lift is raised when using the manual controls only.

On pressing "2" on the ART, the following screen is displayed:

2 - L i f t s p e e d

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C u r r e n t : x x x x

N e w : x x x x

[ A ] C a n c e l

[ C ] C O N F I R M

Where:

Current The speed value between 300 and 400 saved in memory.New The actual speed value between 300 and 400.

Press:

� "A" to cancel the operation;� "C" to save the new value in the Eeprom.

IX

Appendix

Power lift tester

2 - Monitor menu

From this menu you can display the operating parameters of the lift system.


M o n i t o r M e n u

1 L i f t

2 D r a f t

3 P o s i t i o n

[ E ] E X I T

The various functions are described below.

X

Appendix

Power lift tester

2 - Monitor Menu

1 - Lift menu

From this menu you can display the following values:Set PointPositionDraftMaximum height


L i f t

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

P o t e n t i o m e t e r s

S e t P o i n t . . . . x x x x

M a x . h e i g h t . . . x X

L o w . s p e e d . . . . x X

M i x . . . . . . . . . x x x X

S E N S O R S

P o s i t i o n . . . . . x x X

D r a f t . . . . . . . x x x X

P W M O U T P U T

P w m x x X

L I F T S T A T U S . .

S t a t u s . . . . . . . . x X

E E X I T

POTENTIOMETERSSet Point Reference value for automatic control of the lift.

On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 1000(this operation must be performed with the lift lock released).The value modifies the positions of equilibrium during the operation in control.

Max. height Represents the maximum height to which the lift can be raised.On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 100.

Lowering speed Represents the lowering speed as a percentage of the maximum speed.On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 100.

Mix This parameter allows you to select the type of control, passing continuously from positionto draft control.On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 1000.

XI

Appendix

Power lift tester

� SENSORSPosition Signal read by the position sensor; values range from 0 to 100.Draft Signal read by the draft sensor; values range from 0 to 1000.

� PWM OUTPUTPWM Value that controls the current supplied to the proportional solenoid valves.

Value ranges 290 to 600.when the lfting is in movement; 0 if the elettrovalvoles are not commanded.

� LIFT STATUSStatus Displays the operating status of the lift system.

Press the control button to view the following status informationLOCK lift lockedSTOP lift operative awaiting commandCNTRL lift operating in automatic control modeFLOAT lift in float mode

XII

Appendix

Power lift tester

2 - Monitor menu2 - Draft menu

From this menu you can display the following values:

� Pwm Base Up

� PWM Base Down� PWM Max Up� PWM Max Down� Gain Up� GainDown


D r a f t

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 - P W M B a s e U p x x x

2 - P W M B a s e D o w n x x x

3 - P W M M a x U p x x x

4 - P W M M a x D o w n x x x

5 - G a i n U p x x

6 - G a i n D o w n x X

[ E ] E X I T

These are the characteristic values of the electronic lift control system.

The default values are as follows:

Values 10N 10S

PWM BaseUp 390 360

PWM BaseDown 400 420

PWM MaxUp 600 600

PWM MaxDown 600 600

Gain Up 25 18

Gain Down 45 35

XIII

Appendix

Power lift tester

2 - Monitor Menu3 - Position Menu

From this menu you can display the following values:

� Pwm Base Up� PWM Base Down� PWM Max Up

� PWM Max Down� Gain Up

� GainDown


P o s i t i o n

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 - P W M B a s e U p

2 - P W M B a s e D o w n

3 - P W M M a x U p

4 - P W M M a x D o w N

5 - G a i n U p

6 - G a i n D o w n

[ E ] E X I T

These are the characteristic values of the electronic lift control system.

The default values are as follows:

Values 10N 10S

PWM BaseUp 315 315

PWM BaseDown 310 320

PWM MaxUp 600 600

PWM MaxDown 600 600

Gain Up 10 10

Gain Down 50 50

XIV

Appendix

Power lift tester

3 - Tests MenuFrom this menu you can test the operation of the:1 - sensors2 - actuators connected to the ECU.3 - inputs


T e s t s M e n u

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 - S e n s o r s

2 - P o w e r s u p p l y

3 - I n p u t s

[ E ] E X I T

The various functions are described.

XV

Appendix

Power lift tester

3 - Tests Menu1 - Sensors menu

In this menu you can check the operation of the sensors.


S e n s o r s

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

P o s i t . . . . . . . . x x x

D r a f t . . . . . . . x x x x

[ E ] E X I T

Where:

Position Position sensor value ranging from 0 to 100Draft Draft sensor value ranging from 0 to 1000

XVI

Appendix

Power lift tester

3 - Tests Menu2 - Power supply

In this menu you check the power supply to the ECU.


P o w e r S u p p l y

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

+ 1 0 v o u t m V x x x x

[ E ] E X I T

Where:

+10V represents the output voltage value in the range 0 to 1000 mV.

XVII

Appendix

Power lift tester

3 - Tests menu3 - Inputs

In this menu you can check the operation of the ECU inputs.


I n p u t s

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

P u s h b u t t o n s

U P / D W

E x t U P / D W

P o t e n t i o m e t e r s

S e t P o i n t . . . . x x x x

M a x . h e i g h t . x x x x

L o w . s p e e d . . x x x x

C o n t r o l t y p e. . x x x x

[ E ] E X I T

Where:

Up/Down rocker switch on console

XVIII

Appendix

Power lift tester

On pressing the UP side of the rocker switch with the lift lock released, the display will appear as follows:

U P / D W U P

On pressing the DOWN side of the rocker switch with the lift lock released, the display will appear as follows:

U P / D W D o w n

ExtUP/DW ground-operated pushbuttons

On pressing the button with the UP arrow when the lift lock is released, the display will appear as follows

E x t U P / D W U P

On pressing the button with the DOWN arrow when the lift lock is released, the display will appear as follows

E x t U P / D W D o w n

Set Point on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 1000

Max. height on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 100

Lowering speed on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 100

CONTROL TYPE On pressing the control pushbutton, the following conditions are displayed

C o n t r o l t y p e L O C K

C o n t r o l t y p e S T O P

C o n t r o l t y p e C O N T RL

C o n t r o l t y p e F L O A T

XIX

Appendix

Power lift tester

5 - Alarms menu

The screen displayed on the ART is as follows:

A L A R M S L O G

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 - C a n c e l l o g

[ E ] E X I T

XX

Appendix

Power lift tester

Tester message Possible cause of fault ECU action N° of flashes

UPSV DISCONN.

UP proportional solenoid valvedisconnected.- Wiring error.

Check electrical continuity-Solenoid faulty.Check solenoid

-ECU faulty.

Loss of lift system function. 11

UPSV S.C.

Short circuit of UP proportionalsolenoid valve.

- Wiring error.

Check electrical continuity.- Solenoid faulty.

Check solenoid.- ECU faulty.


DWSV DISCONN.

DOWN proportional solenoidvalve disconnected.

- Wiring error.

Check electrical continuity.- Solenoid faulty.

Check solenoid.- ECU faulty.


DWSV S.C.

Short circuit of DOWN propor-tional solenoid valve.

- Wiring error.

Check electrical continuity.

- Solenoid faulty.Check solenoid.

- ECU faulty.


EPROM CHECKEPROM error.- ECU faulty.

Total lockup of lift system 15

POS.SENS.S.C.

Short circuit of position sensor.

- Wiring error.Check electrical continuity.

- Sensor faulty.

Check sensor.- ECU faulty.


XXI

Appendix

Power lift tester

Tester message Possible cause of fault ECU action N° of flashes

POS.SENS. DIS.

Position sensor disconnected.

- Wiring error.


- Sensor faulty.



GEN.FAIL.CPUGeneral failure of CPU.

- ECU faulty.Loss of lift system function. 23

DRAFT SENS. DIS.

Draft sensor not connected.

- Wiring error.


- Sensor faulty.


Loss of draft control function. 41

DRAFT SENS. S.C.

Draft sensor short circuit.

- Wiring error.


- Sensor faulty.


Loss of draft control function. 42

EEPROM CHECKEEPROM error.

- ECU faultyDefault values (for 10N) uti-

lised45

NO V. SENSOR

No voltage at sensor.

- Wiring error.


- ECU faulty.Check using Tests menu on

ART.

Loss of lift system function. -

XXII

Appendix

Power lift tester

Der Nachdruck des Textes und der Abbildungen ist, auch auszugsweise, verboten.

La reproduction du présent ouvrage, du texte et des ìllustratìons, mème partìelle est interdite.

Text and illustrations herewith enclosed may not be reproduced, not even in part and by any means.

E’ vietata la riproduzione, anche parziale, del testo e delle illustrazioni.

Se prohibe la reproducciòn total o parcial del texto y de las ilustraciones.

A proibida a reproduçào, até mesmo parcial, do texto e das ilustracòes.

Der zeitliche Unterschied zwischen der Aktualisierung der Druckschriften und der Durchführung technischer Verände-rungen (die ständig vorgenommen werden, um immer hochwertigere Erzeugnisse auf den Markt zu bringen) erfordernaus Gründen der Korrektheit des Hinweises, dass die in dieser Ausgabe enthaltenen Daten jederzeit geändert werdenkönnen und deshalb unverbindlich sind.

Le temps qui s’écoule entre la mise à jour en impression et les modifications techniques (ces dernières changeant con-tinuellement afin d’offrir aux utilisateurs des produits toujours plus qualifiés) nous oblige a vous signaler que lesdonnées de la présente publication pourraient être susceptibles de variations. Elles sont données sans engagement denotre part.

Because of the possible time lag between the introduction of technical modifications (an on-going process the aim ofwhich is to offer products which are being continually improved) and the latest update of the manual, we must point out,for the sake of correctness,that the data contained in this edition are liable to change at any time and are therefore notbinding.

La differenza tra i tempi di aggiornamento in stampa e i tempi delle modifiche tecniche (variando queste ultime conti-nuamente, ciò al fine di offrire prodotti sempre più qualificati) impongono di dichiarare, per correttezza, che i dati con-tenuti nella presente edizione sono suscettibili di variazione in qualsiasi momento e che quindi non sono impegnativi.

La diferencia entre los tiempos necesarios para poner al dia la impresiòn y los tiempos de las modificaciones tècnicas(las que se verifican continuamente, con el objeto de ofrecer productos cada vez màs calificados) nos imponendeclarar, por corrección, que los datos contenidos en la presente ediciòn estàn sujetos a variaciones en cualquier mo-mento y que portanto no son obligativos.

A diferença entre os tempos necessãrrios para actualizar a impressão e os tempos das modificacões técnicas (que severificam continuamente, a fim de oferecer um produto cada vez mais qualificado), obrigam-nos a declarar, que os da-dos contidos neste manuel são susceptiveis de variacão em qualquer momento e que portanto não são vinculatórios.

NOTES

05 - 2003 cod. 307.1064.3.6By Personal computing Technical Publications Dep.

05 - 2003 307.1064.3.6

agroplus 60-70-80

Documents

circuit transmission

fine abrasive

jeu de cales

marronebrown

appendixpower

appendixpower

appendixpower

integral light